PDF PDF

INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Habitat Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062
Tender document for the

NAME OF WORK: SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control,
Boom Barrier & Building Management System.
for Institute of Nano Science & Technology at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali (Punjab)
(Two Bid System)
Percentage Rate Tender for Works
PART A
Technical / Eligibility Bid
Notice Inviting Tender, Eligibility Criteria, General Conditions of Contract
PART B
Particular Specifications
Approved makes & Tender Drawings
PART C
Financial Bid
February 2019
Part-A 1
PART-A
TECHNICAL/ELIGIBILITY BID
NOTICE INVITING TENDER, ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA,
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR SUB CONTRACTOR
Part-A 2
INDEX
1.0 PRESS NOTICE 4
2.0 PART-A: TECHNICAL NIT/ELIGIBILITY BID 5
2.1 NIT/TENDER DOCUMENT 6-7
ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA 8-9
RECEIPT OF DEPOSITION OF EMD 10-10
NOTICE INVITING TENDER-NIT CPWD-6 11-14
CPWD -7 PERCENTAGE RATE TENDER 15-17
PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES (A TO F) 18-24
FORM OF EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (BANK GUARANTEE BOND) 25
FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE BOND) 26-27
INTEGRITY PACT 28-35
FORM G & FORM H 36-37
MANUFACTURER AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure A-F) 38-43
3.0 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR SUB CONTRACTOR
FOR CCTV WORK 44-49
FOR DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM 50-55
FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 56-61
FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 62-67
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL 68-68
PART B For Particular Specifications, Approved Makes and
PART C for Financial bid
Part-A 3
INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE &TECHNOLOGY
Habitat Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062
1.0. Press Notice
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
The Director, Institute of Nano Science & Technology, Mohali ( INST ), on behalf of Institute of Nano Science &
Technology Mohali invites percentage rate bids from approved and eligible contractors in composite category of
CPWD for the under Mentioned work.
SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, , EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building
Management System.
NIT NO: 04/INST/2018-19
Name of work: SITC ofCCTV, Data Networking, , EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building
Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali (Punjab)-140306
Estimated cost put to tender : ₹25, 93, 03,739/-
Earnest Money : ₹35, 94,000/-.
Period of Completion : 06 (Six) Months (180 days)
Pre Bid conference on : 05-03-2019 at INST at 11:00 AM
Uploading of clarification on website : 08-03-2019
Last Date and Time for Submission of Tender: On or before 18-03-2019 till 3.00 PM
For NIT/Tender Documents Details/downloads or any other correction /amendments /modification /

extension till the last date of submission of bids, can be downloaded free of cost from the website:
www.inst.ac.inor www.eprocure.gov.in
Part-A 4
2.0. PART-A: TECHNICAL/ELIGIBILITY BID
Part-A 5
2.1 NIT/TENDER DOCUMENT
The Director, Institute of Nano Science & Technology, Mohali (INST) invites percentage rate bids from approved &
eligible contractors in composite category of CPWD for the under mentioned work :
N.I.T.No.: 04/INST/2018-19
Name of : SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, , EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier &
work Building Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali
(Punjab)-140306
Estimated Cost ₹ 25,93,03,739/-
Period of Completion 06 (Six ) Months
Earnest Money Deposit: ₹ 35,94,000/-
Performance Guarantee 5% of tendered value of schedule
Security Deposit 2.5% of tendered value
Tender to be uploaded on website On 18-02-2019
Last Date of submission of pre-bid queries On 28-02-2019 Up to 5:00 PM

in excel sheet by e-mail only.
Date of Pre bid Meeting & Venue on 05-03-2019 at 11:00 AM at INST Mohali
Uploading Pre bid Clarification/ On 08-03-2019

amendments, if any
Last Date and time of submission of Tender 18-03-2019 up to 3:00 PM
INST shall not be responsible for any postal delay
Date and time of opening of 18-03-2019 at 3:30 PM

Technical/Eligibility bid/
Date and time of opening of Financial bid To be intimated later
Validity of offer 60 days from the date of opening of Tender
Certified that this NIT contains Part - A from page 2 to 68, Part – B from page 1 to 165 and Part - C from page 1 to 11.
This NIT amounting to Rs. 25,93,03,739/- (Rupees Twenty Five Crore Ninety Three Lakh Three Thousand Seven
Hundred Thirty Nine Only) is hereby approved.
PMC, Architect,
(Tata Consulting Engineers) (Sikka Architect Associates)
Director,
Consultant (Engineering) Institute of Nano Science & Technology

Part-A 6
2.2. INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS FOR TENDERING FORMING PART OF BID DOCUMENT.
The Director, Institute of Nano Science & Technology, Mohali (INST) invites percentage rate bids from approved &
eligible contractors in composite category of CPWD for the under mentioned work :
of
Time and date of opening of

and other Documents shall
Period during which EMD,
Last date & time
S. NIT Name of work
Estimated cost put to
submission of tender
Period of Completion
No. No.
& Location
Earnest Money
be submitted
tender
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
03:00 PM on 18-03-.2019
03.30 PM on 18-03-.2019
1 NAME OF WORK: SITC of CCTV, Data
Networking, , EPABX, Access Control,
03/INST/2018-19
₹25,93,03,739/-
Boom Barrier & Building Management
₹ 35,94,000/-
System at INST Campus at Sector-81,
18-03-2019
Knowledge City, Mohali.
180days
Up to
1. The bidder is required to quote his rate in percentage above / below the estimated cost of work i.e.
₹25, 93, 03,739/-
2. The tender document consisting of specifications, the schedule of quantities of various types of items to be
executed and the set of terms and conditions of the contract to be compiled with and other necessary
documents can be seen and Downloaded from website www.inst.ac.in or www.eprocure.gov.in free of cost.
3. The intending bidder should read the schedule of quantities, additional conditions, additional specifications,
particular specifications, CPWD- 6 and other terms and conditions given in the NIT. He should only submit his
bid if he considers himself eligible and he is in possession of all the documents required. The bidder should also
read the General Conditions of Contract for CPWD Works 2014 with up to date correction slips, which is available
with Government of India Publications.
4. Information and Instructions for bidders posted on website shall form part of bid document.
5. The Tender can only be submitted after deposing of original EMD in the form of Demand Draft or Pay Order or
Banker’s Cheque or Fixed Deposit Receipts and Bank Guarantee of any scheduled Bank towards EMD in favour
of Director, INST, Mohali, be submitted along with the tender documents.
Part-A 7
ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA
The contractors who fulfill the following requirements shall be eligible to apply. Joint ventures are not accepted.
i) Approved and eligible registered contractors of CPWD in appropriate class in composite category of CPWD.
ii) The enlistment of contractors should be valid on last date of submission of tenders. In case only the last date of
submission of tender is extended, the enlistment of contractor should be valid on the original date of submission
of tender.
OR
iii) The Contractors, who fulfill the following requirements, shall be eligible to apply. Joint Ventures are not
accepted.
(a) The definite proof from the appropriate authority not less than Executive Engineer or equivalent rank of
having satisfactorily completed the works as mentioned below during the last Seven years ending previous
day of last day of submission of Bids:
Three similar completed works each costing not less than Rs. 10.37 crores
OR
Two similar completed works each costing not less than Rs. 15.56 crores
OR
One similar completed work each costing not less than Rs. 20.75 crores
Similar work shall mean completed work containing items of Data Networking, CCTV, Access control system, Building
management system, Telephone system, EPABX system including any below mentioned three or more
Components executed under single agreement:
 CCTV System
 Data Networking system
 Access control system
 Building management system
 Telephone system & EPABX System
Note: Only the cost of components / items mentioned in similar work definition shall be considered for the purpose of
determining eligibility. The same shall have to be mentioned invariably in column 5 of form “C”. The certified copy of
final bill shall be submitted for verification.
b) For highlighting experience in similar works, Bidder should furnish the following:
List of eligible similar nature of works successfully completed during the last seven years in (Form “G”).
Performance report of works referred to in form “G” ----In form “H”
6. List of Documents to be submitted along with the tender:
i. Treasury Challan/ Demand Draft/ Pay order or Banker’s Cheque/ Deposit at call receipt/FDR/ Bank Guarantee
of any scheduled Bank against EMD (Applicable to all bidders)
ii. Enlistment Order of the Contractor (Applicable to CPWD registered contractors)
iii. Copy of Certificate of Registration for GST & GST return up to 30/09/2018 (Applicable to all bidders)
iv. Manufacturers Authorization letter (Annexure-A,B,C,D,E&F) (Applicable to all bidders).
v. Documents for proof of similar works- Form “C” & Form “D” (Applicable to bidders complying to point-iii as
mentioned above in eligibility criteria).
7. Integrity Pact of the bid document shall be signed between Authorized Signatory /Executive Engineer and the
successful bidder after acceptance of bid.
Part-A 8
8. It will be mandatory to constitute Dispute Redressal Committee (DRC) & contractor or INST can only seek
arbitration if not satisfied with the decision of DRC.
9. The bid submitted shall be invalid if:
i The bidder is found ineligible.
ii The bidder does not deposit original EMD with the office of Director INST, Mohali.
iii The bidder does not submit all the documents as required and as mentioned above in point No-7
iv If any discrepancy is noticed between the documents at the time of submission of bid by the lowest
contractor the bid shall become invalid.
v if a bidder does not quote any percentage above / below on the total amount of the tender or any section
/ Sub head in percentage rate tender, The tender shall be treat as invalid and will not be considered as lowest
tenderer.
vi In the event of tender being submitted by a firm, it must signed separately by each partner thereof or in
the event of the absence of any partner, it must be signed on his behalf by a person holding a power of attorney
authorizing him to do so, such power of attorney to be produced with the tender and it must disclose that the
firm is duly registered under the Indian Partnership Act 1932.
10. If the contractor is found ineligible after opening of bids, his bid shall become invalid.
11. If any discrepancy is noticed between the documents at the time of submission of bid by the lowest contractor
the bid shall become invalid.
Part-A 9
Receipt of deposition of original EMD
(Receipt No....................../ Date.....................)
1 Name of work SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier &
Building Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City,
Mohali.
2 NIT No 04/INST/2018-19
3 Estimated Cost ₹ 25,93,03,739/-
4 Amount of Earnest ₹ 35,94,000/-

Money Deposit
5 Last date of Up to 3:00 PM on 18-03-2019

submission of bid
(# To be filled by EMD receiving Officer)
Name of Contactor
1
Form of EMD
2
Amount Earnest Money

3 Deposit
Date of submission of
EMD
4
Signature, Name and Designation of EMD
Receiving officer (FO. INST)
Along with Office Stamp
Part-A 10
CPWD-6 FOR TENDERING
Percentage rate bids are invited on behalf of Institute of Nano Science and Technology, Mohali. Percentage rate
bids from competent specialized agencies having experience in installation and commissioning sewage treatment
plant for the work of “: SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, , EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building
Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali.”
1. The enlistment of the contractors should be valid on the last date of submission of bids.
In case the last date of submission of tender is extended, the enlistment of contractor should be valid on the original
date of submission of bids.
1.1 The work is estimated to cost ₹ 25, 93, 03,739/-. This estimate, however, is given merely as a rough guide.
2. Agreement shall be drawn with the successful bidders on prescribed Form No. CPWD 7 (or other
Standard Form as mentioned) which is available as a Govt. of India Publication and also available on
website. Bidders shall quote his rates as per various terms and conditions of the said form which will form
part of the agreement.
3. The time allowed for carrying out the work will be 180 days from the date of start as defined in schedule
‘F’ or from the first date of handing over of the site, whichever is later, in accordance with the phasing, if
any, indicated in the bid documents.
4. (i). The site for the work is available.
(ii). The architectural & structural drawing shall be made available in phased manner as per requirement
of the same as per approved programme of completion submitted by the contractor after award of
the work.
5 The bid document consisting of plans, specifications, the schedule of quantities of various types of items
to be executed and the set of terms and conditions of the contract to be complied with and other
necessary documents except Standard General Conditions of Contract Form can be seen from website
www.eprocure.gov.in or www.inst.ac.in free of cost.
6. When tenders are invited in three stage system and if it is desired to submit revised financial bid then it
shall be mandatory to submit revised financial bid. If not submitted then the bid submitted earlier shall
become invalid.
7. Earnest Money ₹ 35,94,000/- can be paid in the form of Demand Draft or Pay order or Banker’s Cheque
or Fixed Deposit Receipt (drawn in favour Director, INST, Mohali payable at Mohali) along with Bank
Guarantee of any Scheduled Bank wherever applicable in accordance with the Form annexed hereto
having validity for 6 months or more from the last date of receipt of tenders shall be submitted with the
tender.
A part of earnest money is acceptable in the form of bank guarantee also. In such case, minimum 50%
of earnest money or ₹ 20 lakh, whichever is less, shall have to be deposited in shape prescribed above,
and balance may be deposited in shape of Bank Guarantee of any schedule bank having validity for 6
months or more from the last date of receipt of bids.
The original EMD shall be deposited by the bidder before opening of Eligibility/ Technical Bid in the office
of the Director, Institute of Nano Science and Technology, Mohali, failing which the tender shall be
rejected.
Part-A 11
The bank details of INST are as follows:
1. Account Name : Director, INSTMohali
2. Name of Bank : CanaraBank
3. Bank Address : Sector-34A,Chandigarh-160022
4. Type of Account : CurrentAccount
5.Account No. : 2452201001102
6. IFSC Code : CNRB0002452
7. MICR Code : 160015003
Copy of Enlistment Order and certificate of work experience and other documents as specified in the press notice shall
be submitted with the tender. However, certified copy of all the documents as specified in press notice shall have to be
submitted by the lowest bidder only within a week physically in the office of the tender opening authority.
Bid/ tender documents submitted by intending bidders shall be opened only of those bidders, whose
original EMD deposited along with the tender and other documents placed envelope are found in order.
8.0 “Submission of Tender”
Tender shall be submitted by the bidders in Three envelopes along with letter of transmittal as attached with
this document in the following manner:
Envelope No- 1 shall contain the EMD
Envelope No-2 shall contain signed and stamped documents confirming the eligibility of the bidder (Technical
Bid)
Envelope No-3 shall contain singed and stamped price bid (Financial Bid).
Bidder shall clearly mention the envelope No. on each envelope. All envelopes shall be put together in one large
envelope and submitted. Addressed to the
The Director,
Institute of Nano Science & Technology Habitat
Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062
Sub: NIT No.: 4/INST/2018-19 for the work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control,
Boom Barrier & Building Management System. For INST at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali (Pb.)
Opening of technical bid and financial
After evaluation of applications of tenders, a list of short listed bidders will be prepared. Whose eligibility documents are
found to be in order.
Thereafter the financial bids of only the verified eligible bidders shall be opened at the notified time, date and place in
the presence of the qualified bidders or their representatives.
The bid shall remain valid for a period of 60 days from the date of opening of Technical bid.
Part-A 12
The bid submitted shall be opened at 03:30 PM on 18-03-2019
9. The bid/ tender submitted shall become invalid if:

i. The bid is not submitted in three envelopes along with letter of transmittal / not mentioning envelope No. on all
the envelopes / not submitted as per instruction given above “Submission of Tender”
ii. The bidder does not deposit original EMD with the office of Director INST, Mohali.
iii The bidder does not submit all the documents as required and as mentioned above in List of
Documents to be submitted along with the tender.
iv If any discrepancy is noticed between the documents at the time of submission of bid by the lowest
contractor the bid shall become invalid.
v if a bidder does not quote any percentage above / below on the total amount of the tender or any section
/ Sub head in percentage rate tender, The tender shall be treat as invalid and will not be considered as
lowest tenderer.
vi In the event of tender being submitted by a firm, it must signed separately by each partner thereof or in the
event of the absence of any partner, it must be signed on his behalf by a person holding a power of attorney
authorizing him to do so, such power of attorney to be produced with the tender and it must disclose that the firm is
duly registered under the Indian Partnersh
10. Intending Bidders are advised to inspect and examine the site and its surroundings and satisfy
themselves before submitting their bids as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil (so far as is
practicable), the form and nature of the site, the means of access to the site, the accommodation they
may require and in general shall themselves obtain all necessary information as to risks, contingencies
and other circumstances which may influence or affect their bid. A bidder shall be deemed to have full
knowledge of the site whether he inspects it or not and no extra charge consequent on any
misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed. The bidders shall be responsible for arranging and
maintaining at his own cost all materials, tools & plants, water, electricity access, facilities for workers
and all other services required for executing the work unless otherwise specifically provided for in the
contract documents. Submission of a bid by a bidders implies that he has read this notice and all other
contract documents and has made himself aware of the scope and specifications of the work to be done
and of conditions and rates at which stores, tools and plant, etc. will be issued to him by the Government
and local conditions and other factors having a bearing on the execution of the work.
11. The competent authority on behalf of the Director,INST Mohali does not bind itself to accept the lowest
or any other bid and reserves to itself the authority to reject any or all the bids received without the
assignment of any reason. All bids in which any of the prescribed condition is not fulfilled or any condition
including that of conditional rebate is put forth by the bidders shall be summarily rejected.
Canvassing whether directly or indirectly, in connection with bidders is strictly prohibited and the bids
submitted by the contractors who resort to canvassing will be liable for rejection.
12. The competent authority on behalf of Director,INST Mohali reserves to himself the right of accepting the
whole or any part of the bid and the bidders shall be bound to perform the same at the rate quoted.
13. The contractor shall not be permitted to bid for works in the INST / CPWD Circle (Division in case of
contractors of Horticulture/ Nursery category) responsible for award and execution of contracts, in which
his near relative is posted a Divisional Accountant or as an officer in any capacity between the grades of
Superintending Engineer and Junior Engineer (both inclusive). He shall also intimate the names of
persons who are working with him in any capacity or are subsequently employed by him and who are
near relatives to any gazetted officer in the Central Public Works Department or in the Ministry of Urban
Part-A 13
Development. Any breach of this condition by the contractor would render him liable to be removed from
the approved list of contractors of this Department.
14. No Engineer of Gazetted Rank or other Gazetted Officer employed in Engineering or Administrative
duties in an Engineering Department of the Government of India is allowed to work as a contractor for a
period of one year after his retirement from Government service, without the prior permission of the
Government of India in writing. This contract is liable to be cancelled if either the contractor or any of his
employees is found any time to be such a person who had not obtained the permission of the Government
of India as aforesaid before submission of the bid or before submission of the bid or engagement in the
contractor’s service.
15. The bid for the works shall remain open for acceptance for a period of Sixty (60) days from the date of
opening of financial bids, if any bidders withdraws his bid before the said period or issue of letter of
acceptance, whichever is earlier, or makes any modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid which
are not acceptable to the department, then the Government shall, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy, be at liberty to forfeit 50% of the said earnest money as aforesaid. Further the bidders shall not
be allowed to participate in the re-bidding process of the work.
16. This notice inviting Bid shall form a part of the contract document. The successful bidders/ contractor, on
acceptance of his bid by the Accepting Authority shall within 15 days from the stipulated date of start of
the work, sign the contract consisting of:
a) The Notice Inviting Bid, all the documents including additional conditions, specifications and
drawings, if any, forming part of the bid as uploaded at the time of invitation of bid and the rates
quoted online at the time of submission of bid and acceptance thereof together with any
correspondence leading thereto
b) Standard C.P.W.D. Form 7/8 or other Standard C.P.W.D. Form as applicable.
c) Standard General Condition of Contract for CPWD 2014 (amended upto last date of receipt of
tender.
17. The rate quoted by contractor / bidder should include all the prevailing taxes, including GST, labour cess etc.
Pre-Bid conference shall be held on 05-03-2019 at 11:00 AM at Institute of Nano Science and Technology, Habitat
Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062 to clear the doubts of intending bidders, if any. The tenderers are
requested to submit their questions/queries in writing (also in editable excel format) to the Director, Institute of
Nano Science and Technology, Mohali and email to
Niranjan.singh@inst.ac.in/Niranjan.singh1952@gmail.com up to 5:00 PM on 28-02-2019.
Director, INST, Mohali
Part-A 14
CPWD FORM NO. 7
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE, PUNJAB.
STATE: Punjab
PERCENTAGE RATE TENDER & CONTRACT FOR WORKS

Tender for the work of: SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier &
Building Management System , at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali
(Punjab) to be submitted the by 3:00 PM on 18-03-2019 to the Director, INST, Mohali to be
opened in presence of tenderers who may be present at 3:30 PM on 18-03-2019 in the
office of Director, INST, Mohali.
TENDER
I/We have read and examined the Notice Inviting Tender, Schedule A, B, C, D, E & F, Specifications applicable,
Drawings & Designs, General Rules and Directions, Conditions of Contract, Clauses of Contract, Special Conditions,
Schedule of Rate and other documents and Rules referred to in the conditions of contract and all other contents in the
tender document for the work.
I/We hereby tender for the execution of the work specified for the Director, INST, Mohali within the time specified in
Schedule ‘F’, viz. Schedule of Quantities and in accordance in all respects with the Specifications, Designs, Drawings
and instructions in writing referred to in Rule-1 of General Rules and Directions and in Clause 11 of the Conditions of
Contract and with such materials as are provided for, by and in respects in accordance with, such conditions so far as
applicable.
We agree to keep the tender open for 60 Sixty days from the date of opening of tender and not to make any modifications
in its terms and conditions.
A sum of ₹ 35,94,000/- is hereby forwarded in FDR of a Scheduled Bank/ Demand Draft of a Scheduled Bank/ Bank
guarantee issued by a scheduled bank as earnest money. If I/we fail to furnish the prescribed Performance Guarantee
within prescribed period, I/we agree that the said Director, INST, Mohali or his successor in office shall without prejudice
to any other right or remedy be at liberty to forfeit the said Earnest Money absolutely. Further, if I/we fail to commence
work as specified, I/we agree that Director, INST, Mohali or his successors in office shall, without prejudice to any other
right or remedy available in law, be at liberty to forfeit the said Performance Guarantee absolutely. The said
Performance Guarantee shall be a guarantee to execute all the works referred to in the tender documents upon the terms
and conditions contained or referred to those in excess of that limit at the rates to be determined in accordance with the
provision contained in Clause 12.2 & 12.3 of the tender form. Further, I/We agree that in case of forfeiture of earnest
money or Performance Guarantee as aforesaid, I/We shall be debarred for participation in the re-tendering process of the
work.
I/ We undertake and confirm that eligible similar work(s) has/ have not been got executed through another contractor on
back to back basis. Further that, if such a violation comes to the notice of INST, Mohali, then I/we shall be debarred for
tendering in INST, Mohali in future forever. Also, if such a violation comes to the notice of INST, Mohali before date of
start of work, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be free to forfeit the entire amount of Earnest Money Deposit/ Performance
Guarantee.
I/We hereby declare that I/we shall treat the tender documents, drawings and other records connected with the work as
Secret / Confidential documents and shall not communicate information / derived therefrom to any person other than a
person to whom I/we am/are may authorized to communicate the same or use the information in any manner prejudicial
to the safety of the State.
Part-A 15
Dated .......................XX Signature of Contractor....................................
Witness: - .................XX. Postal Address: - ...............................................
Address: - .................XX.
Occupation: - ...........XX.
Telephone No.
Fax:-
E-Mail:-
Part-A 16
ACCEPTANCE
The above tender (as modified by you as provided in the letters mentioned hereunder) is accepted by me for and
on behalf of the INST, Mohali for a sum of ₹.........................
(Rupees.....................................................................................
The letters referred to below shall form part of
this contract agreement. For & on behalf of INST, Mohali
i) ……………… XXX Signature................................................
ii) ……………… XXX
iii) ……………… XXX
iv) ……………… XXX
Dated: ................................. Authorized Signatory, INST
XXX: To be filled by the INST
XX: To be filled by the Contractor
Part-A 17
PERFORMA OF SCHEDULES (A TO F)
SCHEDULE ‘A’
Schedule of quantities- As per Part –C of Page – 1-10
SCHEDULE ‘B’
Schedule of materials to be issued to the contractor.
S. No. Description of item. Quantity. Rate in figures & words Place of
at which the material will issue
be charged to the contractor
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NIL
SCHEDULE ‘C’
Tools and plants to be hired to the contractor
S.No. Description. Hire charges per day Place of Issue
NIL
SCHEDULE ‘D’
Extra schedule for specific requirements/ documents for the work, if any.
a) Technical Specifications. - Part – B - Page No. 2 to 133
b) Tender drawings List - Part – B - Page No. 134 to 137
SCHEDULE ‘E’
Schedule of component of other materials, labour, POL etc, for price escalation.
CLAUSE 10C : Not Applicable
CLAUSE 10 CA : Not Applicable
CLAUSE 10CC : Not applicable
Part-A 18
Name of work :SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, , EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier
&Building Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City,
Mohali.
1. Reference to General Conditions of Contract: General Conditions of Contract 2014 with
amendments issued up to the last date of submission of tender.
2 Estimated Cost of work : ₹ 25, 93, 03,739/-

3 Earnest Money : ₹ 35, 94,000/- (To be returned after receiving performance
guarantee).
4 Performance Guarantee 5% of tendered value
5 Security Deposit 2.5% of tendered value
SCHEDULE ‘F’:
General Rules & Directions:
Officer Inviting Tender : Director, INST, Mohali.

Maximum Percentage for quantity of items
Work to be executed beyond which rates
are to be determined in accordance with
Clauses 12.2 & 12.3 : Refer Clause-12 below
Definitions:
Engineer-in-Charge: Consultant (Engg), INST
Accepting Authority: Director, INST, Mohali (Pb)
PMC(Project Management Consultant) Tata Consulting Engineers ( TCE)
Architect Sikka Architects & Associates
Percentage on cost of materials and labour 15%
to cover all overheads and profits
Standard Schedule of Rates: Delhi Schedule of Rates 2018 ( E & M)with correction slips up to date of
receipt of tender.
Department : Institute of Nano Science and Technology, Mohali.
Standard CPWD Contract Form : Form GCC 2014, CPWD Form 7 modified & duly amended up to date of
submission of tender.
Clause-1:
1. Time allowed for submission of Performance 10 days
guarantee from date of issue of letter of
acceptance, in days.
2. 1 to 5 Days
Maximum allowable extension with late
fee @ 0.10% per day of performance
Part-A 19
guarantee amount beyond the period as
provided in (i) above
Clause-2: i Authority for fixing compensation under Director, INST Mohali

clause 2
ii Whether Clause 2(A) shall be applicable Not Applicable
CLAUSE 5 Number of days from the date of issue of 15Days
letter of acceptance for reckoning date of
start.
Time allowed for execution of work 180 days
Authority to decide
i Extension of time Director, INST, Mohali (Pb.)

ii Re-scheduling of Mile stone Director, INST, Mohali (Pb.)
iii Shifting of Date of Start in case of Director, INST, Mohali (Pb.)
delay in handing over of site
Clause 6, 6A
Clause applicable – (6 or 6A) Clause-6A (Computerized
Measurement to be submitted by
agency)
Clause 7 Gross work to be done together with net ₹. 4.0 Crore
payment /adjustment of advances for
material collected, if any, since the last
such payment for being eligible to interim
payment.
yes
Clause-10-B Whether clause 10-B (ii) shall be
(ii): applicable
Component of labour expressed as Not applicable
Clause-10-C percent of total value of work.
Clause-10 CA: Not applicable
Not applicable
Clause 10 CC to be applicable in
contracts with stipulated period of
completion exceeding the period
shown in the next column
Schedule of component of other materials, Labour, POL etc. for price escalation:
Component of civil construction

materials (except materials covered
Part-A 20
under clause 10CA) expressed as Not applicable
percent of total value of work
Component of labour expressed as

percent of total value of work.
Component of P.O.L. expressed as

percent of total value of work.
Specifications to be followed for

Clause-11 execution of work As per Part B (Page no. 2-
133)
Clause-12: Type of Work Project and original works

12.2 & 12.3 Deviation limit beyond which clause
12.2 & 12.3 shall apply for Building 30%
work
12.5(i) Deviation limit beyond which clause 100%
12.2 & 12.3 shall apply for foundation
works (except earth work)
(ii) Deviation limit for items in earth work
subhead of DSR or related items 100%
Clause-16: Competent Authority for deciding Director, INST, Mohali
reduced rates
Clause-17:
Defect Liability Period 24 Months
Part-A 21
Clause-18: List of mandatory machinery tools
& Plants to be deployed by the
Contractor at site As per Annexure-II
Clause-25: Dispute Redressal Committee (DRC)
Constitution of Dispute Redressal Committee Competent Authority to appoint

(DRC) DRC.
Constitution of DRC shall be uploaded in due Director, INST, Mohali

course
Clause-36 (i)
S Minimum Discipline Designation Minimum Number Rate at which recovery shall

r Qualification (Principal Experience be made from contractor in
. of Technical Technical/ the event of non-deployment.
N Representati Technical
o ve Representative) Figures Words
1 Graduate Electrical / Principal 5 Years 1 No ₹ 25,000/- ₹ Twenty Five

. Engineer Electronics Technical per month thousand only
representative per month
2 Graduate/Di Electrical / Project/Site 4/3 Years 1 No ₹ 20,000/- ₹ Twenty

ploma Electronics Engineer per month thousand only
Engineer per month
Note:
1. Foremen, Supervisors and Safety Stewards with basic qualification and SHE certificate as per
requirement and instruction of Engineer in Charge at site.
2. The recovery, if any, for non-deployment of project manager shall be done from date of start of the
project and the recoveries for non-deployment of other staff including technical representatives for
E&M works starts ‘After 60 days’ or ‘As per site requirement to be mutually decided in consultation
with the EIC’, whichever is earlier.
3. Assistant Engineers retired from Government services who are holding Diploma will be treated at par
with Graduate Engineers. Diploma holder with minimum 10 year relevant experience with a reputed
construction company can be treated at par with Graduate Engineers for the purpose of such
deployment subject to the condition that such diploma holders should not exceed 50% of requirement
of degree engineers.
4. The contractor shall submit a certificate of employment of the technical representative(s) (in the form
of copy of Form -16 or CPF deduction issued to the Engineers employed by him) along with every
account bill/final bill and shall produce evidence if at any times so required by the Engineer-in-charge.
5. The CV of technical persons shall be presented to Engineer in charge before deployment in above
work for approval. Once inducted they will not be transferred or removed without the permission on
Engineer in Charge.
Part-A 22
Clause-42:
i) a) Schedule/ Statement for determining
theoreitical quantity of cement & bitumen Delhi Schedule of Rates 2016 with correction slips
issued up to the date of receipt of tender and as per
nomenclature of the items.
ii) Variations permissible on theoretical quantities.
a) Cement 2% plus/ minus.
b) Steel Reinforcement and structure steel
sections for each diameter, section and category. 2% plus/ minus.
c) Bitumen for all work. 2.5% Plus only & Nil on minus side.
d) All other materials Nil
Part-A 23
TABLE OF MILE STONE (S)
Name of work: SITC of CCTV, Data Networking,EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building
Management System.
Time Allotted
Amount to be withheld in
Sl. in days
Description of Milestone case of non-achievement
N
(Physical & Financial) of milestone (% of
o. (From date of
Tendered Amount)
start)
1 Approval of Designs of 30 days

1.00%
Drawings
2 Work upto 1/6th of the 60 days

1.00%
tendered amount

1.00%
tendered amount

1.00%
tendered amount
5 Full Work Completed in all 180 days

1.00%
respect.
Terms of Payment:
Stage payment to the contractor for various components of work shall be regulated as
per CPWD Specifications. For works for which the % payment is not specially
mentioned in the specification, the rate of stage payment shall be decided by Engineer - In
Charge.
Stage Payment for SITC items, shall be as mentioned below:
a. 50 % payment within 15 days of supply of the system at site in good condition

Along with test reports etc.
b. 30% payment after installation (ready for testing and commissioning).
c. 15% payment after testing, commissioning.
d. 5% after Handing over to the department for beneficial use
Part-A 24
FORM OF EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT
(BANK GUARANTEE BOND)
WHEREAS, contractor.................. (Name of contractor) (hereinafter called "the contractor") has submitted his tender
dated ............. (date) for the construction of .............................................. (name of work) (hereinafter called "the
Tender")
KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that we......................................... (Name of bank) having our registered office
at................................... (hereinafter called "the Bank") are bound unto ................................................... (Name and
division of Executive Engineer) (hereinafter called "the Engineer-in-Charge") in the sum of ₹ ......................... (₹ in words
.................................................) for which payment well and truly to be made to the said Engineer-in-Charge the Bank
binds itself, his successors and assigns by these presents. SEALED with the Common Seal of the said Bank this
.................day of................. 20.......
THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
(1) If after tender opening the Contractor withdraws, his tender during the period of validity of tender (including extended
validity of tender) specified in the Form of Tender;
(2) If the contractor having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by the Engineer-in-Charge:
(a) fails or refuses to execute the Form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to contractor, if required; OR
(b) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Guarantee, in accordance with the provisions of tender document and
Instructions to contractor,
We undertake to pay to the Engineer-in-Charge either up to the above amount or part thereof upon receipt of his first
written demand, without the Engineer-in-Charge having to substantiates his demand, provided that in his demand the
Engineer-in-Charge will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of one or any of the
above conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.
This Guarantee will remain in force up to and including the date* ............. after the deadline for submission of tender as
such deadline is stated in the Instructions to contractor or as it may be extended by the Engineer-in-Charge, notice of
which extension(s) to the Bank is hereby waived. Any demand in respect of this Guarantee should reach the Bank not
later than the above date.
DATE............. SIGNATURE OF THE BANK
WITNESS.................. SEAL
(SIGNATURE, NAME AND ADDRESS)
*Date to be worked out on the basis of validity period of 6 months from last date of receipt of tender.
Part-A 25
FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY
BANK GUARANTEE BOND
In consideration of the President of India (hereinafter called “The Government”) having offered to accept the terms and
conditions of the proposed agreement between _______________________ and ________________________
(hereinafter called “the said contractor(s)” for the work ______________________________ (hereinafter called “The
said agreement”) having agreed to production of a irrevocable Bank Guarantee for ₹__________________ (Rupees
__________________________________ only) as security/guarantee from the contractor(s) for compliance of his
obligations in accordance with the terms and conditions in the said agreement.
We _________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “the Bank) hereby undertake to (indicate the

name of the bank) pay to the Government an amount not exceeding ₹___________ (Rupees ____________________
only) on demand by the Government.
We _____________________________ do hereby undertake to pay the amounts due and payable (indicate the name
of the bank) under this Guarantee without any demure, merely on a demand from the Government stating that the
amount claimed is required to meet the recoveries due or likely to be due from the said contractor(s). Any such demand
made on the Bank shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the bank under this Guarantee.
However, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding ₹__________ (Rupees
___________________ only).
We, the said bank further undertake to pay to the Government any money so demanded notwithstanding any dispute or
disputes raised by the contractor(s) in any suit or proceeding pending before any court or Tribunal relating thereto, our
liability under this present being absolute and unequivocal.
The payment so made by us under this bond shall be a valid discharge of our liability for payment there under and the
contractor(s) shall have no claim against us for making such payment.
We _________________________________ further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall (indicate the name
of the Bank) remain in full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the performance of the said
agreement and that it shall continue to be enforceable till all the dues of the Government under or by virtue of the said
agreement have been fully paid and its claims satisfied or discharged or till Engineer-in-Charge on behalf of the
Government certified that the terms and conditions of the said agreement have been fully and properly carried out by
the said contractor (s) and accordingly discharges this guarantee.
We __________________________________ further agree with the Government that the government (indicate name
of the bank) shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without effecting in any manner our obligations
hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said agreement or to extend time of performance by the said
contractor(s) form time to time or to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers exercisable by the
Government against the said contractor(s) and to forbear or enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to the said
agreement and we shall not be relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation, or extension being granted to
the said contractor(s) or for any forbearance, act of omission on the part of the Government or any indulgence by the
Government to the said contractor(s) or by any such matter or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties
would, but for this provision, have effect of so relieving us.
This guarantee will not be discharged due to the change in the constitution of the Bank or the contractor(s).
We _____________________________________ lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee except (indicate the
name of Bank) with the previous consent of the Government in writing.
This guarantee shall be valid upto ____________________ unless extended on demand by Government.
Notwithstanding anything mentioned above, our liability against this guarantee is restricted to ₹___________________
Part-A 26
(Rupees ___________________ only) and unless a claim in writing is lodged with us within six months of the date of
expiry or the extended date of expiry of this guarantee all our liabilities under this guarantee shall stand discharged.
Dated the ____________________ day of_____________________ for_____________________.
(Indicate the name of Bank)
Part-A 27
INTEGRITYPACT
To,
………………………..,
………………………..,
………………………..
Sub: NIT No.: 4/INST/2018-19 for the work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access
Control, Boom Barrier & Building Management System.
for INST at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali (Pb.)
Dear Sir,
It is hereby declared that Institute of Nano Science &Technology, Mohali is committed to follow the principle
of transparency, equity and competitiveness in public procurement.
The subject Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition that the Bidder will
sign the integrity Agreement, which is an integral part of tender/bid documents, failing which the tenderer
/bidder will stand disqualified from the tendering process and the bid of the bidder would be summarily
rejected.
This declaration shall form part and parcel of the Integrity Agreement and signing of the same shall be
deemed as acceptance and signing of the Integrity Agreement on behalf of the Institute of Nano Science &
Technology, Mohali.
Yours faithfully,
Director,
Institute of Nano Science & Technology, Mohali
Part-A 28
INTEGRITY PACT
To,
The Director,
Institute of Nano Science & Technology
Habitat Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X,
Mohali-160062
Sub: NIT No.: 4/INST/2018-19 for the work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control,
Boom Barrier & Building Management System.
Dear Sir,
I/We acknowledge that Nano Science & Technology, Mohali is committed to follow the principles
thereof as enumerated in the Integrity Agreement enclosed with the tender/bid document.
I/We agree that the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition that
I/We will sign the enclosed integrity Agreement, which is an integral part of tender documents,
failing which I/We will stand disqualified from the tendering process. I/We acknowledge that the
making of the bid shall be regarded as an unconditional and absolute acceptance of this condition
of the NIT.
I/We confirm acceptance and compliance with the Integrity Agreement in letter and spirit and further
agree that execution of the said Integrity Agreement shall be separate and distinct from the main
contract, which will come into existence when tender/bid is finally accepted by Nano Science &
Technology, Mohali. I/We acknowledge and accept the duration of the Integrity Agreement, which
shall be in the line with Article 1 of the enclosed IntegrityAgreement.
I/We acknowledge that in the event of my/our failure to sign and accept the Integrity Agreement,
while submitting the tender/bid, Nano Science &Technology, Mohali shall have unqualified,
absolute and unfettered right to disqualify the tenderer/bidder and reject the tender/bid is
accordance with terms and conditions of the tender/bid.
Yours faithfully,
(Duly authorized signatory of the Bidder)
Part-A 29
To be signed by the bidder and same signatory competent / authorized
to sign the relevant contract on behalf of Institute of Nano Science &
Technology, Mohali.
INTEGRITY AGREEMENT
This Integrity Agreement is made at ............... on this...........day of ............. 20…....

BETWEEN
Institute of Nano Science & Technology (Hereinafter referred as the
Principal/Owner’, which expression shall unless repugnant to the meaning or
context hereof include its successors and permitted assigns)
AND
.............................................................................................................(Name and Address of
the
Individual/firm/Company) through....................................................................
(Hereinafter referred to as the (Details of duly authorized signatory)
“Bidder/Contractor” and which expression shall unless repugnant to the meaning

or context here of include its successors and permitted assigns)
Preamble
WHEREAS the Principal / Owner has floated the Tender (NIT No. 4/INST/2018-19) (hereinafter
referred to as “Tender/Bid”) and intends to award, under laid down organizational procedure,
contract for “Sub: NIT No.: 4/INST/2018-19 for the work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, ,
EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building Management System. for INST at Sector-
81, Knowledge City, Mohali (Pb.).” hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”.
AND WHERE AS the Principal /Owner values full compliance with all relevant laws of
and, rules, regulations, economic use of resources and of fairness /transparency in its
relation with its Bidder(s) and Contractor(s).
AND WHEREAS to meet the purpose aforesaid both the parties have agreed to enter
into this Integrity Agreement (hereinafter referred to as “Integrity Pact” or “Pact”), the
terms and conditions of which shall also be read as integral part and parcel of the
Tender/Bid documents and Contract between the parties.
NOW, THEREFORE, inconsideration of mutual covenants contained in this Pact, the

parties hereby agree as follows and this Pact witnesses as under:
Part-A 30
Article 1: Commitment of the Principal / Owner
(1) The Principal / Owner commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent
corruption and to observe the following principles:
(a) No employee of the Principal/Owner, personally or through any of his/her family

members, will in connection with the Tender, or the execution of the Contract, demand,
take a promise for or accept, for self or third person, any material or immaterial benefit
which the person is not legally entitled to.
(b) The Principal/Owner will, during the Tender process, treat all Bidder(s) with equity
and reason. The Principal/Owner will, in particular, before and during the Tender
process, provide to all Bidder(s) the same information and will not provide to any
Bidder(s) confidential / additional information through which the Bidder(s) could obtain
an advantage in relation to the Tender process or the Contract execution.
(c) The Principal/Owner shall endeav our to exclude from the Tender process any
person, whose conduct in the past has been of biased nature.
(2) If the Principal/Owner obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees
which is a criminal offence under the Indian Penal code (IPC)/Prevention of Corruption
Act, 1988 (PC Act) or is in violation of the principles herein mentioned or if there be a
substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal/Owner will inform the Chief Vigilance
Officer and inaddition can also initiate disciplinary actions as per its internal laid down
policies and procedures.
Article 2: Commitment of the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)

(1) It is required that each Bidder/Contractor (including their respective officers,
employees and agents) adhere to the highest ethical standards, and report to the
Government / Department all suspected acts of fraud or corruption or Coercion or
Collusion of which it has knowledge or becomes aware, during the tendering process
and throughout the negotiation or award of a contract.
(2) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) commits himself to take all measures necessary to

prevent corruption. He commits himself to observe the following principles during his
participation in the Tender process and during the Contract execution:
(a) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm,
offer, promise or give to any of the Principal/Owner’s employees involved in the Tender
process or execution of the Contract or to any third person any material or other benefit
which he/she is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of
any kind whatsoever during the Tender process or during the execution of the Contract.
(b) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not enter with other Bidder(s) into any undisclosed
Part-A 31
agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to
prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-
submission of bids or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to cartelize in the
bidding process.
(c) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not commit any offence under the relevant IPC/PC
Act. Further the Bidder(s) /Contract(s) will not use improperly, (for the purpose of
competition or personal gain), or pass on to others, any information or documents
provided by the Principal/Owner as part of the business relationship, regarding plans,
technical proposals and business details, including information contained or
transmitted electronically.
(d) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) of foreign origin shall disclose the names and
addresses of agents/representatives in India, if any. Similarly Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)
of Indian Nationality shall disclose names and addresses of foreign
agents/representatives, if any. Either the Indian agent on behalf of the foreign principal
or the foreign principal directly could bid in a tender but not both. Further, in cases
where an agent participates in a tender on behalf of one manufacturer, he shall not be
allowed to quote on behalf of another manufacturer along with the first manufacturer in
a subsequent/parallel tender for the same item.
(e) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all
payment she has made is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any
other intermediaries in connection with the award of theContract.
(3) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not instigate third persons to commit of fences out
lined above or be an accessory to such offences.
(4) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm
indulge in fraudulent practice means a willful misrepresentation or omission of facts or
submission of fake/forged documents in order to induce public official to act in reliance
thereof, with the purpose of obtaining unjust advantage by or causing damage to
justified interest of other sand/ or to influence the procurement process to the detriment
of the Governmentinterests.
(5) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm use
Coercive Practices (means the act of obtaining something, compelling an action or
influencing a decision through intimidation, threat or the use of force directly or
indirectly, where potential or actual injury may befall upon a person, his/her reputation
or property to influence their participation in the tendering process).
Article 3: Consequences of Breach

Without prejudice to any rights that may be available to the Principal/Owner under law
or the Contract or its established policies and laid down procedures, the Principal
/Owner shall have the following rights in case of breach of this Integrity Pact by the
Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) and the Bidder/ Contract or accepts and undertakes or espect
and uphold the Principal/Owner’s absolute right:
(1) If the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s), either before award or during execution of Contract

has committed a transgression through a violation of Article 2 above or in any other
Part-A 32
form, such as to put his reliability or credibility in question, the Principal/Owner after
giving1 4days notice to the contractor shall have powers to disqualify the
Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)from the Tender process or terminate/determine the Contract, if
already executed or exclude the Bidder/Contractor from future contract award
processes. The imposition and duration of the exclusion will be determined by the
severity of transgression and determined by the Principal/Owner. Such exclusion may
be forever or for a limited period as decided by the Principal/Owner.
(2) Forfeiture of EMD / Performance Guarantee/Security Deposit: If the
Principal/Owner has disqualified the Bidder(s) from the Tender process prior to the
award of the Contract or terminated/determined the Contract or has accrued the right
to terminate/determine the Contract according to Article 3(1), the Principal/Owner apart
from exercising any legal rights that may have accrued to the Principal/Owner, may in
its considered opinion forfeit the entire amount of Earnest Money Deposit, Performance
Guarantee and Security Deposit of the Bidder/Contractor.
(3) Criminal Liability: If the Principal/Owner obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder

or Contractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder or
Contractor which constitutes corruption within the meaning of Prevention of Corruption
Act, or if the Principal/Owner has substantive suspicion in this regard, the
Principal/Owner will inform the same to law enforcing agencies for further investigation.
Article 4: Previous Transgression

(1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgressions occurred in the last 5years with
any other Company in any country confirming to the anticorruption approach or with
Central Government or State Government or any other Central/State Public Sector
Enterprises in India that could justify his exclusion from the Tenderprocess.
(2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from
theTender process or action can be taken for banning of business dealings/ holiday
listing of the Bidder/Contractor as deemed fit by the Principal/Owner.
(3) If the Bidder/Contractor can prove that he has resorted / recouped the damage
caused by him and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the
Principal/Owner may, at its own discretion, revoke the exclusionprematurely.
Article 5: Equal Treatment of all Bidders/Contractors/Associate Agencies

(1) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) undertake(s) to demand from all subcontractors a
commitment in conformity with this Integrity Pact. The Bidder/Contractor shall be
responsible for any violation(s) of the principles laid down in this agreement/ Pact by
any of its Associate agencies.
(2) The Principal/Owner will enter into Pacts on identical terms as this one with all
Bidders and Contractors.
(3) The Principal/Owner will disqualify Bidders, who do not submit, the duly signed Pact
between the Principal/Owner and the bidder, along with the Tender or violate its
provisions at any stage of the Tender process, from the Tenderprocess.
Part-A 33
Article 6- Duration of the Pact
This Pact begins when both the parties have legally signed it. It expires for the
Contractor/Vendor 12 months after the completion of work under the contract or till the
continuation of defect liability period, whichever is later and for all other bidders, till the
Contract has been awarded.
If any claim is made/lodged during the time, the same shall be binding and continue to
be valid despite the lapse of this Pacts as specified above, unless it is
discharged/determined by the Competent Authority, i.e. Institute of Nano Science &
Technology.
Article 7- Other Provisions
(1) This Pact is subject to Indian Law, place of performance and jurisdiction is the head
quarters of the division of the Principal/Owner who has floated thetender.
(2) Changes and supplements need to be made in writing. Side agreements have not been
made.
(3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this Pact must be signed by all
the partners or by one or more partner holding power of attorney signed by all partners
and consortium members. In case of a Company, the Pact must be signed by a
representative duly authorized by board resolution.
(4) Should one or several provisions of this Pact turn out to be invalid; the remainder
of this Pact remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement
to the original intensions.
(5) It is agreed term and condition that any dispute or difference arising between the
parties with regard to the terms of this Integrity Agreement / Pact, any action taken by
the Owner/Principal in accordance with this Integrity Agreement/ Pact or interpretation
thereof shall not be subject to arbitration.
Article 8- LEGAL AND PRIOR RIGHTS

All rights and remedies of the parties hereto shall be in addition to all the other legal
rights and remedies belonging to such parties under the Contract and/or law and the
same shall be deemed to be cumulative and not alternative to such legal rights and
remedies aforesaid. For the sake of brevity, both the Parties agree that this Integrity
Pact will have precedence over the Tender/Contact documents with regard any of the
provisions covered under this Integrity Pact.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have signed and executed this Integrity Pact at the
place and date first above mentioned in the presence of following witnesses:
...............................................................
Part-A 34
(For and on behalf of Principal/Owner)
................................................................
(For and on behalf of
Bidder/Contractor) WITNESSES:
1...............................................
(Signature, name andaddress)
2. ...............................................
(Signature, name and address)
Place:
Dated:
Part-A 35
1
S.No.
2
Name of work / Project and
Location
3
Owner or sponsoring organization
Part-A
Gross amount of work done of
items/ components mentioned in
Cost of work in Crore of rupees
5
Date of Commencement as per
contract
6
Stipulated date of completion
FORM ‘G’
TENDERS.
Actual Date of Completion

8
Whether the work was done on back
36
to back basis—Yes/No
9
Litigation / arbitration cases

pending / in
progress with details *
DETAILS OF ELIGIBLE SIMILAR NATURE OF WORKS COMPLETED DURING THE
LAST SEVEN YEARS ENDING PREVIOUS DAY OF LAST DATE OF SUBMISSION OF
10
Name and address/ telephone

Number of officer to whom
reference
may be made
FORM ‘H’
PERFORMANCE REPORT OF WORKS REFERRED TO IN FORMS “C”
1. Name of work/project & location :
2. Agreement no. :
3. Estimated cost :
4. Tendered cost :
5. Date of start :
6. Date of completion
(i) Stipulated date of completion :
(ii) Actual date of completion :
1. (a)Whether case of levy of compensation
for delay has been decided or not? : Yes / No
(b) If decided, amount of compensation levied
for delayed compeletion, if any. :
8. PerformanReport :
(1) Quality of work : Outstanding/Very Good/Good/Poor
(2) Financial soundness : Outstanding/Very Good/Good/Poor
(3) Technical Proficiency : Outstanding/Very Good/Good/Poor
(4) Resourcefulness : Outstanding/Very
Good/Good/Poor
(5) General Behaviour : Outstanding/Very good/Good/Poor
Executive Engineer or Equivalent
Part-A 37
TO BE ISSUED BY ONE OF THE APPROVED MANUFACTURERS AS PER LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
(HONEYWELL / PELCO / AXIS) FOR CCTV WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-A)

To
The ‘Director’
Institute of Nano Science and Technology (INST)
Habitat Centre, Sector-64,
Phase-X, Mohali-160062
Dear Sir,
Ref. Your Tender document NIT No NIT NO: 4/INST/2018-19, dated _____________
We hereby confirm that (Name of Bidder)………………………………………… may enter into a contract with
Institute of Nano Science and Technology (INST) , Mohali against your requirement as contained in the
above referred Tender documents for the goods manufactured by us.
We confirm to extend our full Support to M/S…………………………………………….. (Name of Bidder /

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
[Signature with date, name and designation]
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________ ( Name of CCTV OEM)
[Name & address of the manufacturers]
Note: 1.This letter of authorization should be on the letter head of the manufacturing firm and
should be signed by Regional sales Head of the Manufacturer or above.
2. Original letter should be attached With the BID
Part-A 38
(SIEMENS/HONEYWELL EBI/JOHNSON CONTROLS/SCHNEIDER/ ANERGY) FOR BMS
WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-B)
To
The ‘Director’
Dear Sir,

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________ ( Name of BMS OEM)
Part-A 39
(SYSTIMAX / CORNING/ AMP) FOR PASSIVE DATA NETWORKING WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-C)

To
The ‘Director’
Dear Sir,

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________ ( Name of Passive Data Networking

OEM)
Part-A 40
TO BE ISSUED BY ONE OF THE APPROVED MANUFACTURERS AS PER LIST OF APPROVED MAKES (HP /
CISCO/ JUNIPER) FOR ACTIVE DATA NETWORKING WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-D)

To
The ‘Director’
Dear Sir,

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
for and on behalf of Messrs__________________________ ( Name of Active Data Networking OEM)
Part-A 41
(HONEYWELL / CARDAX/ LENEL) FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-E)
To
The ‘Director’
Dear Sir,

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________ ( Name of Access Control System OEM)
Part-A 42
TO BE ISSUED BY ONE OF THE APPROVED MANUFACTURERS AS PER LIST OF APPROVED MAKES (AVAYA
/ CISCO / NORTEL) FOR IPPBX SYSTEM WORKS
MANUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure-F)
To
The ‘Director’
Dear Sir,

Contractor).
Yours faithfully,
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________ ( Name of IPPBX OEM)
Part-A 43
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR SUB-CONTRACTOR
FOR CCTV SYSTEM
1. The main lowest tenderer have to submit the following documents for association of CCTV System sub-
contractor within one month from the date of award of work. The proposed specialized agency shall fulfill
the following eligibility criteria:-
(a) Should have satisfactorily completed similar works as mentioned below during the last Seven years
ending on previous day of last date of bid submission. No joint venture is allowed.
Three completed similar works each costing not less than Rs. 1.86 Crores.
OR
Two completed similar works each costing not less than Rs. 2.79 Crores.
OR
One completed similar work costing not less than Rs. 3.72 Crores.
Similar work shall mean work of “Supply, Installation, Testing & commissioning of CCTV System”.
The value of executed works shall be brought to current cost in given by enhancing the actual value of work
at simple rate of 7% per annum; calculated from the date of completion to last date of submission of tenders.
(b) The proposed CCTV Sub contractor should submit a copy of an affidavit on non-judicial stamp paper of
Rs. 10/- as under, the same shall be counter signed by main contractor.
“I/We undertake and confirm that eligible similar work(s) has/have not been got executed through another
contractor on back to back basis. Further that, if such a violation comes to the notice of PMC / Client, then
I/we shall be debarred for tendering in future contracts of the Institute- INST Mohali. Also, if such a violation
comes to the notice of PMC/ Client before date start of work, the Engineer-in- charge shall be free to forfeit
the entire amount of Earnest Money Deposit / Performance Guarantee.
2. The main contractor should submit the duly filled form ‘A’, ‘B’ & ‘C’ (form enclosed) with enclosure for
eligible specialized agency, to get associated for execution of the CCTV System component of works in
wholesome manner and as per the conditions set out in the MOU to be entered into, between the one who
is awarded the work (main contractor) and the associated eligible CCTV System Sub contractor.
3. In addition to the eligibility criteria as mentioned above in point 1, of the proposed associated CCTV
System Sub contractor, copy of his/their registration in GST, duly attested by the Main Contractor shall be
submitted to the PMC who will submit these documents to the Institute Engineer In charge for deciding the
eligibility within three days of receipt of the same.
4. The main contractor will submit MOU signed with eligible and approved specialized agency. The MOU
in the enclosed form shall be signed by both the parties’ i.e. main contractor as 1st party and associated
CCTV System Sub contractor as 2nd party.
5. In the event of the concerned associated agency i.e. associated CCTV System Sub contractor, not
performing satisfactorily or failure of associate/ sub-contractor to complete the work, the main contractor
on the written direction of the Engineer –in- charge, shall remove the Associate/sub-contractor deployed
on the work and shall submit name of new associate who fulfill the conditions mentioned in NIT to execute
the leftover work without any loss of time or variation in cost to the department in this regard. Such
associates shall also enter into tripartite Agreement/Contract along with the main tenderer and shall meet
all the guarantee for the equipments already supplied for which payment has been released by the Engineer
–in- charge. in part. If any equipment supplied for the work, during the currency of the earlier CCTV System
Associated/sub-contractor and paid partly by the Engineer –in- charge. ,becomes redundant /not in a
position to be installed and commissioned and put to beneficial use due to change in agency for execution
of work, the main contractor shall be liable for replacement of the equipment(s) at no cost to Engineer –in-
charge. No change of associated electrical Contractor will be allowed without prior approval of the Engineer
–in- charge.
Part-A 44
6. The main contractor shall be responsible and liable for proper and complete execution of the work and
ensure coordination and completion of all specialized agencies (Sub Contractor).
7. The associate or sub-contractor shall sign a MOU along with the main tenderer, for technical compliance
of specification, guarantee etc.
8. The associated CCTV System sub-contractor shall attend the inspection of the work by the Engineer-in-
Charge of works as and when required.
Part-A 45
FORM-A
WILLINGNESS CERTIFICATE
Name of work: - SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control, Boom Barrier & Building
Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali
I hereby give my willingness to work as CCTV System sub-contractor for the above mentioned work.
I will execute the work as per specifications and conditions for the agreement and as per direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Also I will employee full time technically qualified supervisor/engineer for the works. I
will attend inspection of officers of the department as and when required.
Dated:
Signature of the CCTV System sub-contractor
Part-A 46
FORM“B”
DETAILS OF ALL WORKS OF SIMILAR CLASS COMPLETED DURING THE LAST SEVEN
YEARS ENDING PREVIOUS DAY OF LAST DATE OF BID SUBMISSION
(Completion certificate & any other certificate in support of eligibility criteria issued & signed by the
client/owner is to be attached)
Details of electrical installation

Cost of work in lacs of rupees


may be made
pending / in
reference
Location
contract
S.No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
* Indicate gross amount claimed and amount awarded by the Arbitrator.
Signature of Tenderer (s).
Part-A 47
FORM‘C’
(Affidavit on non-judicial stamp paper of Rs. 10/-)
I/We undertake and confirm that eligible similar work(s) has / have not been got executed through another
contractor on back to back basis. Further that, if such violation comes to the notice of Department, then
I/we shall be debarred for tendering in CPWD in future forever. Also, if such a violation comes to the notice
of Department before date of start of work, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be free to forfeit the entire amount
of Earnest Money Deposit / Performance Guarantee.
Date:
Place:
Signature (s) of Associated Sub-Contractor

With Seal of Firm
Countersigned
(Main Contractor)
Part-A 48
MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING [M.O.U] BETWEEN
1] M/S [Name of the firm with full address]

Enlistment Status (for CPWD enlisted)
Contractor).
Valid Upto:
[Henceforth called the main contractor]
And

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
[Henceforth, called Associated CCTV Contractor]
For the execution of Work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access Control, Boom
Barrier & Building Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali
We state that M.O.U between us will be treated as an agreement and has legality as per Indian Contract
Act [amended upto date] and the PMC / Engineer-in charge can enforce all the terms and conditions of the
agreement for execution of the above work. Both of us shall be responsible for the execution of work as per
the agreement to the extent this MOU allows. Both the parties shall be paid consequent to the execution
as per agreement to the extent this MOU permits. In case of any dispute, either of us will go for
mediation/arbitration by the Director INST, Mohali. Any of us may appeal against the mediation/arbitration
to the Director INST, Mohali. His decision shall be final and binding on both of us.
We have agreed as under:
1] The CCTV contractor will execute all CCTV works in the wholesome manner as per terms and conditions
of the agreement. Payment of the associated CCTV sub-contractor shall be governed vide para 19.1.11 &
19.1.12 of CPWD-6 & clause 7 of GCC-2014 and as amended up to date.
2] The CCTV contractor shall be liable for disciplinary action if he failed to discharge the action[s] and other
legal action as per agreement besides forfeiture of the security deposit.
3] All the machinery and equipments, tools and tackles required for execution of the CCTV works, as per
agreement, shall be the responsibility of the CCTV contractor.
4] The site staff required for the CCTV work shall be arranged by the CCTV contractor as per terms and
conditions of the agreement.
5] Site order book maintained for the said work shall be signed by the main contractor as well as by the
Engineer of the Associated CCTV Sub-Contractor and by Associated CCTV Sub-Contractor himself.
6] All the correspondence regarding execution of the CCTV works shall be done by the Department with
the Associated Contractor with a copy to the main contractor. In case of non-compliance of the provisions
of agreement, the main contractor, as well as the associated CCTV Sub-contractor shall be responsible.
The action under clauses 2 and 3 shall be initiated and taken against the main contractor.
SIGNATURE OF MAIN CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE OF ASSOCIATED CCTV CONTRACTOR
Date: Date:
Place: Place:
Part-A 49
FOR DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM
1. The main lowest tenderer have to submit the following documents for association of Data Networking
System sub-contractor within one month from the date of award of work. The proposed specialized agency
shall fulfill the following eligibility criteria:-
OR
OR
Similar work shall mean work of “Supply, Installation, Testing & commissioning of Data Networking
System”.
(b) The proposed Data Networking System Sub contractor should submit a copy of an affidavit on non-
judicial stamp paper of Rs. 10/- as under, the same shall be counter signed by main contractor.
eligible specialized agency, to get associated for execution of the Data Networking System component of
works in wholesome manner and as per the conditions set out in the MOU to be entered into, between the
one who is awarded the work (main contractor) and the associated eligible Data Networking System Sub
contractor.
3. In addition to the eligibility criteria as mentioned above in point 1, of the proposed associated Data
Networking System Sub contractor, copy of his/their registration in GST, duly attested by the Main
Contractor shall be submitted to the PMC who will submit these documents to the Institute Engineer In
charge for deciding the eligibility within three days of receipt of the same.
Data Networking System Sub contractor as 2nd party.
5. In the event of the concerned associated agency i.e. associated Data Networking System Sub
contractor, not performing satisfactorily or failure of associate/ sub-contractor to complete the work, the
main contractor on the written direction of the Engineer-in charge, shall remove the Associate/sub-
contractor deployed on the work and shall submit name of new associate who fulfill the conditions
mentioned in NIT to execute the leftover work without any loss of time or variation in cost to the department
in this regard. Such associates shall also enter into tripartite Agreement/Contract along with the main
tenderer and shall meet all the guarantee for the equipments already supplied for which payment has been
released by the Engineer-in charge. in part. If any equipment supplied for the work, during the currency of
the earlier Data Networking System Associated/sub-contractor and paid partly by the Engineer-in charge.
,becomes redundant /not in a position to be installed and commissioned and put to beneficial use due to
change in agency for execution of work, the main contractor shall be liable for replacement of the
equipment(s) at no cost to Engineer-in charge. No change of associated electrical Contractor will be allowed
without prior approval of the Engineer-in charge.
Part-A 50
8. The associated Data Networking System sub-contractor shall attend the inspection of the work by the
Engineer-in-Charge of works as and when required.
Part-A 51
FORM-A
I hereby give my willingness to work as Data Networking System sub-contractor for the above mentioned
work.
Dated:
Signature of the Data Networking System sub-contractor
FORM“B”
Part-A 52



may be made
pending / in
reference
Location
contract
S.No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Part-A 53
FORM‘C’
Date:
Place:

With Seal of Firm
Countersigned
(Main Contractor)
Part-A 54

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
And

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
[Henceforth, called Associated Data Networking System Contractor]
Act [amended upto date] and the PMC/ Engineer-in-charge can enforce all the terms and conditions of the
1] The Data Networking System contractor will execute all Data Networking System works in the wholesome
manner as per terms and conditions of the agreement. Payment of the associated Data Networking System
sub-contractor shall be governed vide para 19.1.11 & 19.1.12 of CPWD-6 & clause 7 of GCC-2014 and as
amended up to date.
2] The Data Networking System contractor shall be liable for disciplinary action if he failed to discharge the
action[s] and other legal action as per agreement besides forfeiture of the security deposit.
3] All the machinery and equipments, tools and tackles required for execution of the Data Networking
System works, as per agreement, shall be the responsibility of the Data Networking System contractor.
4] The site staff required for the Data Networking System work shall be arranged by the Data Networking
System contractor as per terms and conditions of the agreement.
Engineer of the Associated Data Networking System Sub-Contractor and by Associated Data Networking
System Sub-Contractor himself.
6] All the correspondence regarding execution of the Data Networking System works shall be done by the
Department with the Associated Contractor with a copy to the main contractor. In case of non-compliance
of the provisions of agreement, the main contractor, as well as the associated Data Networking System
Sub-contractor shall be responsible. The action under clauses 2 and 3 shall be initiated and taken against
the main contractor.
SIGNATURE OF MAIN CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE OF ASSOCIATED DATA NETWORKING

SYSTEM CONTRACTOR
Date: Date:
Place: Place:
Part-A 55
FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
1. The main lowest tenderer have to submit the following documents for association of Access Control
System sub-contractor within one month from the date of award of work. The proposed specialized agency
shall fulfill the following eligibility criteria:-
OR
OR
Similar work shall mean work of “Supply, Installation, Testing & commissioning of Access Control
System”.
(b) The proposed Access Control System Sub contractor should submit a copy of an affidavit on non-
judicial stamp paper of Rs. 10/- as under, the same shall be counter signed by main contractor.
eligible specialized agency, to get associated for execution of the Access Control System component of
works in wholesome manner and as per the conditions set out in the MOU to be entered into, between the
one who is awarded the work (main contractor) and the associated eligible Access Control System Sub
contractor.
3. In addition to the eligibility criteria as mentioned above in point 1, of the proposed associated Access
Control System Sub contractor, copy of his/their registration in GST, duly attested by the Main Contractor
shall be submitted to the PMC who will submit these documents to the Institute Engineer In charge for
deciding the eligibility within three days of receipt of the same.
Access Control System Sub contractor as 2nd party.
5. In the event of the concerned associated agency i.e. associated Access Control System Sub contractor,
not performing satisfactorily or failure of associate/ sub-contractor to complete the work, the main contractor
on the written direction of the Engineer-in charge, shall remove the Associate/sub-contractor deployed on
the work and shall submit name of new associate who fulfill the conditions mentioned in NIT to execute the
leftover work without any loss of time or variation in cost to the department in this regard. Such associates
shall also enter into tripartite Agreement/Contract along with the main tenderer and shall meet all the
guarantee for the equipments already supplied for which payment has been released by the Engineer-in
charge. in part. If any equipment supplied for the work, during the currency of the earlier Access Control
System Associated/sub-contractor and paid partly by the Engineer-in charge ,becomes redundant /not in
a position to be installed and commissioned and put to beneficial use due to change in agency for execution
of work, the main contractor shall be liable for replacement of the equipment(s) at no cost to Engineer-in
charge. No change of associated electrical Contractor will be allowed without prior approval of the Engineer-
in charge.
Part-A 56
8. The associated Access Control System sub-contractor shall attend the inspection of the work by the
Engineer-in-Charge of works as and when required.
Part-A 57
FORM-A
I hereby give my willingness to work as Access Control System sub-contractor for the above mentioned
work.
Dated:
Signature of the Access Control System sub-contractor
Part-A 58
FORM“B”



may be made
pending / in
reference
Location
contract
S.No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Part-A 59
FORM‘C’
Date:
Place:

With Seal of Firm
Countersigned
(Main Contractor)
Part-A 60

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
And

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
[Henceforth, called Associated Access Control System Contractor]
Barrier & Building Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali.
Act [amended upto date] and the PMC/ Engineer-in- charge can enforce all the terms and conditions of the
1] The Access Control System contractor will execute all Access Control System works in the wholesome
manner as per terms and conditions of the agreement. Payment of the associated Access Control System
sub-contractor shall be governed vide para 19.1.11 & 19.1.12 of CPWD-6 & clause 7 of GCC-2014 and as
amended up to date.
2] The Access Control System contractor shall be liable for disciplinary action if he failed to discharge the
action[s] and other legal action as per agreement besides forfeiture of the security deposit.
3] All the machinery and equipments, tools and tackles required for execution of the Access Control System
works, as per agreement, shall be the responsibility of the Access Control System contractor.
4] The site staff required for the Access Control System work shall be arranged by the Access Control
System contractor as per terms and conditions of the agreement.
Engineer of the Associated Access Control System Sub-Contractor and by Associated Access Control
System Sub-Contractor himself.
6] All the correspondence regarding execution of the Access Control System works shall be done by the
Department with the Associated Contractor with a copy to the main contractor. In case of non-compliance
of the provisions of agreement, the main contractor, as well as the associated Access Control System Sub-
contractor shall be responsible. The action under clauses 2 and 3 shall be initiated and taken against the
main contractor.
Signature of Main Contractor Signature of Associated Access control System Contractor
Date: Date:
Place: Place:
Part-A 61
FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. The main lowest tenderer have to submit the following documents for association of Building
Management System sub-contractor within one month from the date of award of work. The proposed
specialized agency shall fulfill the following eligibility criteria:-
OR
OR
Similar work shall mean work of “Supply, Installation, Testing & commissioning of Building
Management System”.
(b) The proposed BMS Sub contractor should submit a copy of an affidavit on non-judicial stamp paper of
Rs. 10/- as under, the same shall be counter signed by main contractor.
eligible specialized agency, to get associated for execution of the Building Management System
component of works in wholesome manner and as per the conditions set out in the MOU to be entered into,
between the one who is awarded the work (main contractor) and the associated eligible Building
Management System Sub contractor.
3. In addition to the eligibility criteria as mentioned above in point 1, of the proposed associated Building
Management System Sub contractor, copy of his/their registration in GST, duly attested by the Main
Contractor shall be submitted to the PMC who will submit these documents to the Institute Engineer In
charge for deciding the eligibility within three days of receipt of the same.
Building Management System Sub contractor as 2nd party.
5. In the event of the concerned associated agency i.e. associated Building Management System Sub
contractor, not performing satisfactorily or failure of associate/ sub-contractor to complete the work, the
main contractor on the written direction of the Engineer-in charge, shall remove the Associate/sub-
contractor deployed on the work and shall submit name of new associate who fulfill the conditions
mentioned in NIT to execute the leftover work without any loss of time or variation in cost to the department
in this regard. Such associates shall also enter into tripartite Agreement/Contract along with the main
tenderer and shall meet all the guarantee for the equipments already supplied for which payment has been
released by the Engineer-in charge. in part. If any equipment supplied for the work, during the currency of
the earlier Building Management System Associated/sub-contractor and paid partly by the Engineer-in
charge. ,becomes redundant /not in a position to be installed and commissioned and put to beneficial use
due to change in agency for execution of work, the main contractor shall be liable for replacement of the
equipment(s) at no cost to Engineer-in charge. No change of associated electrical Contractor will be allowed
without prior approval of the Engineer-in charge.
Part-A 62
8. The associated Building Management System sub-contractor shall attend the inspection of the work
by the Engineer-in-Charge of works as and when required.
Part-A 63
FORM-A
Management System at INST Campus at Sector-81, Knowledge City, Mohali.
I hereby give my willingness to work as Building Management System sub-contractor for the above
mentioned work.
Dated:
Signature of the Building Management System sub-contractor
Part-A 64
FORM“B”



may be made
pending / in
reference
Location
contract
S.No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Part-A 65
FORM‘C’
Date:
Place:

With Seal of Firm
Countersigned
(Main Contractor)
Part-A 66

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
And

Contractor).
Valid Upto:
[Henceforth, called Associated Building Management System Contractor]
Act [amended upto date] and the PMC/ Engineer-in- charge can enforce all the terms and conditions of the
1] The Building Management System contractor will execute all Building Management System works in the
wholesome manner as per terms and conditions of the agreement. Payment of the associated Building
Management System sub-contractor shall be governed vide para 19.1.11 & 19.1.12 of CPWD-6 & clause
7 of GCC-2014 and as amended up to date.
2] The Building Management System contractor shall be liable for disciplinary action if he failed to discharge
the action[s] and other legal action as per agreement besides forfeiture of the security deposit.
3] All the machinery and equipments, tools and tackles required for execution of the Building Management
System works, as per agreement, shall be the responsibility of the Building Management System contractor.
4] The site staff required for the Building Management System work shall be arranged by the Building
Management System contractor as per terms and conditions of the agreement.
Engineer of the Associated Building Management System Sub-Contractor and by Associated Building
Management System Sub-Contractor himself.
6] All the correspondence regarding execution of the Building Management System works shall be done by
the Department with the Associated Contractor with a copy to the main contractor. In case of non-
compliance of the provisions of agreement, the main contractor, as well as the associated Building
Management System Sub-contractor shall be responsible. The action under clauses 2 and 3 shall be
initiated and taken against the main contractor.
SIGNATURE OF MAIN CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE OF ASSOCIATED BMS CONTRACTOR
Date: Date:
Place: Place:
Part-A 67
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL (on letter Head of the bidder)
To,
The Director,
Institute of Nano Science &
Technology Habitat Centre,
Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-
160062
Sub: NIT No.: 4/INST/2018-19 for the work “SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access
Control, Boom Barrier & Building Management System.
Sir,
Having examined the details given in press notice and bid document for the above work, I/we
here-by submit the relevant information in three (3) sealed envelopes as required containing
the following documents.
1. I/we have furnished all information and details necessary for eligibility and have no further
pertinent information to supply.
It is also certified that I/we shall be liable to be debarred, disqualified/cancellation of

enlistment in case any information furnished by me/us found to be incorrect.
Enclosures:
Seal of bidder
Date of submission: Signature(s) of bidder(s).
Part-A 68
CONSTRUCTION& DEVELOPMENT OFINSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY AT

MOHALI
NAME OF WORK: SITC OF CCTV, DATA NETWORKING, , EPABX, ACCESS CONTROL, BOOM
BARRIER & BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
INDEX
S. No. Description Page No.
1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR IP BASED CCTV SYSTEM 2-23

2. DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM ( ACTIVE & PASSIVE COMPONENTS) 24- 68
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EPABX SYSTEM 69- 76
4. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 77- 95
5. SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOOM BARRIER SYSTEM 96- 97
6. SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 98- 161
7. LIST OF APPROVED MAKES 162-165
PART-B 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR IP BASED CCTV SYSTEM
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
NVR: The NVR shall contain the recording engine, database of all network-connected cameras
and encoders, integrated components and their configurations. Server shall be provided as a
combined hardware and software device.
Workstation Software (NVR Client): The NVR Client software shall render video and act as a main
human/machine interface.
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
NVR shall provide a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI) to configure the cameras, create
schedules for recording, perform video surveillance and recording operations, and view various
reports.
NVR shall be configured to store and to view images captured by minimum 4 cameras and
scalable on same hardware for upto 128 cameras.
NVR shall have following major capabilities:
Record and monitor up to 128 IP channels at 3840 fps @ 4CIF/VGA or 3840 fps @ 720p HD or
3840 fps @ 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD. Network bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR with
Incoming: 500 Mbps, Outgoing: 425 Mbps providing a Total: 800 Mbps. Archival support of 25
channels @ 4 Mbps bitrate each, with outgoing archival storage throughput of 275 Mbps. Multi-
stream support with maximum 128 streams. Support for configuring one (1) preferred stream for
continuous recording and one (1) preferred stream for live video/motion based recording per
camera. Support for One-Way Audio (for specific IP cameras) with live, playback and clip export
on NVR desktop client for up to 64 IP channels.
Live viewing of up to 64 IP cameras on a single remote workstation with up to two (2) monitors
set up at CIF resolution. For 4CIF and HD resolution, the number of live streams needs to be
benchmarked based on client hardware configuration deployed. Cost-effective enhanced HD
video rendering on remote desktop clients with support for monitoring of up to 23 1080p HD
cameras in real time (30 fps)/690 fps 1080p HD with no-time lapse using the GPU capabilities of
in-built processor graphics with 6th generation Intel® Core™ Processors for client systems. Up
to 4 1080p HD @ 30 fps/120 fps on local client.
Powerful investigation and video archive search tools from remote client.
Capable of managing motion detection-based recording with pre-event and post-event recording
based on camera based motion detection or Server based motion detection events (SMART
VMD) and “advanced” search on recordings from remote client.
PART-B 2
Preview and Calendar Search permitting search for videos and events based on user-selected
date and time from remote client. SMART motion search — fast and efficient forensic search and
investigation for objects/motion on recorded video using SMART motion detection Analytics
algorithms on the client PC without impacting the NVR Server load.
Simultaneous use of multiple video compressions including MJPEG, MPEG-4, H.265 and H.264.
Internationalization – supports the following languages: French, German, Russian, Italian,

Spanish, Dutch, Arabic and English.
Email on alarm.
Instant clip creation from snapshot.
Dynamic IP Camera Discovery – Automatically discover all compatible cameras connected to

NVR.
Multi-level user access rights for viewing and manages access to the recorder functions.
Capable of managing continuous, scheduled, manual, event-based, and alarm-based recording

features.
Advanced security features with encryption support for communication between desktop client
to NVR and secure https login for Web Client and mobile apps.
Support for web client and mobile apps.
Mode for User Login: NVR shall have the option of two modes of user logins:
Windows Authentication: Uses Windows logged-in user name.
User DB Authentication: Uses preconfigured user name and password.
Workstation (NVR Client) shall provide the following operator options:
Configuration: The operator (with Administrator privileges) shall have the option to configure the
NVR. Live update of all configurations is supported. The following configurations shall be
possible:
System Configuration: Provide options to configure the system level settings.
Camera Configuration: Provide options to add/edit/delete IP cameras and encoders.
Schedules: Provide options to configure schedule based recording for cameras connected to the
NVR.
Input and Output: Provide options to configure camera input and output.
Sequences: Provide options to group a fixed number of cameras to view video.
PART-B 3
User Management (Users and Roles): Provide option to add/edit/delete users.
Clip Deletion Settings: Provide the ability to automatically utilize more storage on event-initiated
recording.
Independent deletion setting for continuous recording.
Independent deletion setting for event recording.
Surrounding Cameras: Provide option to grant a user the ability to view a single camera
surrounded by the cameras programmed as the “Surrounding Cameras”.
3D Positioning: The user shall be able to view a specific object in the live video in a 3-dimensional
view. This feature is available in the Context menu options and is only supported for PTZ
Cameras. 3D positioning options include: Click-based camera positioning, Rectangle selection
3D positioning, and Restore to last PTZ position.
Profile Cameras: Multi-zoom views on HD video and support to create virtual cameras by digitally
zooming into the field of view. For example: zooming in on a cash register in one view of the HD
camera while at the same time monitoring the cashier in the zoomed out view of that HD camera.
Configurations for cameras connected to NVR:
Camera Configuration: The user shall be able to configure the following parameters for
each camera connected to the NVR.
Camera Name
IP Address
Camera Type
Fixed/PTZ
Continuous Recording: All cameras added shall be defaulted to "24/7" recording with the
option to select other recording modes.
Event Based Recording: Shall be “None” by default, with the option to select motion-based
recording.
User name: Shall display and enable setting the user name for a camera.
Password: Shall enable setting the password for a camera.
Camera Advanced Settings: Shall enable configuration of Video Format, Compression Format,
Resolution, Compression, Video Frame Rate, GOP, Record Quality Settings, Clip Deletion
Settings, Launching Web View of camera for Advanced Setup, Motion detection zones
configuration for Server based motion detection, Video Archival Settings, Multi-Stream Settings
PART-B 4
and Video Preview. Shall enable configuration of RTSP URL for cameras or encoders added
with camera type – Generic RTSP.
The following video recording options shall be supported:
Scheduled based recording: The system shall support the ability to schedule recordings for
each individual camera for times in the future. By default, the NVR shall be pre-loaded with the
following four schedules: 24x7, Weekday, Daytime, and Nighttime, which cannot be edited. A
maximum of 50 schedules can be created in the NVR.
User based recording: The user shall be able to configure user activated settings for recording
moments of interest while viewing live video from a camera. After configuring the user activated
settings, the operator can start recording of video when needed. The video is recorded for the
time period specified in the System settings for user activated recording. The User based
Recording Time Duration shall be selectable from a list of values ranging between 30 seconds
and 5 minutes.
Event based recording: Event based recording shall be possible on SMART Video Motion
Detection and alarm triggers. The NVR must be capable of managing motion detection-based
recording with pre-event and post event recording based on camera and Server-based motion
detection events. The server-based SMART VMD analytics must be object-based and not
traditional pixel-based, reducing false alarms due to changing light conditions, video noise, rain
or other false alarm triggers that occur using pixel-based (traditional) VMD.
Viewer: The NVR Viewer shall have the following minimum capabilities:
Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1, 4, 9, 16, and other customized split salvos of
live or recorded video. Standard presets shall be customizable to the user preferences.
Capable of saving current salvo as a View and allowing the user to drag this view at any later
point in time.
Capable of configuring and running scan sequences.
Capable of adjusting the contrast, brightness, and saturation settings for each camera
independently.
Capable of exporting user selected image or video clips in simple .wmv, .asf, .mpvc and .bmp
formats. Capable of attaching a digital signature for authentication of exported clips in .wmv
format.
Capability to play back the video clips exported. Each video channel that is being recorded by
the recording system shall be overlaid with text and a time stamp that is customizable by the
user.
Video format support — only playable in desktop clients and standalone Clip Player. Features
quicker exports of raw video and support for estimating clip size and split to multiple clips to
ensure clip storage media matches. Include the clip player with exported clip for easier review
PART-B 5
of video evidence and efficient investigation. Clip Player — Portable standard secure player
for archived and exported clips (*.mpvc), 360 camera de-warping and 2x2 Salvo support.
Smooth playback support with up to 256x review speed. No software needed to run on a
Windows PC, with the option to include the clip player with the exported clip.
Allow the user to initiate recording through the GUI or a controller.
Capability of complete alarm management for the alarms coming from the NVR.
Facility of surrounding camera view.
Option to perform various operations through context menu on a particular video

(live/recorded/sequence). These operations include: Full screen, point and drag, maintain
aspect ratio, toggle text, digital PTZ, add bookmark, start recording, stop recording, mark in,
mark out, save image, save image as, show surrounding cameras.
Ability to manage timeline control of the recording device, which provides camera recording
statistics. Timeline control shall have the following features: Mark input (with looping facility),
bookmark, snapshot, time slider, time jump, play controls.
Preference configuration including: frame rate of unselected panels, rendered type, preview
pane, text display format.
Search: The Search facility shall include search for recorded video and events based on date
and time.
Reports: The Report facility shall include event history report and audit log report.
Redundancy:
The NVR should be quoted in N+1 Redundancy without any manual intervention through
software only.
NVR INTEGRATIONS
NVR shall be compatible with the following interoperability standards:
Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA)
Open Network Video Interface Forum Profile S and G (ONVIF Profile S and G)
Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
NVR shall be compatible with the following Fixed and PTZ IP cameras
Supports IP cameras from the following manufacturers.
Honeywell
AXIS® Communications
PART-B 6
Sony
Panasonic
Bosc
Vivotek
Pelco
NVR shall be compatible with the following encoders:
Honeywell
AXIS® Communications
Sony
Panasonic
Bosch
Vivotek
NVR shall be compatible with the following 360° Camera solutions.
Honeywell
OncamGrandeye
Immervision Enables® - Panomorph Lenses
AXIS® 360°/180°
Arecont 360°/180°
NVR shall be compatible for Multi-site Video Management Systems:
NVR shall be seamless integrated and compatible with various Enterprise level Access Control
Security Systems
Video Analytics shall be supported through VMS:
SYSTEM HARDWARE
NVR PE: NVR shall operate with no performance degradation using the following minimum
hardware and operating system configuration:
NVR Workstation: NVR Workstation shall operate with no performance degradation using the
following recommended hardware and operating system configuration for rendering up to twenty-
three (23) 1080p HD cameras in real time (30 fps)/690 fps @ 1080p HD with no time-lapse.
PART-B 7
Workstation configuration assumes two-monitor setup. Workstation is required for remote clients
only; a local client is available on the NVR unit for configuration and monitoring. The performance
specifications below are recommended for systems with fixed or PTZ cam
VMS Specs
1. The Video Management System (VMS) shall control multiple sources of video surveillance
subsystems in a facility to collect, manage and present video in a clear and concise manner.
VMS shall intelligently determine the capabilities of each subsystem across a single or multiple
site, allowing video management of any compatible analog or digital video device through a
unified configuration platform and viewer.
2. VMS shall be based on server client architecture with server & controller containing a
database of all network-connected cameras, integrated components and their configurations;
and Workstations that will render video and act as a main user/machine interface.
3. VMS shall provide a single graphical user interface (GUI) to monitor, control and administer
digital video surveillance equipment from multiple systems and platforms.
4. VMS shall include a fully scalable enterprise-class media management system to enable
simultaneous live monitoring from multiple stations and be configurable for storage both on
and off site.
5. VMS software shall be configured to store and to view images captured by one camera or
numerous cameras and monitor connections across an unlimited number of servers.
6. The VMS application shall have following major capabilities:

a. Capable of managing pentaplex user operations of attached recording devices
simultaneously, including live viewing, recording, playback, archiving of video data to an
external storage device, and handling the exchange of data between the server and a
remote workstation.
b. Live viewing of up to 64 cameras on a single workstation with up to four monitors set up at
CIF resolution. For 1080p and up to 4K resolution, the number of live streams shall be
benchmarked based on the client hardware configuration deployed.
c. Integration with multiple digital and network video recording devices.
d. Integration with multiple video matrix switchers and matrix keyboards.
e. The number of recorders and switchers shall be scalable within a network to handle any
size of installation.
f. Capable of managing the integration with multiple digital IP cameras through compatible
recording devices.
g. Integration with electronic access control systems.
h. Integration with video analytics and a data management utility.
i. Capable of managing failover and redundant capabilities of the recording device(s) and the
database server. 1+1/N+M Recorder failover and failback automatically or manually. View
and playback on one client panel.
j. Capable of managing the investigation and video archive search tools of the recording
devices.
k. Capable of managing advanced search capabilities of the recording devices.
l. Capable of managing motion detection-based recording.
PART-B 8
m. Multi-level user access rights for managing viewing rights and access to the recorder
functions.
n. Capable of managing continuous, scheduled, manual, event-based and alarm-based
recording features of the recording devices.
o. Support for Unicast/multicast network topologies and communication protocols.
p. Macro capability to allow for custom scripts and to provide both customization and third
party integration.
q. Integrates Video Analytics of the same make as of camera and VMS OEM
r. Support for both centralized and distributed architectures.
s. Simultaneous use of multiple video compression including H.264, H.265, MPEG-4 and M-
JPEG.
t. Utilization of off-the-shelf computer workstations, servers, networking and storage
equipment.
7. Cyber Security Features of VMS:

a. Enhanced password security – non-recoverable passwords, enforcing complex passwords,
password expiry, and no default passwords.
b. Addressed Unauthenticated/Unauthorized channels.
c. Secured firewall configuration.
d. Secured Web client – enabled HTTPS and SSL, and protection from CSRF and XSS
attacks.
e. Restricted folder and Registry access to operators.
f. Secured Assemblies – Digital signing.
8. Mode for User Login: VMS Server and Workstation shall have the option of two modes of user
logins
a. Windows Authentication: Uses the Windows logged-in user name.
b. User DB Authentication: Uses a preconfigured user name and password.
9. VMS Workstation shall provide the following operator functions:

a. Configuration: The operator (with Administrator privileges) shall have the option to
configure VMS. VMS shall support live updates of all configurations. The following
configurations shall be possible:
i. Recorders Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete recorders.
ii. Camera Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete cameras and associate to a particular
recorder or switcher and map to a particular site, partition or event group.
iii. Monitor Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete monitors and map to a particular site,
partition, event group or keyboard. It shall provide an option toadd a digital monitor and
associate it with a particular workstation. It shall provide an option to configure a digital
monitor with a default salvo and startup in full screen. It shall provide an option to add
an analog monitor and associate it with a particular switcher. Option to save a digital
correction in the video input page.
iv. Switcher Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete analog video switchers.
v. Keyboard Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete keyboard controllers.
vi. User Management (Users and Roles): Option to add/edit/delete roles and associate to
predefined privileges and then add/edit/delete users and associate users with roles.
Option to associate permissions with salvo selection and tool bar buttons.
vii. Site Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a site.
viii. Workstation Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a workstation.
PART-B 9
ix. Event Group Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete event groups. Support of bulk
event association to enable/disable and adjust events for recorders and inputs in bulk.
x. Partition Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete partitions.
xi. Sequence Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a scan sequences.
xii. Intercept Key Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete intercept keys from Ethernet
joystick keyboards to change the key function to a new and desired function.
xiii. System Macro Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete macros. Option to restore
macros. Execute button option to trigger selected macros provides mechanism for
testing written macros.
xiv. Port Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete keyboard controllers and analog video
switchers to the ports available on the controller
10. Viewer
i. Capable of being launched multiple times on the same workstation a minimum of four
(4) times to display four (4) viewers on four (4) separate monitors per workstation.
ii. Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 1x5, 2x8, and 1x12
salvos of live or recorded video. The Viewer application shall be capable of a full screen
mode where only the video salvo is displayed.
iii. Each Viewer has the capability to be associated to a specific monitor on a workstation
and be assigned a unique output number that is either selectable from the viewer device
tree, an Ethernet Joystick controller, or from a system macro.
iv. Capable of saving current salvo as a View and allowing the user to select the saved view
by either dragging and dropping it into the viewer, using anjoystick controller or a system
macro.
v. Capable of selecting a particular camera or salvo by using the mouse to drag it onto the
main video viewing screen. Users shall also have an undo/redo option for camera
drag/drop and salvo selection from the viewer and joystick controller.
vi. Capable of switching an analog camera to an analog or digital monitor so that the system
will recognize to switch to the analog matrix switch or to pull the video from an encoder.
vii. Capable of choosing My Salvos (unique to the current operator) or Shared Salvos while
saving a salvo.
viii. Capable of allowing duplicate salvo names to be set by different users and in different
locations.
ix. Capable of dragging any monitor defined in the system onto a video panel and take
control of that monitor.
x. Option to send a command to the controller to switch a particular analog camera onto
the analog monitor through a drag and drop operation.
xi. Capable of configuring and running scan sequences.
xii. Capable of independently adjusting the contrast, brightness, and saturation settings for
each camera.
xiii. Support for both analog and digital PTZs through the GUI or the keyboard.
xiv. Innovative “One-Click” or “Mouse Drag” 3D PTZ control experience that does away with
legacy PTZ controls of continuous clicking.
xv. Intelligence events from cameras can be viewed at the alarm panel and trigger event
recording on recorders for further investigation.
xvi. 360° de-warping “spreads” the distorted fisheye image into natural panoramic and/or
multiple tile views. Operators can view and focus on zones of interest on live and
recorded video.
xvii. Capable of exporting user selected images or video clips. A digital signature shall be
attached to every exported clip.
xviii. Clip Creation: The Clip Creation facility shall permit multi-camera clip generation
PART-B 10
a. Story clips allow for selecting multiple cameras at different times to create a single
clip to play the cameras back in order. Also supports saving salvo information in a
story clip.
b. Salvo clips provide an instant clip export button to create an instant clip while
maintaining the salvo information. Supports pre-determined pre- and post-times
that are user-configurable in the preferences.
c. Clip preview window facility supports play back of the individual cameras prior to
commencing clip creation.
d. Capable of manually setting the clip duration in the clip creation window for each
camera
xix. Capable of playing back the exported video clips. Each video channel that is being
recorded by the recording system shall be overlaid with text and a time stamp that is
customizable by the user.
xx. Allows the user to initiate recording through the GUI or controller.
xxi. Capable of complete alarm management for the alarms coming from recorders or
switchers.
xxii. Quick and responsive alarm actions can be initiated from the preview pane options.
xxiii. Application launch pad launches other applications from within the Viewer.
xxiv. Control of operator messaging, allowing operators to communicate with each other.
Operators can exchange text, images and annotated video sources. Operators can hand
over a video source to another operator using messaging.
xxv. Ability to set up surrounding camera views. Support for setting presets in surrounding
cameras.
xxvi. Option to perform various operations through the context menu on a particular video
(live/recorded/sequence). These operations include: Full screen, point and drag, enable
square select, maintain aspect ratio, toggle text, digital PTZ, add bookmark, send
message, start recording, stop recording, mark in, mark out, save image, save image
as, and show surrounding cameras.
xxvii. Ability to manage the timeline control of the recording device, which provides camera
recording statistics. Timeline control shall have the following features: Mark in/out (with
looping facility), bookmark (including for all playing cameras or all selected cameras or
removing all bookmarks), snapshot, time slider, time search, time jump, and play
controls. Timeline control shall also include dedicated buttons for step reverse and step
forward and keyboard shortcuts for playback operations.
xxviii. Support for bookmark searches based on cameras, time duration, and comments.
xxix. Controllable by a keyboard controller connected to the VMS server/controller with the
following major features: selecting salvos, ending monitor commands, switching
operations, and PTZ control operations.
xxx. Preference configuration including: fps of unselected panels, rendered type, preview
pane, and text display format.
11. Search: The Search facility shall include searches based on date and time.
12. Reports: The Report facility shall include event history reports and audit log reports.
13. Remote Monitor: The Remote Monitor facility shall allow operators to control a remote monitor
connected to another workstation and perform review capabilities so that both the local
operator and the remote viewer can simultaneously watch the same video.
14. VMS INTEGRATIONS
i. Recorders: VMS shall support integration with digital and network video recorders
(DVRs/NVRs). VMS shall have the ability to access and manage necessary functions of
the recording devices through the VMS client interface, such as live video, recorded
video, camera configuration, PTZ control and other associated functions.
PART-B 11
ii. Analog Video Switchers: VMS shall support matrix switcher integration including camera
call up, monitor switching, video command support and PTZ support. The video
subsystem shall be the controller device for video cameras, monitors, and VCRs, and
shall associate camera inputs with monitor outputs. The system shall allow users to
program video monitors and video cameras to execute commands upon recognition of
an alarm or any other condition within the system. The user shall be able to add, edit,
delete, and partition video subsystems.
iii. Video Analytics
iv. Data Management Utility
v. IP Surveillance Control Keyboards – ethernet based
vi. Electronic Access Control Systems
15. SYSTEM HARDWARE

VMS Server
i. Server shall operate with no performance degradation using the following minimum
hardware and operating system configuration:
Processor:
Up to 5 Client Server: Single Intel® Quad Core Xeon® E3 1225V3 3.2 GHz S1150
Up to 10 Client Server: Single Intel® 6 Core Xeon® E5 2630V2 2.6 GHz
Up to 25 Client Server: Dual Intel® 6 Core Xeon® E5 2630V2 2.6 GHz
ii. System Memory (RAM):
Up to 5 Client Server: 8 GB
iii. Optical Drive: DVD+/-RW
iv. Hard Disk Drives: Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays.
Disk/RAID set 1 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146 GB
Disk/RAID set 2 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146 GB
If fault tolerance is required, RAID set one is RAID 1 or 10 and RAID set two is
RAID 10 or 0 + 1
v. Network Interface Card (NIC): Dual or compatible pair of NICs, 1 Gbps
vi. Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device
vii. Graphics Adapter: 32-bit color or higher, video resolution 1280x768 pixels, 65K colors
non-interlaced
viii. Operating System: Original software CDs and startup installation diskettes for:
Windows® Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit OR Windows Server 2012
Standard 64-bit
Microsoft SQL Express 2008 R2 OR SQL Express 2012
ix. Windows Media Player Version 12
x. For installations where the system is integrated with recording software with more than
500 cameras, install a separate database server. The specification of this server shall
be determined based on end-user deployment requirements.
VMS Monitor Workstation

i. Dual Monitor Workstation: Workstation shall operate with no performance degradation
using the following minimum hardware and operating system configuration for a two (2)
monitor setup:
Processor: Intel® Core™ i7-6700, 3.4 GHz
System Memory (RAM): 8 GB
Optical Drive: DVD-RW
PART-B 12
Hard Disk Drives: Single disk or RAID 7200 SATA 250 GB or 10K to 15K SCSI
250 GB; RAID 0 or 0+1.
Network Interface Card (NIC): 1 Gbps
Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device
Graphics Adapter: Integrated Intel HD graphics 530 or NVIDIA Quadro® NVS300
512 MB, one (1) DMS-59 cable to Dual (2) DVI or Dual (2) VGA or DVI+VGA;
Video resolution 1280x1024 pixels, 32-bit
Operating System: Windows 7 Professional or Windows 10 Enterprise, 32-/64-bit
Windows Media Player Version 12
ii. VMS Quad Monitor Workstation: Workstation shall operate with no performance
degradation using the following minimum hardware and operating system configuration
for a four (4) monitor setup:
Processor: Intel® Core™ i7-6700, 3.4 GHz
System Memory (RAM): 8 GB
Optical Drive: DVD-RW
Hard Disk Drives: Single disk or RAID 7200 SATA 250 GB or 10K to 15K SCSI
250 GB; RAID 0 or 0+1.
Network Interface Card (NIC): 1 Gbps
Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device
Graphics Adapter: Integrated Intel HD graphics 530 or NVIDIA Quadro® NVS315
1 GB PCI-E x16 LP, four (4x) Mini-Display Port to DVI Adapter and four (4x) Mini-
Display Port to DP Adapter; Video resolution 1280x1024 pixels, 32-bit
Operating System: Windows 7 Professional or Windows 10 Enterprise, 32-/64-bit
Product Line
Bullet Camera
Description
Brand
Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of
IP Network TDN Low-Light IR Bullet Camera,
1/2.7" CMOS, 2 MP @ 25fps, triple stream, Min.
Illumination required 0.01 lux @ F1.4 (color),
120dB True WDR, Min. Pixels 1920 × 1080, triple
stream, 2.7–12 mm motorized focus & zoom lens,
BLC, HLC, 3DNR, Privacy Mask, 4 IR LEDs Smart
IR with upto 60m IR distance, Dual channel Audio
BOQ Description
G.711a/G.711u/AAC, 128GB SD card support,
Alarm: 2 In/ 1out, PoE, H.264 High Profile and
MJPEG, PoE Class 3 and 12V DC, IP 67, IK 10
vandal proof, Having Operating temp range : –
40°C to 60° C. Certifications: ONVIF Profile S &
Profile G compliant, UL, CSA 60950-22, CE (EN
50130-4 & EN 55022) , FCC Part 15 & RoHS
compliant.
Product
Full HD Fixed Camera
Description
PART-B 13
Camera
Characteristics
PoE Class 3
Audio 1 in/1out
12VDC /
Yes(auto-selection)
24VAC
Housing
(Integrated or
External)
IP 66/67 IP 67
IK10 IK10
IR Illuminator
(Internal or
External)
IR Range 60m
Regulatory for
Camera, Housing
& IR Illuminator
CE / FCC Yes(EN60950-22)
UL Yes
C-Tick Yes
General
Imaging Device Ÿ 1/2.7” 2Megapixel progressive scan CMOS
Imager Type CMOS
Imager Readout Progressive scan
Maximum
2MP - 1920x1080
Resolution
ONVIF Profile S & G
Minimum
Illumination
Color : 0.01Lux @f/1.4
(May vary
B/W : 0Lux @f/1.4(IR on)
depending on the
lens)
Day/Night Method Mechanical ICR (ON / OFF / AUTO selectable)
Signal-to-Noise
50 db minimum
Ratio
Auto Iris Lens
DC IRIS
Type
Electronic Shutter
Auto/Manual, 1/3(4)~1/10000s
Range
White Balance
2,000 – 8500
Range
Dynamic Range 120 db minimum
Back light
BLC / HLC /WDR(120dB)
compensation
PART-B 14
Digital Noise 3D Dig Noise Reduction (ON / OFF

Reduction selectable)/2D
Alarm Triggers Alarm I/O
Analog video
twin outputs
output
Motion Detection/Scene change (covering,
Analytics
defocusing)/Face detect
Pravicy Zone 4 configurable windows
Motion Detection Off/ On / By Schedule
Log Function Log file with specified fields
Character Overlay Character overlay with specified fields
Compression,3D digital noise reduction

(ON/OFF) color, brightness, sharpness, contrast,
white balance,
Image Settings exposure control, exposure zones, backlight
compensation, fine
tuning of behavior at low light, rotation , and all
other Image Settings in Web UI
Electrical
RJ-45 (10/100Base-T)
Network
Power Input PoE/12VDC/24VAC

Power
Max 16W (with IR on, motorized lens working)
Consumption
Audio Input 1 channel Line in
Audio Output 1 channel Line out
Local Storage Micro SDHC Max 128GB
Alarm Input 2 in
Alarm Output 1 out
IR Illuminator 4
Mechanical
2.7-12 mm motorized and auto focus lens F1.4

Lens
FOV depending on different resolution H: 99°~34°
Focus Auto Focus

Camera angle
adjustment Pan = 0-360, Tilt = 0-90
Positioning
PART-B 15
Video
H.264 and MJPEG

Video Encoding
bit rate control (CBR and VBR)
Main Stream: 1080P/720P(1~25/30fps)

Video Streams Sub Stream: D1/CIF(1 ~ 25/30fps)
Third Stream: 720P(1 ~ 3/4fps)
Selectable for each independent stream
Frame Rate 1080P - 30 (full) ~ 1 fps
720P - 30 (full) ~1 fps
1080P(1920x1080)
1.3M(1280× 960)
Resolution 720P(1280× 720)
D1(704× 576/704× 480)
CIF(352× 288/352× 240)
TCP/IP, UDP, ICMP, IPv4, IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3,
Supported QoS, HTTP, HTTPS, LDAP (client), SSH, SSL,
Protocols SMTP, FTP, RTSP, UPnP, DNS, NTP, RTP,
RTCP,PPOE,Bonjour
Supported
IE10, Safari, Firefox, Chrome
browser
Snapshot Full resolution snapshot
Local recording Snapshot, video clip on alarm, video loop
Audio
Audio Encoding G.711a/ G.711u/ AAC
Audio Streaming Dual-Channel
User
Unicast 20users
Multicast Unlimited users H.264
Situational
Viewing: analytic sees motion, Digital PTZ
awareness and
Recording: whole area, set zones of interest (ROI)
PTZ stream config
Multiple user access levels with password
protection
Security Access
IP filtering, HTTPS, IEEE 802.1x, signed certiface,
Data Encryption
Environmental
Operating
-40°C~+60°C
Temperature
Operating
10% to 100%, condensing
Humidity
PART-B 16
Product Line
Dome Camera
Description
Brand
Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of IP
Network TDN Low-Light IR Rugged Dome Camera,
Illumination required 0.01 lux @ F1.4 (color), 120dB
True WDR, Min. Pixels 1920 × 1080, triple stream,
2.7–12 mm motorized focus & zoom lens, BLC, HLC,
3DNR, Privacy Mask, 3 IR LEDs Smart IR with upto
BOQ Description 50m IR distance, Dual channel Audio
G.711a/G.711u/AAC, 128GB SD card support, Alarm:
2 In/ 1out, PoE, H.264 High Profile and MJPEG, PoE
Class 3 and 12V DC, IP 67, IK 10 vandal proof, Having
Operating temp range : –40°C to 60° C. Certifications:
ONVIF Profile S & Profile G compliant, UL, CSA 60950-
22, CE (EN 50130-4 & EN 55022) , FCC Part 15 &
RoHS compliant.
Product
Full HD Dome Camera
Description
Camera
Characteristics
PoE Class 3
Audio 1 in/1out
12VDC /
Yes(optional)
24VAC
IP 66/67 IP 67
IK10 Yes
IR Range 50m
Regulatory
CE & FCC Yes(FCC Class A, EN60950-22)
UL Yes
C-Tick Yes
General
Imaging Device Ÿ 1/2.7” 2Megapixel progressive scan CMOS
Imager Type CMOS
Maximum
2MP - 1920x1080
Resolution
ONVIF Profile S & G
Minimum
Color : 0.01Lux @f/1.4
Illumination
B/W : 0Lux @f/1.4(IR on)
(May vary
PART-B 17
depending on the
lens)

Signal-to-Noise
50 db minimum
Ratio
Auto Iris Lens
DC IRIS
Type
Electronic Shutter
Auto/Manual, 1/3(4)~1/10000s
Range
White Balance
2,000 – 8500
Range
Dynamic Range 120 db minimum
Back light
BLC / HLC /WDR(120dB)
compensation
Digital Noise
3D Dig Noise Reduction (ON / OFF selectable)/2D
Reduction
Analog video
Twin outputs
output
Motion Detection/Scene change (covering,
Analytics
defocusing)/Face detect
Compression,3D digital noise reduction (ON/OFF)
color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, white balance,
exposure control, exposure zones, backlight
Image Settings
compensation, fine
tuning of behavior at low light, rotation , and all other
Image Settings in Web UI
Electrical
RJ-45 (10/100Base-T)
Network
Power Input PoE/12VDC/24VAC
Power
Max 12.2W (with IR on, motorized lens working)
Consumption

Local Storage Micro SDHC Max 128GB
Alarm Input 2 in
Alarm Output 1 out
PART-B 18
IR Illuminator Required
Mechanical
2.7-12 mm motorized and auto focus lens F1.4

Lens
FOV depending on different resolution H: 99°~34°
Focus Auto Focus
Camera angle
adjustment Pan = 0~360, Tilt = -85~65
Positioning
Video
H.264 and MJPEG
Video Encoding
Main Stream: 1080P/720P(1~25/30fps)
Third Stream: 720P(1 ~ 3/4fps)
720P - 30 (full) ~1 fps
1080P(1920x1080)
1.3M(1280× 960)
Resolution 720P(1280× 720)
D1(704× 576/704× 480)
CIF(352× 288/352× 240)
TCP/IP, UDP, ICMP, IPv4, IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS,

Supported
HTTP, HTTPS, LDAP (client), SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP,
Protocols
RTSP, UPnP, DNS, NTP, RTP, RTCP,PPOE,Bonjour
Supported
browser
Local recording Snapshot, video clip on alarm, video loop
Audio
Audio Encoding G.711a/ G.711u/ AAC
User
Unicast 20users
Multicast Unlimited users H.264
Situational
Viewing: analytic sees motion, Digital PTZ
awareness and
Recording: whole area, set zones of interest (ROI)
PTZ stream config
PART-B 19
Multiple user access levels with password protection

Security Access IP filtering, HTTPS, IEEE 802.1x, signed certiface,
Data Encryption
Environmental
Operating
-40°C~+60°C
Temperature
Heater/Fan 2W Heater
Operating
10% to 100%, condensing
Humidity
Product Line
1080P - 30X IP PTZ IK10
Description
Brand
Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of IP
Network TDN Low-Light IR PTZ Camera with auto
tracking, 1/1.9" CMOS, 2 MP @ 25fps, triple stream,
Min. Illumination required 0.005 lux @ F1.6 (color) &
0.0005 lux @ F 1.6(B/W), 120dB True WDR, Min.
Pixels 1920 × 1080, triple stream, 6mm –180 mm 30x
motorized focus & zoom lens, BLC, HLC, 3DNR,
Defog, Electronic Image Stabilitzation, Privacy Mask,
BOQ Description
IR range with upto 200m IR distance, Dual channel
Audio G.711a/G.711u/AAC, 128GB SD card support,
Alarm: 7 In/ 2 out, PoE, H.264 High Profile and
MJPEG, PoE Class 5 and 12V DC/24VAC, IP 67, IK 10
vandal proof, Having Operating temp range : –40°C to
70° C. Certifications: ONVIF Profile S compliant, UL,
CSA 60950-22, CE (EN 50130-4 & EN 55022) , FCC
Part 15 & RoHS compliant.
Product
1080P - 30X Starlight IR PTZ IK10 (No Wiper)
Description
Camera
Characteristics
PoE Class Hi-POE
Audio 1 in/1out
24VAC Yes
IP 66/67 IP 67 or better
IR Illuminator Internal or External (UL Listed for safety)
Regulatory
CE / FCC Yes(FCC Class A, EN60950-22)
UL Yes(60950-1,60950-22)
IK10 Yes
PART-B 20
Rohs Yes
General
Imaging Device 1/2" or better
Imager Type CMOS
Maximum
2MP - 1920x1080
Resolution
ONVIF Profile S
Minimum
Illumination
Color : 0.005Lux @f/1.6
(May vary
B/W : 0.0005Lux@f/1.6 0Lux (IR on)
depending on the
lens)
Signal-to-Noise
50 db minimum
Ratio
Auto Iris Lens
DC IRIS
Type
Electronic Shutter
Auto/Manual, 1/1~1/30000s
Range
White Balance Auto, ATW, Indoor, Outdoor, Manual
True Wide
120 db
Dynamic Range
Back light
BLC / HLC /WDR
compensation
Digital Noise
DNR (2D/3D)
Reduction
Analog video
BNC(1.0Vp BNC(1.0Vp/75Ω), PAL / NTSC
output
Tracking Trigger
Manual/Auto
Mode

Electronic Image
Required
Stabilization
Electrical
RJ-45 (10/100Base-T)
Network
Power Input 24VAC/3A(±25 %) , Hi-POE
Power
40W (IR on)
Consumption
PART-B 21
Local Storage Micro SDHC up to 128GB
Alarm Input 7 in
Alarm Output 2 out
IR Illuminator
(Internal or Required
External)
Mechanical
6-180 mm(30x Optical Zoom), F1.4-F4.8

Lens
FOV H: 61.2°~2.32°
Focus Mode Auto/Semi Auto/Manual

NTSC/PAL switch Support NTSC/PAL switch IN WEB UI
Pan Range 360 degree endless rotation
Manually 240 degree per second;
Pan Speed
preset speed 240 degree per second
Preset Accuracy 0.1 degree per second
Tilt Range -10~90 degree (auto flip)

Manually 120 degree per second ;
Tilt Speed
preset speed 200 degree per second
Smart Zoom 3D positioning
Number of Preset 245
Video
H.264 and MJPEG
Video Encoding
Main Stream: 1080P(1~25/30fps)/720P(1-50/60fps)
Third Stream: 720P/D1/CIF(1 ~ 25/30fps)
720P - 60 (full) ~1 fps
Bit Rate H.264:56K~8192Kbps,MJPEG:56K~20480Kbps
1080P(1920x1080)
720P(1280× 720)
Resolution
D1(704× 576/704× 480)
CIF(352× 288/352× 240)
PART-B 22
IPv4/IPv6,HTTP,HTTPS,SSL,TCP/IP,UDP,UPnP,ICM
Supported
P,IGMP,SNMP,RTSP,RTP,SMTP,NTP,DHCP,DNS,P
Protocols
PPOE,DDNS,FTP,IP Filter,QoS,Bonjour,802.1x
Supported
browser
Audio
Audio Encoding G.711a/ G.711u/PCM
User
Unicast 20users
Multiple user access levels with password protection
Security Features IP filtering, HTTPS, IEEE 802.1x, Digest
Authentication, Signed Certificates, Data Encryption
Environmental
Operating
-40°C~+70°C
Temperature
Operating
0% to 90%, non-condensing
Humidity
***********************
PART-B 23
DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM (PASSIVE COMPONENTS)
24 Port Edge Switch with SFP+ Uplink
Compliance
S.No Specifications
Yes/No
A Performance Features
The switch should support switching capacity/Forwarding rate of
1 128Gbps/ 190 Mpps respectively with 4 x 10G uplinks
Switch should have 2 GB RAM and 4 GB Flash and the proposed
2
switch should be SDN capable in all aspect.
3 Shall have minimum 16K MAC Addresses and 1024 active Vlans.
Switch should have slot/ports(excluding uplinks) for minimum 80
4 Gbps of stacking bandwidth with dedicated stacking ports and
cables with minimum 8 switches in stack
Switch should be able to support 3000 IPV4 & 1500 IPV6 routing
5
entries and multicast 1000 routes
6 Switch should support minimum 512 Switched Virtual Interfaces.
7 The switch should support Jumbo frames of minimum 9100 bytes
B General Features
Proposed switch should be enterprise grade switch with x86 based
1
CPU architecture
Switch should support Layer 2, Routed Access (RIP, OSPF), PBR,
2 PIM Stub Multicast, PVLAN, VRRP, PBR, CDP, QoS, FHS, 802.1X,
MACsec-128, CoPP, SXP, IP SLA Responder
The proposed switch should be software defined networking
3 capable and be able to atleast integrate easily with the SDN
controller from the same OEM.
The Switch stack should be based on Distributed forwarding
4 Architecture, where in each stack member forwards its own
information on network.
Switch should have unique secure identity or equivalent so that it's
authenticity and origin can be confirmed with OEM. Switch BIOS,
5 software image should be cryptographically signed to ensure
integrity and switch should not boot with modified software
regardless of user's privilege level.
Switch shall support application visibility and traffic monitoring with
6
minimum 16 K netFlow/sflow/jflow entries.
Switch should support both front and back beacon LEDs or
7
equivalent for easy identification of the switch being accessed.
C High availabity & Resilliency
Switch should support redundant field replacable platinum rated
1
power supplies.
2 Switch should support redundant fans.
PART-B 24
3 Switch should support cross-stack etherchannel.

The switch should also support software patching for critical defects
such that when any critical defects hit the switches operating
system instead of waiting for the new maintenance release from the
4
OEM, the OEM should release a patch only for the defected feature
set and that could be put on the switch instead. Same should also
apply for new features.
The switch ASICs on the proposed models should have the
capability to be reprogrammed such that enabling new feature sets
5
on the H/W does not require bank to procure new switches in the
near future.
6 Switch should support embedded event manager scripts
After a reboot when power is restored to a switch, switch should
7 start delivering power to endpoints without waiting for the operating
system to fully load.
D L2 Features
The switch should support Automatic Negotiation of Trunking
1
Protocol, to help minimize the configuration & errors
2 The switch should support IEEE 802.1Q VLAN encapsulation
The switch should support Spanning-tree PortFast and PortFast
3
guard for fast convergence
The switch should support STP advanced technologies to help
4 ensure quick failover recovery, enhancing overall network stability
and reliability
The switch should support Spanning-tree root guard to prevent
5
other edge swicthes becoming the root bridge.
The switch should support Voice VLAN to simplify IP telephony
6
installations by keeping voice traffic on a separate VLAN
The switch should support Auto-negotiation on all ports to
7 automatically selects half- or full-duplex transmission mode to
optimize bandwidth
The switch should support Automatic media-dependent interface
crossover (MDIX) to automatically adjusts transmit and receive
8
pairs if an incorrect cable type (crossover or straight-through) is
installed.
The switch should support detection of unidirectional links caused
9 by incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults to be detected and
disabled on fiber-optic interfaces.
10 The switch should support IGMP v1, v2 Snooping
Switch should support IPv4 and IPv6. The Switch should be able to
discover (on both IPv4 & IPv6 Network) the neighboring device
11
giving the details about the platform, IP Address, Link connected
through etc, thus helping in troubleshooting connectivity problems.
E Network security features
PART-B 25
The switch should support IEEE 802.1x providing user

1
authentication, authorization and CoA.
The switch should support SSHv2 and SNMPv3 to provide network
2 security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP
sessions.
The switch should support TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication
3 enable centralized control of the switch and restrict unauthorized
users from altering the configuration.
The switch should support MAC address notification to allow
4 administrators to be notified of users added to or removed from the
network.
5 The switch should support MACSec-128
F Quality of Service
Switch should support 802.1p Class of Service (CoS) and
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) field classification,
1
Shaped Round Robin (SRR) scheduling, Committed Information
Rate (CIR), and eight egress queues per port.
Layer-3 Features should be supported with license upgrade for
G
L2 to L3
The Switch should support routing protocols such OSPF, BSR, IS-
1
ISv4, LISP, VXLAN, VRF.
The Switch should support IPv6 Routing capable protocols such as
2
OSPFv3 in hardware.
The Switch should support IP Multicast and PIM, PIM Sparse Mode,
3
& Source-Specific Multicast for Wired and Wireless Clients.
The Switch should support basic IP Unicast routing protocols
4
(static, RIPv1 & RIPv2).
The Switch should support IPv6 & IPv4 Policy Based Routing
5
(PBR)
6 The Switch should support Inter-VLAN routing.
7 The Switch should support VRRP for IPv4 & IPv6.
8 The Switch should support VRRPv3.
9 The Switch should support uRPF for IPv4 and IPv6.
H Certifications
Safety certifications - IEC 60950-1,UL 60950-1,CAN/CSA C22.2
1
No. 60950-1,EN 60950-1,AS/NZS 60950.1,Class I Equipment.
Electromagnetic emissions certifications - 47 CFR Part 15,CISPR
22 Class A,CISPR 32 Class A,CNS 13438,EN 300 386*,EN 55022
2 Class A,EN 55032 Class A,EN61000-3-2,EN61000-3-3,ICES-003
Class A,KN 32,TCVN 7189 Class A,V-3 Class A,CISPR 24,EN 300
386*,EN 55024,KN 35,TCVN 7317
Environmental - Reduction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS) 5
3
and above
I Operating Temperature Range
PART-B 26
1 Normal operating temperature and altitudes:

2 ● -5ºC to +45ºC, up to 5000 feet (1500m)
3 ● -5ºC to +40ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000m)
J Gartner
Switch should be of an OEM who is a Gartner leader in Wired and
1
Wireless Infrastructure
K Smart Monitoring
The switch should support from Day - 1 the following basis SDN
1
principles
2 ◦ Full network visibility and monitoring
3 ◦ End-to-end Quality of Experience (QoE)
4 ◦ Fast issue resolution and network remediation
L Smart operation
·WebUI: Should support WebUI to be used as an embedded
GUI-based device-management tool that provides the ability to
provision the device, to simplify device deployment and
1
manageability We should be able to use WebUI to build
configurations, and to monitor and troubleshoot the device without
having CLI expertise.
M Switch's Software Features
1 1.Automated device provisioning
2 2.API-driven configuration
3 3.Seamless software upgrades and patching
24 Port PoE Edge Switch with SFP+ Uplink
Compliance
S.No Specifications
Yes/No
A Performance Features
The switch should support switching capacity/Forwarding rate of

1. 128Gbps/ 190 Mpps respectively with 4 x 10G uplinks
Switch should have 2 GB RAM and 4 GB Flash and the proposed

2. switch should be SDN capable in all aspect.
3. Shall have minimum 16K MAC Addresses and 1024 active Vlans.
Switch should have slot/ports(excluding uplinks) for minimum 80

4. Gbps of stacking bandwidth with dedicated stacking ports and cables
with minimum 8 switches in stack
PART-B 27
Switch should be able to support 3000 IPV4 & 1500 IPV6 routing
5. entries and multicast 1000 routes
6. Switch should support minimum 512 Switched Virtual Interfaces.
7. The switch should support Jumbo frames of minimum 9100 bytes
B General Features
Proposed switch should be enterprise grade switch with x86 based

8. CPU architecture
The proposed switch should support native Full POE+ on all ports
9. and required power supplies for the same should be already
populated.
Switch should support Layer 2, Routed Access (RIP, OSPF), PBR,

10. PIM Stub Multicast, PVLAN, VRRP, PBR, CDP, QoS, FHS, 802.1X,
MACsec-128, CoPP, SXP, IP SLA Responder
The proposed switch should be software defined networking capable

11. and be able to atleast integrate easily with the SDN controller from
the same OEM.
The Switch stack should be based on Distributed forwarding

12. Architecture, where in each stack member forwards its own
information on network.

13. software image should be cryptographically signed to ensure integrity
and switch should not boot with modified software regardless of
user's privilege level.
Switch shall support application visibility and traffic monitoring with

14. minimum 16 K netFlow/sflow/jflow entries.
Switch should support both front and back beacon LEDs or equivalent
15. for easy identification of the switch being accessed.
C High availabity & Resilliency
Switch should support redundant field replacable platinum rated

16. power supplies.
PART-B 28
17. Switch should support redundant fans.
18. Switch should support cross-stack etherchannel.

such that when any critical defects hit the switches operating system
instead of waiting for the new maintenance release from the OEM,
19. the OEM should release a patch only for the defected feature set and
that could be put on the switch instead. Same should also apply for
new features.
The switch ASICs on the proposed models should have the capability
20. to be reprogrammed such that enabling new feature sets on the H/W
does not require bank to procure new switches in the near future.
21. Switch should support embedded event manager scripts

After a reboot when power is restored to a switch, switch should start
22. delivering power to endpoints without waiting for the operating system
to fully load.
D L2 Features
The switch should support Automatic Negotiation of Trunking

23. Protocol, to help minimize the configuration & errors
24. The switch should support IEEE 802.1Q VLAN encapsulation

The switch should support Spanning-tree PortFast and PortFast
25. guard for fast convergence
The switch should support STP advanced technologies to help

26. ensure quick failover recovery, enhancing overall network stability
and reliability
The switch should support Spanning-tree root guard to prevent other

27. edge swicthes becoming the root bridge.
The switch should support Voice VLAN to simplify IP telephony

28. installations by keeping voice traffic on a separate VLAN
The switch should support Auto-negotiation on all ports to

29. automatically selects half- or full-duplex transmission mode to
optimize bandwidth
PART-B 29
The switch should support Automatic media-dependent interface

30. crossover (MDIX) to automatically adjusts transmit and receive pairs
if an incorrect cable type (crossover or straight-through) is installed.
The switch should support detection of unidirectional links caused by

31. incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults to be detected and disabled
on fiber-optic interfaces.
32. The switch should support IGMP v1, v2 Snooping

Switch should support IPv4 and IPv6. The Switch should be able to
discover (on both IPv4 & IPv6 Network) the neighboring device giving
33. the details about the platform, IP Address, Link connected through
etc, thus helping in troubleshooting connectivity problems.
E Network security features
The switch should support IEEE 802.1x providing user authentication,

34. authorization and CoA.
The switch should support SSHv2 and SNMPv3 to provide network

35. security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP
sessions.
The switch should support TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication

36. enable centralized control of the switch and restrict unauthorized
users from altering the configuration.
The switch should support MAC address notification to allow

37. administrators to be notified of users added to or removed from the
network.
38. The switch should support MACSec-128
F Quality of Service
Switch should support 802.1p Class of Service (CoS) and

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) field classification,
39. Shaped Round Robin (SRR) scheduling, Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and eight egress queues per port.
Layer-3 Features should be supported with license upgrade for

G L2 to L3
PART-B 30
The Switch should support routing protocols such OSPF, BSR, IS-
40. ISv4, LISP, VXLAN, VRF.
The Switch should support IPv6 Routing capable protocols such as

41. OSPFv3 in hardware.
The Switch should support IP Multicast and PIM, PIM Sparse Mode,
42. & Source-Specific Multicast for Wired and Wireless Clients.
The Switch should support basic IP Unicast routing protocols (static,

43. RIPv1 & RIPv2).
44. The Switch should support IPv6 & IPv4 Policy Based Routing (PBR)
45. The Switch should support Inter-VLAN routing.
46. The Switch should support VRRP for IPv4 & IPv6.
47. The Switch should support VRRPv3.
48. The Switch should support uRPF for IPv4 and IPv6.
H Certifications
Safety certifications - IEC 60950-1,UL 60950-1,CAN/CSA C22.2 No.

49. 60950-1,EN 60950-1,AS/NZS 60950.1,Class I Equipment.
Electromagnetic emissions certifications - 47 CFR Part 15,CISPR 22

Class A,CISPR 32 Class A,CNS 13438,EN 300 386*,EN 55022 Class
50. A,EN 55032 Class A,EN61000-3-2,EN61000-3-3,ICES-003 Class
A,KN 32,TCVN 7189 Class A,V-3 Class A,CISPR 24,EN 300 386*,EN
55024,KN 35,TCVN 7317
Environmental - Reduction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS) 5 and

51. above
I Operating Temperature Range
52. Normal operating temperature and altitudes:
53. ● -5ºC to +45ºC, up to 5000 feet (1500m)
PART-B 31
54. ● -5ºC to +40ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000m)
J Gartner
Switch should be of an OEM who is a Gartner leader in Wired and

55. Wireless Infrastructure
K Smart Monitoring
The switch should support from Day - 1 the following basis SDN
56. principles
57. ◦ Full network visibility and monitoring
58. ◦ End-to-end Quality of Experience (QoE)
59. ◦ Fast issue resolution and network remediation
L Smart operation
· WebUI: Should support WebUI to be used as an embedded GUI-

based device-management tool that provides the ability to provision
60. the device, to simplify device deployment and manageability We
should be able to use WebUI to build configurations, and to monitor
and troubleshoot the device without having CLI expertise.
M Switch's Software Features
61. 1.Automated device provisioning
62. 2.API-driven configuration
63. 3.Seamless software upgrades and patching
Distribution switch with 10G Ports
Compliance
S.No Specifications
Yes/No
PART-B 32
A Hardware &Performance Features
Switch should be fixed configuration 1 RU platform to support atleast

1. 40 port 10G and additional slot to add 2 x 40/100G uplink ports in
future. Switch should be provided with SFP as per solution proposed
2. Switch should have redundant power supplies
The switch should support switching capacity/Forwarding rate of upto

3. 960Mbps/720Mpps respectively
The Switch should have at least 480Gbps non-blocking switching

4. bandwidth
Should have 16 GB RAM and 16 GB Flash and the proposed switch

5. should be SDN capable in all aspect.
Two core switches will be connected in virtual stack to increase

6. performance and active-active performance with support of NSF/SSO
when connected
B L2 Features
7. Switch should support at least 64K Mac address
Switch should support Ethernet standards like IEEE802.1p,

8. IEEE802.1Q, Flow control, Jumbo frame, 802.1D, 802.1w, 802.1s,
Jumbo frames, 802.3ad, private VLAN
9. Switch should support 4000 VLANs and 4000 SVI
Switch should support VLANs based on ports, MAC address, IP-

10. Subnet based VLAN
11. Switch should support UDLD, CDP or LLDP
C L3 Features
12. Switch should support 32K IPv4 and 16K IPv6 entries
13. Switch should support up to 32K multicast routes

Switch should support routing protocols like BGPv4, OSPF(v2, v3),
14. ISISv4, RIP, Static, ECMP, LISP, VXLAN, PIM, SSM, DVMRP, BFD,
VRF aware BFD
PART-B 33
15. Switch should support VRRP/HSRP or equivalent
16. Switch should support VRF, MPLS, Policy based routing
D QoS features
17. Switch should support 8 queues per port
18. Switch should support IPv4 and IPv6 QoS classification and policing
19. Switch should support priority queuing, DSCP, traffic shaping, WRED
Switch should support control plane policing to protect switch CPU
20. from DoS attack
21. Switch should support IEEE 1588v2 for clocking precision
E Security
22. Switch should support at least 15K hardware based ACL
23. Switch should support VLAN ACL, Port based ACL, Time based ACL
Switch should support IP Source guard, Dynamic ARP inspection,
24. DHCP Snooping and IEEE 802.1ae based MACSEC (AES
encryption)
Switch should support 802.1x for user authentication and

25. authorization, Dynamic VLAN assignment, Guest VLAN assignment,
MAC based authentication
Should support IEEE 1588v2. Support both static and dynamic NAT
26. and Port Address Translation (PAT)
Switch should support real time data collection with line rate hardware
27. based netflow/sflow up to 500 K

High Availability & Resiliency, Management and

F Troubleshooting, Others
PART-B 34
Switch should able to integrate with netflow based campus visibility

29. and threat detection solution and should able to support threat
detection within encrypted traffic
Switch should have atleast 500GB SSD storage & scalable upto
30. 960GB to store logs and container based application hosting
Switch should support telnet, SSH, https, SNMPv3, IPFIX,

32. configuration rollback feature for ease of management
Switch should support API Driven configuration and support Netconf

33. and Restconf using YANG data model. It should support automation
tool like python
Switch should support port mirroring based on Inbound & outbound,

34. mirroring based on ports, VLANs, RSPAN, ERSPAN
new features.
Switch should able to support Linux based container to run

36. applications
Switch should support SNMP notification for dynamic change in MAC

37. table
Switch should support blue beacon technology to identify hardware

38. during troubleshooting
39. Switch should support AC and DC power supplies
40. Switch should have field replaceable power supplies and FAN trays
Switches need to be provided with all software license from day-1 as
41. per RFP specification and all switches should be from same OEM
G Gartner
PART-B 35
OEM should be in leader quadrant of the last three year Gartner

42. Magic Quadrant for the "Wired and Wireless LAN Access
Infrastructure" report.
Core switch
Compliance
S.No Specifications
Yes/No
A Hardware &Performance Features
Switch should be fixed configuration 1 RU platform to support atleast

1. 24 port 1/10/25 and additional slot to add 4 x 40/100G uplink ports in
future. Switch should be provided with SFP as per solution proposed
2. Switch should have redundant power supplies
The switch should support switching capacity/Forwarding rate of upto

3. 2.1Tbps/1Bpps respectively
The Switch should have at least 1.6Tbps non-blocking switching

4. bandwidth
Should have 16 GB RAM and 16 GB Flash and the proposed switch

5. should be SDN capable in all aspect.
Two core switches will be connected in virtual stack to increase

6. performance and active-active performance with support of NSF/SSO
when connected
B L2 Features
7. Switch should support at least 80K Mac address
Switch should support Ethernet standards like IEEE802.1p,

8. IEEE802.1Q, Flow control, Jumbo frame, 802.1D, 802.1w, 802.1s,
Jumbo frames, 802.3ad, private VLAN
9. Switch should support 4000 VLANs and 4000 SVI
Switch should support VLANs based on ports, MAC address, IP-

10. Subnet based VLAN
PART-B 36
11. Switch should support UDLD, CDP or LLDP
C L3 Features
12. Switch should support 212K IPv4 and 212K IPv6 entries
13. Switch should support up to 32K multicast routes

Switch should support routing protocols like BGPv4, OSPF(v2, v3),
14. ISISv4, RIP, Static, ECMP, LISP, VXLAN, PIM, SSM, DVMRP, BFD,
VRF aware BFD
15. Switch should support VRRP/HSRP or equivalent
16. Switch should support VRF, MPLS, Policy based routing
D QoS features
17. Switch should support 8 queues per port
18. Switch should support IPv4 and IPv6 QoS classification and policing
19. Switch should support priority queuing, DSCP, traffic shaping, WRED
Switch should support control plane policing to protect switch CPU
20. from DoS attack
21. Switch should support IEEE 1588v2 for clocking precision
E Security
22. Switch should support at least 15K hardware based ACL
23. Switch should support VLAN ACL, Port based ACL, Time based ACL
Switch should support IP Source guard, Dynamic ARP inspection,
24. DHCP Snooping and IEEE 802.1ae based MACSEC (AES
encryption)
Switch should support 802.1x for user authentication and

25. authorization, Dynamic VLAN assignment, Guest VLAN assignment,
MAC based authentication
Should support IEEE 1588v2. Support both static and dynamic NAT
26. and Port Address Translation (PAT)
PART-B 37
Switch should support real time data collection with line rate hardware
27. based netflow/sflow up to 500 K

High Availability & Resiliency, Management and

F Troubleshooting, Others
Switch should able to integrate with netflow based campus visibility

29. and threat detection solution and should able to support threat
detection within encrypted traffic
Switch should have atleast 500GB SSD storage & scalable upto
30. 960GB to store logs and container based application hosting
Switch should support telnet, SSH, https, SNMPv3, IPFIX,

32. configuration rollback feature for ease of management
Switch should support API Driven configuration and support Netconf

33. and Restconf using YANG data model. It should support automation
tool like python
Switch should support port mirroring based on Inbound & outbound,

34. mirroring based on ports, VLANs, RSPAN, ERSPAN
new features.
Switch should able to support Linux based container to run

36. applications
Switch should support SNMP notification for dynamic change in MAC

37. table
PART-B 38
Switch should support blue beacon technology to identify hardware

38. during troubleshooting
39. Switch should support AC and DC power supplies
40. Switch should have field replaceable power supplies and FAN trays
Switches need to be provided with all software license from day-1 as
41. per RFP specification and all switches should be from same OEM
G Gartner
OEM should be in leader quadrant of the last three year Gartner

42. Magic Quadrant for the "Wired and Wireless LAN Access
Infrastructure" report.
Wi-Fi Network
Functional Requirement for SDN Controller

Switching & Wireless components must be centrally managed via single
1 dashboard. Configuration policies must be automatically pushed across all
components centrally.
2 Quickly isolate issues within network LAN, WAN or Wireless LAN
3 Health Score – quick indication of an issue with network, client, application and
compliance
4 Automated workflows to design and provision the network infrastructure
5 Ability to define user and device profiles and policies
6 Ability to define highly secure user and device access and network
segmentation
7 Software image management, including patch management
8 Device discovery, inventory and configuration

9 Third-party integration with open REST APIs
10 Configuration Archive
11 Software Image and Patch Management
12 Role-Based Access Control
13 Programmability – REST API Support
14 Backup and Restore
15 IP Address Management with IPAM
Wireless Controller: -
PART-B 39
Compliance
S.No Specifications
Yes/No
A Hardware Features
Must be compliant with IEEE CAPWAP or equivalent for controller-

1. based WLANs.
Should have atleast 2 x 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface. However, the

2. proposed controller should be capable of supporting both 1G and 10
G SPFs on same Network I/O ports
Should support both centralized as well as distributed traffic

3. forwarding architecture with L3 roaming support from day 1. Should
have IPv6 ready from day one.
Controller should have hot-swappable internal redundant power

4. supplies.
5. Controller should support minimum 20000 concurrent devices.
The proposed WLAN controller should have scalability to support

6. 1500 Access points from day 1 without any hardware change with
minimum 200 AP license from Day 1.
AP must securely download image from WLC and should be

7. configured from WLC only.
WLAN controller should provide Application visibility with both traffic

forwarding mode i.e when traffic coming to controller and when traffic
8. moving locally from AP to connected access switch. Admin should
have option to create policies to allow or deny access based on
applications.
9. WLC should support AP License Migration from one WLC to another
10. Should support minimum 4000 VLANs
11. WLC must support TFTP, FTP and SFTP transfer mode.
B Wireless Controller Features & Functionalities
Must support stateful switchover between active and standby

12. controller in a sub second time frame.
13. WLC should support L2 and L3 roaming for IPv4 and IPv6 clients
PART-B 40
14. WLC should support guest-access functionality for IPv6 clients.
15. Should support IEEE 802.1p priority tag.

Should ensure WLAN reliability by proactively determining and
16. adjusting to changing RF conditions.
Should provide real-time radio power adjustments based on changing

17. environmental conditions and signal coverage adjustments.
Should support automatic radio channel adjustments for intelligent

18. channel switching and real-time interference detection.
Should support client load balancing to balance the number of clients

19. across multiple APs to optimize AP and client throughput.
Should support policy based forwarding to classify data traffic based

20. on ACLs
WLC should support PMIPv6 and EoGRE tunnels on northboud

21. interface
Should support flexible DFS to prevent additional 20/40 Mhz channels

22. from going unused
Should support dynamic bandwidth selection among 20Mhz, 40 Mhz

and 80Mhz channels, ensuring one access point on 20Mhz and
23. another on 80 Mhz channel connected on the same controller at
same WLAN group.
24. Should support minimum 500 WLANs
25. Should support dynamic VLAN assignment
26. Should support Hot Spot 2.0

To deliver optimal bandwidth usage, reliable multicast must use
27. single session between AP and Wireless Controller.
Should able to do dynamic channel bonding based on interference

28. detected on particular channel.
Must support coverage hole detection and correction that can be

29. adjusted on a per WLAN basis.
PART-B 41
Must support RF Management with 40 MHz and 80 Mhz channels

30. with 802.11n & 802.11ac
Should provide visibility to Network airtime in order to set the airtime

31. policy enforcement
Must support dynamic Airtime allocation on per WLAN, per AP, Per
32. AP group basis.
33. Must be able to restrict the number of logins per user.
C Wireless Security
Should support web-based authentication to provide a browser-based

34. environment to authenticate clients that do not support the IEEE
802.1X supplicant.
WLC should support web based authentication in different traffic

35. forwarding modes i.e Central switching and Local switching when
traffic move locally from AP to connected switch.
Should support port-based and SSID-based IEEE 802.1X

36. authentication.
Should support MAC authentication to provide simple authentication

37. based on a user's MAC address.
WLC should be able to exclude clients based on excessive/multiple

38. authentication failure.
Shall support AES or TKIP encryption to secure the data integrity of

39. wireless traffic
Shall able to provide an air quality index for ensuring the better
40. performance
Shall able to provide real time chart showing interference per access
41. point on per radio and per-channel basis.
Should support AP location-based user access to control the

42. locations where a wireless user can access the network
43. Should support Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) to control access

Must be able to set a maximum per-user bandwidth limit on a per-
44. SSID basis.
PART-B 42
45. WLC Shall support WIDS/WIPS, and spectral analysis from day 1.
WLC should detect if someone connect a Rogue Acess Point in
46. network and able to take appropriate action to contain rogue Acess
point.
WLC should detect and protect an Ad-hoc connection when a

47. connected user forming a network with other system without an AP or
try enabling bridging between two interface
48. WLC should detect if a user try to impersonate a management frame.

WLC should detect and take appropriate containment action if a
49. smartphone user using tethering to connect other device.
WLC should detect and protect if a user try to spoof mac address of
50. valid client or AP for unauthorized acess/authentication.
WLC should detect if a user trying to do internet sharing through a

51. valid system to an unauthorized device.
G Management & QoS
52. Should support SNMPv3, SSHv2 and SSL for secure management.
Should support encrypted mechanisum to securely upload/download
53. software image to and from Wireless controller.
Should provide visibility between a wired and wireless network using

54. IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and
sFlow/equivalent.
Should support AP Plug and Play (PnP) deployment with zero-

55. configuration capability
Should support AP grouping to enable administrator to easily apply

56. AP-based or radio-based configurations to all the APs in the same
group
Should support selective firmware upgrade APs, typically to a group

57. of APs minimize the impact of up-gradation
58. Should have a suitable serial console port.

Should have Voice and Video Call Admission and Stream
59. prioritization for preferential QOS
PART-B 43
Controller should support deep packet inspection for all user traffic
across Layer 4-7 network to analyses information about applications
usage, peak network usage times for all access points from day one
60. with different traffic forwarding modes i.e central switching with WLC
and local switching when traffic move locally from AP to connected
switch.
Should be able to do application visibility for application running

61. behind HTTP proxy.
Support profiling of wireless devices based on known protocols like

62. http and dhcp to identify clients
63. Should support visibily and control based on the type of applications
H Guess Access and Analytics Integration with Wifi Controller
For future purpose solutions like guess access and Wifi analytics
64. should be seamlessly integrated with proposed controller. Additional
software or license component can be procured as required later.
Guest Access Solution -

1. Integrated/ External Solution must provide Self registeration based
Guest access workflow for minimum 4000 users. Bidder must quote
necessary compute for external solution.
65. 2. Should support sponsored based Guest access workflow. Should
Support different custom branding of captive portal for Laptop and
mobile.
3. Should support RADIUS authentication
4. Should support integration with SMS gateway for OTP.
Analytics Solution -
1. The system shall offer API to integrate mobile App, to integrate
proximity based service, like push notification service
2. The system shall provide location Analytic service that provides
real-time live analytic of demographic information
3. The system shall have an ability to have an analytics solution that
66. provides device counts by floor
4. The system shall have an ability to have an analytics solution that
provides counts of number of WIFI devices detected in a specific
custom defined zones
5. The system shall have an ability to create analytics zones in on
premise analytics solutions and schedule analytics reports that can
be viewed by PDF.
PART-B 44
6. The system shall have an ability to export analytics reports in XLS

format
Indoor Access Point: -
S. No. Specification
Access Points proposed must include radios for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz with
1 802.11ac Wave 2.
An access point must include a standard OEM provided Mounting brackets

2 for mounting on Celing or Roof top.
Access Point shall support Console port that uses Standard Port (RJ-45)
3 type connection
4 Should have two RJ-45 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 Mbps LAN port .
5 Access Point should have USB port for future requirement.
6 Must have atleast 3 dBi Antenna gain on each radios
7 Must support 4x4 MIMO for both 802.11ac and 802.11n client
Must provide dynamic dual 5 ghz radio mode for high density requirement
8 from day 1.
Must Support minimum aggregate data rate of 5 Gbps on dual 5ghz mode
9 with 160 mhz channel support and standard 256 QAM modulation.
Must support minimum of 22dbm of transmit power in both 2.4Ghz and

10 5Ghz radios. And should follow the local regulatory Norms.
11 Must support AP enforced load-balance between 2.4Ghz and 5Ghz band.
Must incorporate radio resource management for power, channel and

12 performance optimization
13 Must have -97 dB or better Receiver Sensitivity.
Must support Proactive Key Caching and/or other methods for Fast Secure
14 Roaming.
PART-B 45
15 Must support Management Frame Protection.
Should support locally-significant certificates on the APs using a Public Key

16 Infrastructure (PKI).
Access Points must support Hardware-based encrypted user data and

17 management traffic between controller and Access point for better security.
Must support the ability to serve clients and monitor the RF environment
18 concurrently.
Same model AP that serves clients must be able to be dedicated to

19 monitoring the RF environment.
20 Must be plenum-rated (UL2043).
21 Must support 16 WLANs per AP for SSID deployment flexibility.
Access Point Must continue serving clients when link to controller is down.
It should also have option to authenticate user through Radius server
22 directly from Access Point during link unavailability to controller.
Must support telnet and/or SSH login to APs directly for troubleshooting
23 flexibility.
24 Must support Power over Ethernet and power injectors.
25 802.11e and WMM
Must support Reliable Multicast to Unicast conversion to maintain video

26 quality at AP level
27 Must support QoS and Video Call Admission Control capabilities.
28 Access Point should 802.11 DFS certified
AAA Solution: -
S.No Specifications
1 The Solution should provide a highly powerful and flexible attribute-based access control
solution that combines authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA); profiling; and
guest management services on a single platform.
2 It should allow enterprises to authenticate and authorize users and endpoints via wired,
wireless, and VPN with consistent policy throughout the campus
3 Provides complete guest lifecycle management by empowering sponsors to on-board
guests
PART-B 46
4 Solution should be scalable enough to support 250,000 endpoints in the network. Currently
needed license for 5000 endpoints for AAA and BYOD, Profiling from day one.
5 Delivers customizable self service portals as well as the ability to host custom web pages
to ease device and guest on-boarding, automate endpoint secure access and service
provisioning, and enhance the overall end-user experience inside business-defined
workflows
6 Offers comprehensive visibility of the network by automatically discovering, classifying, and
controlling endpoints connected to the network to enable the appropriate services per
endpoint
7 Should capability of addresses vulnerabilities on user machines through periodic
evaluation and remediation to help proactively mitigate network threats such as viruses,
worms, and spyware
8 Should capability to enforces security policies by blocking, isolating, and repairing
noncompliant machines in a quarantine area without requiring administrator attention
9 Offers a built-in monitoring, reporting, and troubleshooting console to assist helpdesk
operators and administrators streamline operations
10 Should capability to allows you to get finer granularity while identifying devices on your
network with Active Endpoint Scanning
11 Augments network-based profiling by targeting specific endpoints (based on policy) for
specific attribute device scans, resulting in higher accuracy and comprehensive visibility of
what is on your network
12 Manages endpoint access to the network with the Endpoint Protection Service, which
enables administrators to specify an endpoint and select an action - for example, move to
a new VLAN, return to the original VLAN, or isolate the endpoint from the network entirely -
all in a simple interface
13 Utilizes standard RADIUS protocol for authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA).
14 Supports a wide range of authentication protocols, including PAP, MS-CHAP, Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP)-MD5, Protected EAP (PEAP), EAP-Flexible Authentication
via Secure Tunneling (FAST), and EAP-Transport Layer Security (TLS).
15 Offers a rules-based, attribute-driven policy model for creating flexible and business-
relevant access control policies. Provides the ability to create fine-grained policies by
pulling attributes from predefined dictionaries that include information about user and
endpoint identity, posture validation, authentication protocols, profiling identity, or other
external attribute sources. Attributes can also be created dynamically and saved for later
use. Posuture validation service not required from day one.
16 Provides a wide range of access control mechanisms, including downloadable access
control lists (dACLs), VLAN assignments, URL redirect, and Security Group Access (SGA)
tagging.
17 Should have predefined device templates for a wide range of endpoints, such as IP
phones, printers, IP cameras, smartphones, and tablets.
18 It should allow Administrators to create their own device templates. These templates can
be used to automatically detect, classify, and associate administrative-defined identities
when endpoints connect to the network. Administrators can also associate endpoint-
specific authorization policies based on device type.
PART-B 47
19 The Solution should have capability to collect endpoint attribute data via passive network
telemetry, querying the actual endpoints, or alternatively from the infrastructure via device
sensors on switches.
20 Solution should allow end users to interact with a self-service portal for device on-boarding,
providing a registration vehicle for all types of devices as well as automatic supplicant
provisioning and certificate enrollment for standard PC and mobile computing platforms.
21 Should have full guest lifecycle management, whereby guest users can access the
network for a limited time, either through administrator sponsorship or by self-signing via a
guest portal. Allows administrators to customize portals and policies based on specific
needs of the enterprise.
22 Should support and capability to verifies endpoint posture assessment for PCs connecting
to the network. Works via either a persistent client-based agent or a temporal web agent to
validate that an endpoint is conforming to a company's posture policies. Provides the ability
to create powerful policies that include but are not limited to checks for the latest OS
patches, antivirus and antispyware software packages with current definition file variables
(version, date, etc.), registries (key, value, etc), and applications. Solution should support
auto-remediation of PC clients as well as periodic reassessment to make sure the endpoint
is not in violation of company policies. This functionality not require from day one.
23 Should support and capability to allows administrators to quickly take corrective action
(Quarantine, Un-Quarantine, or Shutdown) on risk-compromised endpoints within the
network. This helps to reduce risk and increase security in the network. This functionality
not require from day one.
24 Enables administrators to centrally configure and manage profiler, posture, guest,
authentication, and authorization services in a single web-based GUI console, greatly
simplifying administration by providing consistency in managing all these services.
Posturing services not needed from day one.
25 Includes a built-in web console for monitoring, reporting, and troubleshooting to assist
help-desk and network operators in quickly identifying and resolving issues. Offers
comprehensive historical and real-time reporting for all services, logging of all activities,
and real-time dashboard metrics of all users and endpoints connecting to the network.
26 Should support consistent policy in centralized and distributed deployments that allows
services to be delivered where they are needed
27 Solution should have capability to determine whether users are accessing the network on
an authorized, policy-compliant device.
28 Solution should have capability to establish user identity, location, and access history,
which can be used for compliance and reporting.
29 Solution should have capability to assign services based on the assigned user role, group,
and associated policy (job role, location, device type, and so on).
30 Solution should have capability to grant authenticated users with access to specific
segments of the network, or specific applications and services, or both, based on
authentication results.
PART-B 48
31 Solution should have capability which allows users to add a device on a portal, where the
device goes through a registration process for network access. Should allow users to mark
as lost any device that you have registered in the network, and blacklist the device on the
network, which prevents others from unauthorized network access when using the
blacklisted device. Should have capability to reinstate a blacklisted device to its previous
status in Device Portal, and regain network access without having to register the device
again in the Devices Portal. Should also support removing any device in the enterprise
network temporarily, then register the device for network access again later.
32 The portal used for Device registration should be customizable, allowing to customize
portal theme by changing text, banners, background color, and images
33 Should provide a Registered Endpoints Reportwhich provides information about a list of
endpoints that are registered through the device registration portal by a specific user for a
selected period of time. The report should provide the following details
•Logged in Date and Time
•Portal User (who registered the device)
•MAC Address
•Identity Group
•Endpoint Policy
•Static Assignment
•Static Group Assignment
•Endpoint Policy ID
•NMAP Subnet Scan ID
•Device Registration Status
34 Solution should classify a client machine, and should support client provisioning resource
policies to ensure that the client machine is set up with an appropriate agent version, up-
to-date compliance modules for antivirus and antispyware vendor support, and correct
agent customization packages and profiles, if necessary
35 Solution should support receiving updated endpoint profiling policies and the updated OUI
database as a feed from the OEM database.
36 Should support native supplicant profiles to enable users to bring their own devices into
network. When the user logs in, based on the profile that you associate with that user's
authorization requirements, solution should provide the necessary supplicant provisioning
wizard needed to set up the user's personal device to access the network. This should be
supported over Microsoft windows, Apple Mac and iOS and Android devices.
37 When endpoints are discovered on the network, they can be profiled dynamically based on
the configured endpoint profiling policies, and assigned to the matching endpoint identity
groups depending on their profiles.
38 Should support using a simple filter that you can use to filter endpoints. The quick filter
filters endpoints based on field descriptions, such as the endpoint profile, MAC address,
and the static status that is assigned to endpoints when they are created in the Endpoints
page.
39 Should support an advanced filter that you can preset for use later and retrieve, along with
the filtering results, The advanced filter filters endpoints based on a specific value
associated with the field description. You can add or remove filters, as well as combine a
set of filters into a single advanced filter.
PART-B 49
40 Should support importing endpoints from a comma-separated values (CSV) file in which
the list of endpoints appears with the MAC address and the endpoint profiling policy details
separated by a comma.
41 Support for importing endpoints from LDAP server. Should allow to import MAC addresses
and the associated profiles of endpoints securely from an LDAP server. Should support an
LDAP server to import endpoints and the associated profiles, by using either the default
port 389, or securely over SSL, by using the default port 636.
42 Should support multiple Admin Group Roles and responsibilities like HelpDesk Admin,
Identity Admin, Monitoring Admin, Network Device Admin, Policy Admin, RBAC Admin,
Super Admin and System Admin
43 Should support Role-based access policies which are access control policies which allow
you to restrict the network access privileges for any user or group. Role-based access
policies are defined when you configure specific access control policies and permissions.
These admin access policies allow you to customize the amount and type of access on a
per-user or per-group basis using specified role-based access permission settings that
apply to a group or an individual user.
44 Should support Identity source sequences which defines the order in which the solution will
look for user credentials in the different databases. Solution should support the following
databases:
•Internal Users
•Internal Endpoints
•Active Directory
•LDAP
•RSA
•RADIUS Token Servers
•Certificate Authentication Profiles
45 Must be able to differentiate policy based on device type + authentication
46 Should have Ability to authenticate at least one phone and multiple users on the same
switchport without interrupting service
47 Solution should support MAB and can further utilize identity of the endpoint to apply the
proper rules for access. MacAddressBypass is typically used for devices which do not
support 802.1x
48 Solution must support Non 802.1x technology on assigned ports and 802.1x technology on
open use ports
49 Solution should provide support policy enforcement through VPN gateways
50 Solution must allow users access to the network in a worst case scenario in case of AAA
server outages or any other reasons like WAN failure.
51 Should support authenticating Machines and users connected to the same port on the
switch in a single authentication flow
52 Should support authenticating IP phones and users connected behind IP phones on the
same physical port.
PART-B 50
53 Solution should have profiling capabilities integrated into the solution in order to detect
headless host. The profiling features leverage the existing infrastructure for device
discovery. Should support the use of attributes from the following sources or sensors:
* Profiling using MAC OUIs
* Profiling using DHCP information
* Profiling using RADIUS information
* Profiling using HTTP information
* Profiling using DNS information
* Profiling using NetFlow information
* Profiling using SPAN/Mirrored traffic
54 Soution should support troubleshooting authentication issues by triggering session

reauthentication to follow up with an attempt to reauthenticate again.
55 Should support session termination with port shutdown option to block an infected host that
sends a lot of traffic over the network.
56 Should support the functionality to force endpoint to reacquire IP address that do not
support a supplicant or client to generate a DHCP request after a vlan change.
57 Troubleshooting & Monitoring Tools
58 Should support tools to run SHOW command on the network device.
59 Should support evaluation of the configuration of the device with the standard
configuration.
60 Should support TCP dump utility & also support saving a TCP dump file.
61 Solution should support schedule reports to run and re-run at specific time or time intervals
& send and receive email notifications once the reports are generated.
62 Solution should have capability to administrate devices through TACACS+ from day one
63 Minimum HW requirement for appliance are : 1 – Intel Xenon 2.60 GHz E5-2640
processor, minimum 64GB RAM and 4*600GB 10K RPM SAS HDD and 6 x 1G NIC
Network Management System: -
S.No Specification
1 NMS has to be preferably from the same OEM as of Switches, Wireless LAN Controllers
and Wireless Access Points.
2 Management system should provide a single integrated solution for comprehensive
lifecycle management of the Wired and Wireless LAN (of same OEM) and should support
rich visibility into end-user connectivity and application performance assurance issues
3 Management system should be licensed for proposed network devices which should
have flexibility to be shared among wire and wireless devices like switches and Wireless
access Points etc. of same OEM. Management system should have scalability to manage
1000 managed devices
PART-B 51
4 The NMS solution should be dedicated hardware based appliance which should have 10
Core Physical CPUs, 25MB cache, 64 GB memory, 4 x 900GB RAID10 and 320 MBps I/O
bandwidth with 1500 device Lic. from Day-1. NMS and other network active devices are
from same OEM for better integration and manageability.
5 The solution should support fault, configuration, accounting, performance, and security
management for complete network and compute environments
6 The solution should support discovery and classifies application-visibility readiness in
network device hardware and software
7 The solution should support Integration with the Enterprise SDN Controller, provides the
ability to automate new device deployment using Zero Touch Provisioning capabilities.
8 The solution should support speeds up to provisioning of services such as Performance

Routing (PfR) and simplifies quality-of-service (QoS) configuration and monitoring for
WAN connectivity
9 The solution should support compliance engine, which provides the ability to specify the
network configuration and perform an audit of the network devices against the
configuration archive or the device configuration. The audit report identifies devices that
are out of compliance. Administrator can remediate the devices that are out of compliance
with the desired configuration. This engine also helps with generating reports for
EoL/EoS/PCI for network devices.
10 The solution should support customize alarms based on the operational needs.
Customizable syslog based alarms provides the ability to custom create new alarms and
prioritize operator response
Next Generation Firewall: -
S.No Specifications
1 Industry Certifications and Evaluations
Firewall solution offered from OEM must be rated as leaders in the latest Magic Quadrant
for Enterprise Firewall and NGIPS published by Gartner
2 Hardware Architecture
The appliance based security platform should be capable of providing NGFW capability
(firewall, application visibility, and IPS functionality) and Advance malware,URL filtering in
a single appliance
The appliance should support atleast 8 * 10 Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports from Day one
and should be scalable to additional 8 x 10G or 4 x 40G ports. Required 10G
DAC/Transreceiver should be loaded from Day-1.
The appliance hardware should be a multicore CPU architecture with a hardened 64 bit
operating system to support higher memory
Proposed Firewall should not be proprietary ASIC based in nature & should be open
architecture based on multi-core cpu's to protect & scale against dynamic latest security
threats.
3 Performance & Scalability
PART-B 52
Should support atleast 12Gbps of FW performance throughput (includes FW & Application
Visibility )
Should support at least 10 Gbps of NGFW performance throughput (includes IPS +
Application Visibility)
L7 Firewall and NGFW throughput difference should not be more than 70%
NG Firewall should support at least 9 million concurrent session
NG Firewall should support at least 68000 connections per second with Application
visibility
4 High-Availability Features
Firewall should support Active/Standby failover
Firewall should support etherchannel functionality for the failover control & data interfaces
for provide additional level of redundancy
Firewall should support redundant interfaces to provide interface level redundancy before
device failover
Firewall should support 802.3ad Etherchannel functionality to increase the bandwidth for a
segment.
Firewall should support VXLAN
5 NGFW Firewall Features
Solution must be capable of passively gathering information about network hosts and their
activities, such as operating system, services, open ports, client applications, and
vulnerabilities, to assist with multiple activities, such as intrusion event data correlation,
elimination of false positives, and policy compliance.
Firewall should support creating access-rules with IPv4 & IPv6 objects simultaneously
Firewall should support operating in routed & transparent mode
Should support Static, RIP, OSPF, OSPFv3 and BGP
Firewall should support manual NAT and Auto-NAT, static nat, dynamic nat, dynamic pat
Firewall should support Nat66 (IPv6-to-IPv6), Nat 64 (IPv6-to-IPv4) & Nat46 (IPv4-to-
IPv6) functionality
Firewall should support Multicast protocols like IGMP, PIM, etc
Should support security policies based on security group names in source or destination
fields or both
Should support capability to limit bandwidth on basis of apps / groups, Networks / Geo,
Ports, etc
Should be capable of dynamically tuning IDS/IPS sensors (e.g., selecting rules,
configuring policies, updating policies, etc.) with minimal human intervention.
Should be capable of automatically providing the appropriate inspections and protections
for traffic sent over non-standard communications ports.
Proposed solution should have capability block BOT/CnC conenction (anti-bot) from day
one
Should be able to link Active Directory and/or LDAP usernames to IP addresses related to
suspected security events.
Should be capable of detecting and blocking IPv6 attacks.
Solution should support full-featured NBA capability to detect threats emerging from inside
the network. This includes the ability to establish “normal” traffic baselines through flow
PART-B 53
analysis techniques (e.g., NetFlow) and the ability to detect deviations from normal
baselines. If the functionality not support on the same appliance, vendor can quote
separate device for the same.
The solution must provide IP reputation feed that comprised of several regularly updated
collections of poor reputation of IP addresses determined by the proposed security vendor
Solution must support IP reputation intelligence feeds from third party and custom lists of
IP addresses including a global blacklist.
Should must support URL and DNS threat intelligence feeds to protect against threats
Should support safe search and YouTube EDU enforcement
Solution must be capable of passively gathering details unique to mobile devices traffic to
identify a wide variety of mobile operating systems, mobile applications and associated
mobile device hardware.
Should support more than 4000 application layer and risk-based controls that can invoke
tailored intrusion prevention system (IPS) threat detection policies to optimize security
effectiveness.
Must be capable of providing network-based detection of malware by checking the
disposition of known files in the cloud using the SHA-256 file-hash as they transit the
network and capabilityto do dynamic analysis on-premise (if required in future) on purpose
built-appliance. License not require from day one.
NGFW OEM must have its own threat intelligence analysis center and should use the
global footprint of security deployments for more comprehensive network protection.
The detection engine should support capability of detecting and preventing a wide variety
of threats (e.g., malware, network probes/reconnaissance, VoIP attacks, buffer overflows,
P2P attacks, etc.).
Should be able to identify attacks based on Geo-location and define policy to block on the
basis of Geo-location
The detection engine should support the capability of detecting variants of known threats,
as well as new threats
The detection engine must incorporate multiple approaches for detecting threats, including
at a minimum exploit-based signatures, vulnerability-based rules, protocol anomaly
detection, and behavioral anomaly detection techniques. Identify and explain each type of
detection mechanism supported.
Should support Open based Applicaion ID for access to community resources and ability
to easily customize security to address new and specific threats and applications quickly
Proposed Firewall should have URL filtering with 80+ categories and more than 280
million URL database
6 Management
The management platform must be accessible via a web-based interface and ideally with
no need for additional client software
The management platform must provide a highly customizable dashboard.
The management platform must be capable of integrating third party vulnerability
information into threat policy adjustment routines and automated tuning workflows
The management platform must be capable of role-based administration, enabling
different sets of views and configuration capabilities for different administrators
subsequent to their authentication.
PART-B 54
Should support REST API for monitoring and config programmability
The management platform must provide multiple report output types or formats, such as
PDF, HTML, and CSV.
The management platform must support multiple mechanisms for issuing alerts (e.g.,
SNMP, e-mail, SYSLOG).
The management platform must provide robust reporting capabilities, including a selection
of pre-defined reports and the ability for complete customization and generation of new
reports.
The management platform must risk reports like advanced malware, attacks and network
The management platform must include an integration mechanism, preferably in the form
of open APIs and/or standard interfaces, to enable events and log data to be shared with
external network and security management applications, such as Security Information and
Event Managers (SIEMs), and log management tools.
DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM (PASSIVE COMPONENTS):
Note: To avail 25 years performance warranty its mandatory to have all the passive components
(end to end connectivity) from single make as per approved list complying to technical
specification/performance parameter as mentioned below.
Bidder should be OEM/Authorized Partner/service provider of the OEM. In case the

1. bidder is an Authorized Partner or Service Provider a valid MAF specific to this tender
should also be enclosed along with the technical bid.
Vendors to submit the Datasheets along with Compliance and Test Reports at the
2.
time of submittals.
1. Specification for CAT 6 LSZH U/UTP Cable
Standard Compliance Compliance Remarks

(Yes/No)
The Category 6/Class E UTP system shall comply with the
following standards
ISO/IEC 11801
EN 50173 Part 1 through Part5: 2010 and 2011
ANSI/TIA 568C.2
The Category 6/ Class E UTP system should support the
following IEEE Ethernet applications
Channel Performance
PART-B 55
The SCS must consist of individual components provided

by the same manufacturer. “Mix and Match” products are
not allowed as there is no guarantee that the overall
channel will meet Category 6 Channel requirements if
constructed with components from different vendors.
The Category 6 cable and Category 6 channel
components shall be manufactured by a single
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the
Category 6 channel cable, components, and applications
for a period of 25 years.
Should support a minimum of 4 connector Channel with a
minimum 6 dB guaranteed NEXT over and above the
standard TIA 568 C.2. Bidder to furnish 3rd Party test
report of minimum 16000 nodes all having above 6 dB
NEXT margin from a single project. If required original file
format may be required to be submitted.
Should support 6 connector Channel with a minimum 4 db
guaranteed NEXT. ETL or UL 6 Connector test report to
be submitted demonstrating 6 connections.
The Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not
exceed 30 ns
Should support 117 meters with a 4 connector channel
design for IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T
Horizontal Cable
The Cable should meet ANSI/TIA 568C.2 Category 6
Specifications
The cable should consist of Eight 23 AWG copper
conductors. Copper Clad Aluminum or any other
combinations are not allowed
The weight of the cable box of 1000 Feet should not be
less than 25.6 lbs
The nominal Jacket thickness should be 0.020 inches
The nominal Outside diameter should be 0.233 inches
The cable should support the installation temperature: 0 to
60 0 C
It should support Operating temperature of -20 to 60 0 C
Should have ETL verified CMR, CMG
The Cable should be LSZH and should comply to the
following standard:
ISO/IEC 60332-3-22 Vertical Flame spread test
ISO/IEC 60754-2Acidity
ISO/IEC 61034-2 Smoke Density
The cable and cordage shall be UTP components that do
not include internal or external shields, screened
components or drain wires.
PART-B 56
The horizontal cable shall have a unique print string on

the cable jacket. This unique identifier shall also be used
for on-line reference to a full set of factory tests that were
performed on a sample from the same mater reel. The
test parameters shall include NEXT, PSNEXT, Return
Loss, Attenuation, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT. The on-line
reference must be available on the SCS vendor public
website, such that it can be accessed at any time.
2. Specification for Category 6 Gigabit Information Outlets

(Yes/No)
All Category 6 outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6
transmission requirements for connecting hardware, as
specified in TIA/EIA 568-B.C.2 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC
11801:2002 Second Edition.
The Category 6 outlets shall be backward compatible with
Category 5E, 5 and 3 cords and cables.
The Category 6 outlets shall be of a universal design

supporting T568 A & B wiring.
The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being installed at
either a 45¡ or a 90¡ angle in any M-series modular faceplate,
frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding the need for special
faceplates.
The Category 6 outlets shall have improved pair splitters and
wider channel for enhanced conductor placement. The
outlet shall also have a low-profile wire cap, which protects
against contamination and secures the connection.
Multicolored identification labels shall be available to assure
accurate installation.
General specifications:
a. Meets or exceeds the mechanical, electrical, and
clearance specifications in FCC Rules and Regulations, Part
68, Subpart F
b. Meet or exceed the Category 6 requirements in ISO/IEC
11801, CENELEC EN 50173, and TIA/EIA568B
C. Certifications: UL Listed
The 8-pin modular (RJ-45) jacks shall comply with IEC
60603-7-4.
The information outlet shall have a Current Rating of 1.5 A at
20°C
The information outlet will have insertion life of 750 cycles
minimum.
PART-B 57
The information outlet must be able to accept termination of

solid conductors with nominal diameter of between 0.40 mm
to 0.64 mm (26 to 22 AWG).
The Outlets should support 1.5Amp current further to support
the PoE and PoE+ applications
3. Specification for CAT 6 LSZH U/UTP RJ45 Patch Cords

(Yes/No)
Patch Cords shall be equipped with 8-pin modular plugs on
each end.
All cords shall be round, and consist of copper conductors,
tightly twisted into individual pairs.
Nominal cordage diameter shall not exceed 6.020 mm.
Plugs shall be designed with an anti-snag latch to facilitate
easy removal during move, add and change processes.
The patch cord should be LSZH and should comply to the

following standard:
ISO/IEC 60332-3-22: Vertical Flame Spread
ISO/IEC 60754-2: Acidity
ISO/IEC 61034-2: Smoke Density
The cordage shall be UTP components that do not include
internal or external shields, screened components or drain
wires.
The patch cords will have insertion life of 750 cycles
minimum.
The Patch cords shall be available in Stranded and solid
core construction
4. Specification for CAT 6 Jack Panel

(Yes/No)
The ganged adapter style patch panel will utilize increments of
six RJ-45 style jacks in a common moulded component.
The patch panel type shall be compliant with IEC 60603-7-4.

The ganged adapters shall have RJ45 jack in the front and
Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) at the rear of the
module.
The panel must be capable of supporting an upgrade to an
intelligent system without any interruption to service due to
patch cord removal or terminal block re-termination.
PART-B 58
The upgrade to an intelligent system shall be performed

through the addition of an overlay panel that does not require
tools for installation.
Termination managers must be provided with the panel.
These termination managers provide proper pair positioning,
control, and strain relief features to the rear termination area of
the panel.
When configured in worst-case 100 meter channels with full
cross-connects and consolidation points with the other
products proposed in this tender, the panel shall be capable of
delivering the minimum guaranteed channel performance.
5. 12 CORES –Single mode OS2 OUTSIDE PLANT FIBER CABLE: -
S.
PARAMETER SPECIFICATIONS
No.
12F Outdoor Corrugated Steel

tape armor, Gel Free, Outdoor
1 Type of Cable
Stranded Loose Tube Cable with
2 Rip Cords
MINIMUM ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, EN187105,

2
SPECIFICATIONS Telcordia GR-20
BEND INSENSITIVE SINGLE

3 FIBER TYPE SOLUTION MODE FIBER ( AS PER G.652D,
G.657.A1, OS2)
a) Fiber Size 9/125/250 µm
b) Fiber Per Subunit, Quantity 12F
c) Jacket Material PE
d) Total Fiber Count 12 Core
e) Jacket Color Black
f) Jacket UV Resistance UV Stabilized
4 DIMENSIONS
Buffer Tube/Subunit
a) 2.50 mm | 0.10 in
Diameter
PART-B 59
b) Cable Weight 110.0 kg/km | 74.0 lb/kft
c) Diameter Over Jacket 11.50 mm | 0.45 in
PHYSICAL
5
SPECIFCATIONS
a) Cladding Diameter 125.0 µm
Cladding Diameter
b) + 0.7 µm
Tolerance
Cladding Non-Circularity,
c) 0.7 %
maximum
d) Coating Diameter (Colored) 253 µm
Coating Diameter
e) 240 µm
(Uncolored)
Coating Diameter Tolerance

f) +7 µm
(Colored)

g) +5 µm
(Uncolored)
Coating/Cladding
h) Concentricity Error, 12 µm
maximum
i) Core/Clad Offset, maximum 0.5 µm
Minimum Bend Radius,

a) 17.3 cm | 6.8 in
Loaded

b) 11.5 cm | 4.5 in
Unloaded
Tensile Load, Long term,

c) 800 N | 180 lbf
maximum
Tensile Load, Short term,

d) 2700 N | 607 lbf
maximum
e) Vertical Rise, maximum 740.0 m | 2429.0 ft
PART-B 60
ENVIRONMENTAL
6
SPECIFICATIONS
a) Environmental Space Aerial, lashed | Buried
-30 deg. C to +70 deg. C (-22 deg.

b) Installation Temperature
F to + 158 deg. F)
-40 deg. C to +70 deg. C (-40 deg.

c) Operating Temperature
F to + 158 deg. F)
-40 deg. C to +75 deg. C (-40 deg.

d) Storage Temperature
F to + 167 deg. F)
MECHANICAL TEST
7
SPECIFCATIONS
a) Compression 250 lb/in | 44 N/mm
b) Compression Test Method FOTP-41 | IEC 60794-1 E3
c) Flex 35 Cycles
d) Flex Test Method FOTP-104 | IEC 60794-1 E6
e) Impact 4.41 N-m | 3.25 ft lb
f) Impact Test Method FOTP-25 | IEC 60794-1 E4
g) Twist 10 Cycles
h) Twist Test Method FOTP-85 | IEC 60794-1 E7
i) Water Penetration 24 h
Water Penetration Test

j) FOTP-82 | IEC 60794-1 F5
Method
OPTICAL
8 SPECIFICATIONS,
WAVELENGTH SPECIFIC
Standards Compliance ITU-T G.652.D | ITU-T

a)
G.657.A1 | TIA-492CAAB (OS2)
b) Attenuation, maximum 0.22 dB/km @ 1550 nm
PART-B 61
0.23 dB/km @ 1575 nm
0.27 dB/km @ 1490 nm
0.27 dB/km @ 1625 nm
0.31 dB/km @ 1385 nm
0.34 dB/km @ 1310 nm
0.35 dB/km @ 1650 nm
0.45 dB/km @ 1270 nm
Dispersion, maximum 18 ps(nm-km) at 1550 nm | 3.5

c) ps(nm-km) from 1285 nm to 1330
nm at 1310 nm
Mode Field Diameter 9.2 µm @ 1310 nm
d) 9.6 µm @ 1385 nm
10.4 µm @ 1550 nm
Mode Field Diameter ±0.3 µm @ 1310 nm | ±0.5 µm

e) Tolerance @ 1550 nm | ±0.6 µm @ 1385
nm
Index of Refraction 1.467 @ 1310 nm
f) 1.468 @ 1385 nm
1.468 @ 1550 nm
Polarization Mode 0.04 ps/sqrt(km)

g) Dispersion Link Design
Value, maximum
Backscatter Coefficient -82.1 dB @ 1550 nm

h)
-79.6 dB @ 1310 nm
REGULATORY
9 RoHS
COMPLIANCE
PART-B 62
6. 6 CORES – Multimode OM3 OUTSIDE PLANT FIBER CABLE: -

S. Compliance Product
PARAMETER SPECIFICATIONS
No. [Y/N] Part No.
6F Outdoor Corrugated
Steel tape armor, Gel
1 Type of Cable Free, Outdoor Stranded
Loose Tube Cable with 2
Rip Cords
ANSI/ICEA S-87-640,
MINIMUM
2 EN187105, Telcordia GR-
SPECIFICATIONS
20
3 FIBER TYPE SOLUTION BEND INSENSITIVE OM3
a) Fiber Size 50/125/250 µm
b) Fiber Per Subunit, Quantity 6F
c) Jacket Material PE
d) Total Fiber Count 6 Core
e) Jacket Color Black
f) Jacket UV Resistance UV Stabilized
4 DIMENSIONS
Buffer Tube/Subunit
a) 2.50 mm | 0.10 in
Diameter
b) Cable Weight 110.0 kg/km | 74.0 lb/kft
c) Diameter Over Jacket 11.50 mm | 0.45 in
PHYSICAL
5
SPECIFCATIONS
a) Cladding Diameter 125.0 µm
Cladding Diameter
b) + 0.7 µm
Tolerance
PART-B 63
Cladding Non-Circularity,
c) 0.7 %
maximum
d) Coating Diameter (Colored) 253 µm
Coating Diameter
e) 245 µm
(Uncolored)

f) +7 µm
(Colored)

g) +10 µm
(Uncolored)
Coating/Cladding
h) Concentricity Error, 12 µm
maximum
i) Core/Clad Offset, maximum 1.5 µm

a) 17.3 cm | 6.8 in
Loaded

b) 11.5 cm | 4.5 in
Unloaded
Tensile Load, Long term,

c) 800 N | 180 lbf
maximum
Tensile Load, Short term,

d) 2700 N | 607 lbf
maximum
e) Vertical Rise, maximum 740.0 m | 2429.0 ft
ENVIRONMENTAL
6
SPECIFICATIONS
a) Environmental Space Aerial, lashed | Buried
-30 deg. C to +70 deg. C (-

b) Installation Temperature
22 deg. F to + 158 deg. F)
-40 deg. C to +70 deg. C (-

c) Operating Temperature
40 deg. F to + 158 deg. F)
-40 deg. C to +75 deg. C (-

d) Storage Temperature
40 deg. F to + 167 deg. F)
PART-B 64
MECHANICAL TEST
7
SPECIFCATIONS
a) Compression 250 lb/in | 44 N/mm
FOTP-41 | IEC 60794-1

b) Compression Test Method
E3
c) Flex 35 Cycles
FOTP-104 | IEC 60794-1

d) Flex Test Method
E6
e) Impact 4.41 N-m | 3.25 ft lb
FOTP-25 | IEC 60794-1

f) Impact Test Method
E4
g) Twist 10 Cycles
FOTP-85 | IEC 60794-1

h) Twist Test Method
E7
i) Water Penetration 24 h
Water Penetration Test FOTP-82 | IEC 60794-1

j)
Method F5
OPTICAL
8 SPECIFICATIONS,
WAVELENGTH SPECIFIC
a) Standards Compliance TIA-492AAAC (OM3)
Attenuation, maximum 1.00 dB/km @ 1300 nm

b)
3.00 dB/km @ 850 nm
Dispersion, maximum 18 ps(nm-km) at 1550

nm | 3.5 ps(nm-km)
c)
from 1285 nm to 1330 nm
at 1310 nm
Index of Refraction 1.479 @ 1300 nm

f)
1.483 @ 850 nm
PART-B 65
Backscatter Coefficient -75.7 dB @ 1300 nm

h)
-68.0 dB @ 850 nm
REGULATORY
9 RoHS
COMPLIANCE
7. Rack Mounted Fiber Optic Patch Panel and Components

Sr. Specifications Compliance Remarks
No. (Y/N)
1U low-profile, high density fiber optic shelf shall be
proposed that can be used for a combination of splicing
1
and termination of fiber optic building cable or outside
plant (OSP) cables.
The 1U height fully enclosed shelves shall include
2 integrated front cable management trough and features
a slide-out tray for easy access.
The Panel shall accommodate up to 48 fibers to be
3
spliced / terminated
The front plate of the panel shall be included in the
4
proposal that can support LC-Style Duplex adapters
The alignment sleeve of the LC Duplex adapter shall be
of Phosphor Bronze. This allows better retention and
5
alignment of fiber connectors on patch cords and
pigtails.
The MM adapter shall support OM3 as well as OM4
6 fibers / patch cords. SM adapters should support OS2
fibers / patch cords.
The panel shall accommodate fusion splice trays that
7
can support splicing up to 48 fibers
Adequate number of Fusion splice holder trays should
8
be included either integrated or separate.
Cable assemblies - Pigtails
and Patch Cords
The Pigtail shall be assembled with 50 μm multimode
9 fiber (OM4) for MM fier cabling System and with SM
fiber for SM fiber cabling system
The pigtail shall be assembled using 900 micron
10
buffered fiber
The pigtails shall be terminated with MM LC-style
11 connector for MM cabling systems and SM LC-Style
connector for SM cabling system
12 The pigtails shall have a Cable 3.00 lb @ 90 ° C
13 Retention Strength, maximum 6.00 lb @ 0 ° C
The LC connector on the pigtail shall meet Optical
14 Components Standard ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. please
append data sheet
PART-B 66
The Patch cord proposed shall be duplex, 1.6mm

15 jacketed, and shall be of 50 μm multimode fiber (OM4)
for MM and SM fiber for SM
Warranty
The Extended Product Warranty should cover all
passive SCS components (i.e., cable and connectivity
16
components that make up the passive data and
telecommunications signal transmission infrastructure).
In addition to product warranty the Application
Assurance shall cover the SCS compliant channels to
support operations of the application(s) that the system
was designed to support. The supplier warrants that the
SCS will be free from defects that prevent operation of
17
the specific application(s) for which the Registered SCS
was initially designed as long as the design is in
compliance with the SCS Performance Specifications
for said applications and is in compliance with all other
terms and conditions of this warranty
The system integrator responding to this RFP should a
certified partner of the manufacturer. The details of
18 such bidder to the RFP should appear on the
manufacturer’s partner locator on the manufacturer's
web site.
19 The warranty shall be for a minimum of 25 years.
Specification for Networking Racks
1 12U Wall mounting cabinets.
size 771.35X600X500mm (HXWXD)) with all standard
accessories.
Width (mm) 600, Depth (mm) - 500,
Approx.Net Wt (kg) - 32, CRCA 'D' Grade thickness (mm) -
1.2, RAL 9017 (Matt Black), Glass - 4mm Toughened
Tinted Glass
Door, Accessories:, Cooling Fan (230V A/C 90 CFM) - 2
Nos,
PDU 230VAC - 1 No, Cable Manager Metal - 3 Nos,
Earthling
Strips 150mm H - 1 No, Mounting Hardware (20 sets of M6
screws, washer, cage nuts (nickel coated)) - 1 No, Wall
Screws (4 sets of 2'' screws, washer, rubber grommet
(nickel coated)) - 1 No,
Door Lock - 1 No, Front Metal Band -1 No. In the rack
there must be maintained1 U = 1.75 inches space. Nos. 20
etc complete as required
PART-B 67
2 42U Cabinet
Size 2026 X 800 X 800 mm (HXWXD) following
accessories, Width (mm) 800, Depth (mm) 800, Approx.
Net Wt (kg) 150, CRCA 'D' Grade thickness (mm) 1.2, RAL
9017(Matt Black), Glass: 4mm Toughened Tinted Glass
Door, Injected
one piece polyurethane gasket on frame, Accessories:
Cooling Fan (230V A/C 90 CFM) - 4 Nos, Cable Manager
Metal- 4 Nos,
PDU 230VAC - 1 No (12 nos. 6A/16A sockets with plugs
6A/16A - 1/1pc & MCB 16A/32A - 0/1 Pc), Cable Channel
100mm wide 42U- 2 Nos, Heavy Duty Stationary Shelf
600mmW x 475mmD - 1 No., Mounting Hardware (20 sets
of M6 screws, washer, cage nuts (nickel coated)) - 3 Nos.,
Earthling Strips 150mm H - 1 No, Door Lock - 1 No, Castor
Wheels (with Brake) - 2 Nos, Castor Wheels (without
Brake) – 2 Nos, Front Metal Band - 1 No. Packing: 5 ply
cardboard & Inside 28 ply EP foam. In the rack there must
be maintained 1 U = 1.75 inches space. Nos. 1 etc
complete as required
**************************
PART-B 68
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR IP PBX SERVER
The system should be based on server-gateway architecture running on Linux OS supporting

Analog, Digital, IP, SIP and Wireless Extensions.
System shall be non‐blocking and open standard (based on H.323 and SIP). The call control
system should be fully redundant solution and should provide 1:1 redundancy.
The servers should be of industry standard makes like DELL/HP/IBM only. The proposed server
should be capable of supporting at least 3000 extensions in future. The expansion should not
require any additional hardware.
The server should have the following minimum specifications: Xeon 2 X E5-2620v3 2.4 GHz, 32
GB RAM, HDDs in atleast RAID1 hot-swappable, hot-swappable power supplies, 6 x 1G LAN
ports. The vendor may provide better specifications available at the time of bidding.
The system should be capable of deployment on virtualized platforms like VMWare/Hyper-V etc.
System should provide call control, mobility, IM and presence, Web-Collaboration, Messaging
and centralized licensing.
The system should support standards-based multi-site networking, using QSIG, H.323 trunks or
advanced networking, to interoperate with other PABX's, allowing feature transparency.
Voice CODEC support G.711, G.729, G.729a & G.722 or any less utilization bandwidth across
WAN and LAN
Video CODEC: H.264 or Equal
System should have built-in SIP and H.323 gatekeeper functionality without the need to put any
additional hardware
System should support SIP trunking to Internet Telephony Service Providers, allowing non-SIP
phones to make SIP calls.
The system should support at least 100 remote sites on the same platform through gateways.
The system should provide complete inbuilt encryption capabilities or features without any
external firewall, with the ability to encrypt all traffic (media and call control signalling) between IP
phones, soft phones, call controllers and all other associated endpoints via a strong encryption
algorithm like IPSec or SRTP etc.
System should be able to provide centralized voicemail with the option of Distributed centralized
voicemail in case of connectivity failure.
The system should support BRI/ PRI/ T1/ E1/Analog/IP/SIP Trunks.
The communication server should offer BHCC (Busy Hour Call Completion) of atleast 20000 per
server to ensure superior traffic handling capacities.
PART-B 69
The offered system should be modular in design. The architecture of IP PBX should be capable
of seamless migration to its maximum capacity by simply adding licenses/peripheral cards on the
set of control server without compromising on any functions/ features of this system or any
degradation of service.
The system should be able to provide hybrid end points i.e. both IP and TDM. They should also
provide support for 100% TDM endpoints.
The proposed communication system should have a highly secured, encrypted IP supporting
hybrid Trunks e.g. Analog CO, Digital Trunks (BRI and PRI), IP Trunks (H.323/SIP)
System should have in built-in DHCP Server, which should be able to give IP Addresses to the
endpoints.
System should support built-in Remote access server (RAS) functionality.
System should support Diffserv for QoS (Quality of service) for the voice packets traveling over
data networks
System should support standards-based CTI integration with 3rd party applications.
System should support WebRTC based application for Web Collaboration users for Windows and
Mac OS.
Should support Active Directory integration for directory synchronization and user authentication.
The equipment quoted by bidder must be SIP compliant.
The offered system should have a valid TEC approval. TEC approval certificate copies for ISDN
connectivity should be enclosed along with the offer.
 DESIRED FEATURES & FACILITIES OF IP PBX:
The offered solution should provide the following features as a part of its telephony
functions.
Call Coverage
Call Forwarding
Call Hold
Call Intrude
Call Park
DND
Ring Back When Free
Suspend Call Waiting
Distinctive and Personalized Ringing
Toggle Calls
Account Codes
PART-B 70
Call Barring
Bridged Appearance
Group Paging
Hot Desking
Mobile Twinning
Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN)
Intrusion Warning Tone
Alternate Route Selection
Flexible numbering Schemes
Time of Day and Date Routing of Calls
Call Recording
PIN Restricted Calling
Time Profiles
Queue announcements
Call Detail Recording
SMDR (Station Messaging Detail Record)
Fax on demand integration
Station Call – User can dial any extension anywhere in central location and other
distributed location by dialing simple extension number.
Support Tone dialling from an extension.
Authorization Codes ‐ 5‐7 digit authorization code to make outgoing toll calls for ensuring
no misuse of the system.
Automatic Call Back – User can register ACB feature to any extension of the offered
system.
Call pickup within the group as well as outside the group
Alternate Routing – Automatically re‐route calls which encounter a busy trunks on the
initial route. Automatic digital translation is carried out by the system. Provides the
possibility of reaching external destinations via different routes.
Call Detail Recording – Records detailed call information on all incoming and outgoing
calls on specified trunk groups and stations, including those administered for intra‐switch
recordings, and send this information to any printer of time/duration as and when required.
Necessary hardware and software if required to be quoted separately.
Class of Service – Defines whether or not voice terminal users may access the following
features and functions:
PART-B 71
Automatic Call‐back, Call Forwarding, Call Forward, Busy/Don’t Answer, Data Privacy,
Extended Forwarding, Extended Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer, Priority Calling,
Restrict Call Forwarding Off‐Net, Personal Station Access, Trunk –to‐Trunk, Transfer
Restriction Override, Off‐Hook Alert & Console Permission.
DID/DOD (Direct Inward/Outward Dialling) – The proposed system must support direct
inward dialling for external parties to call in.
Direct Inward Station Access – This feature must be optionally available, allowing an
outside caller to access switch features by dialling a special telephone number without
attendant assistance, it should permit access to the server and long distance facilities from
off‐premise stations. For security, there should be the option of turning off this feature.
Day/Night Trunk Control – To reduce cost and improve system security it should be
possible to restrict the access to certain trunks depending on time of day.
Distinctive Ringing – To provide audibly different ringing patterns between internal,
external and special feature calls.
Flexible numbering plan – Support up‐to 2‐15 Digit for an extension number and allow
phone number assigned to a station to a station to be changed through software.
System Abbreviated Dialling ‐ To have the ability to store a list of frequently called numbers
that will be available on a systemwide basis to all users.
The system should support internal MOH (Music on Hold), which should be uploaded
using the .Wav file and should have an audio input port for external MOH connectivity.
CLI (Caller Line Identification) facility (CLIP/CLIR) ‐ Calling Numbers (internal & external)
should be displayed on all Analog extensions (FSK support phone).
Web collaboration for desktop and application collaboration, whiteboarding and document
sharing. It should be possible to escalate from an audio call to web collaboration. It should
provide a document library possible to upload documents, presentations and pictures to a
document library for quickly sharing during a web collaboration session.
 Voice Gateway
GW should support X.21/V.35 WAN Interface.
GW should have relays for door entry systems.
GW should be 19” rack mountable.
GW should have in-bulit 2 port auto-sensing LAN Switch (Layer 3)
GW should have Integral Static or Dynamic (RIP I/II) routing for both Internet and Branch-
to-Branch solutions
GW should support Frame Relay WAN protocol
GW should support the following protocols: PPP, ML-PPP, CHAP, PAP, ARP, BACP
GW should be able to provide redundancy to all users in case of failure of redundant
servers
PART-B 72
GW should support at least 148 DSP channels on each gateway.

 Terminal Support
System should support the following type of terminals
Analog Phones
Digital Phones
IP Hardphones
IP/SIP Softphones
Video Hard/Softphone
Wireless IP Phones (802.a/b/g/n)
3rd party SIP phones RFC3261 Compliant
 Trunk Support
System should support following types of trunks:
Analog Trunks
PRI
BRI
T1/ E1/ E1R2
 Voicemail Features
System should have inbuilt voice mail system

Voicemail to email option should be available
System should support unified messaging with Microsoft Exchange or any IMAP compliant
email application.
System should support voicemail access through web-browser
External Fax server integration should be possible.
VM should support text-to-Speech functionality
VM should support Dial-by-Name functionality
VM should support Auto Attendant
IVR functionality should be available
 Conferencing Features
The system should have built-in 256 party Ad-Hoc or Meet-Me audio conferencing bank
from day 1.
Multiple conferences with variable number of users should be possible within each of the
conferencing banks.
PART-B 73
System should be able to generate detailed reports about the conference.

System should be able to send emails to all the participants giving them the conferencing
details
System should support PIN based security for conference calls.
System should support scheduling of conference call.
 Call Recording
System should have in-built capability to manual, automatically as well as time based
record and store calls into any voicemail box or a central database, for later retrieval,
sorting, searching through a web-based browser interface.
Recordings should be able to be made on the basis of:
User ID
Account code
Hunt Group
Caller ID
Incoming call route
Time profiles
System should support automatic deletion of oldest recordings, if needed.
System should provide archival of recordings by automatically writing them to a DVD+RW
drive.
System should support G.726 16kbps ADPCM standard for compressing and storing
recordings, providing the best compromise between CPU loading and storage space.
 Management Interface
System should be able to be configured and administered using a GUI based application
System should support SNMP based network management
In case SNMP management is not available, system should be capable of sending event
notifications to up-to 3 email addresses, each with a different set of alarms
 UC Functionalities
Same Unified Communications (UC) client that provides users with real time collaboration
capabilities
Support for Windows and MaC OS
Support for Android and iOS devices Smartphones
The Softphone should provide full call control from an iPhone or Android powered
smartphone.
PART-B 74
Make and receive phone calls and instant messages, host and attend audio conferences.
See employee availability via presence, and use Geo-tracking to determine the location in
the field.
All of this is done using the corporate directory, so there are no personal cell phone
numbers will be involved.
The Softphone application should be downloadable from Google Playstore or Apple
iTunes without any additional cost for any number of device.
Solution should provide a "presence" application for users, so that they can see the
availability status of their contacts in their contact list
The common supported status for this application should be available, busy, idle, away
etc.
The instant messaging application should support manual setting of user status to:
Available, Away, Do Not Disturb (DND) Shall provide support for open protocols like
XMPP.
 Phones
 IP Phone Type-1
1. Backlit display with 320x240 pixel and 3.5” display

2. Display to visualize the number dialed or incoming number and name.
3. The phone must support IP configuration statically or dynamically via DHCP protocol.
4. The phone should have 8 line /feature key buttons with dual LED’s (red, green)and 3
soft keys.
5. The phone should have an exclusive button to activate the speakerphone and with the
ability to communicate in hands free echo cancellation.
6. The phone should have exclusive navigation buttons and an exclusive button for
selection or dynamic menu.
7. The phone should have an exclusive button to check the voice mail.
8. The phone should have an exclusive button to check the phone directory and to
integrate with LDAP.
9. The phone should have an exclusive button to check the received, missed, and dialed call
history.
10. The phone should have an LED indicator to announce a voice mail.
11. The phone should have at least 2 network ports of 10/100 Base T through a RJ-45
interface for a simple LAN connection, both the phone and a PC in the same location. With
this the system administrator can designate separate virtual LANs (VLANS) (802.1Q) for the
PC and IP phone.
12. The phone should have a PoE (IEEE 802.3af) class 2.
13. The phone must support H.323 protocol.
14. The phone should have at least 6 ringtones selectable by the user.
15. The phone should have audio protocols wideband, G.711, G726 and G.729 A/B.
16. The phone should have support such that through a TFTP server or http, the device
acquires its configuration.
PART-B 75
17. The phone should have the capacity to receive the power supply through the network
port LAN via protocol standard 802.3af (PoE) class 2 and through an external AC source
power, in case it is required.
18. The phone should have support up to 3 expansion modules of at least 32 functionalities
each.
IP Phone Type – 2
1. Single-line IP phone, with support for two concurrent calls

2. Support for transfer, Forward, Mute, 3-Way-Ad-Hoc-Conference
3. Monochrome 128x40 pixel and 2.3” monochrome display
4. Three context sensitive soft keys
5. Fixed hard buttons for Mute, Hold, Transfer, Conference,Forward, Call Park /
UnPark
6. Should support call History with up to 100 entries
7. OPUS Codec, G.711a/u, G.722, G.726A, G.729, G.729A, G.729AB
8. Full duplex speakerphone
9. Wall-Mount and Desk-Mount stand.
10. Should be able to support failover if one server fails
11. Message Waiting Indicator
12. Navigation buttons for easy manipulation.
13. Dual 10/100 Ethernet ports to support co-located PC
14. TLS and SRTP support
15. Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3af/az as a Class 1 device
16. Should support optional Wireless Module for Wi-Fi connectivity
************************
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART-B 76
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
Provide a modular and network-enabled access control system for security management,
including engineering, supply, installation and activation.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: Systems specified in this Section shall meet or exceed the requirements
of the following:
Federal Communications Commission (FCC):
FCC Part 15 – Radio Frequency Device
FCC Part 68 – Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
UL294 – Access Control System Units
UL1076 – Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
NFPA70 – National Electrical Code
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):
RS232C – Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment
Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
RS485 – Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multi-
Point Systems
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS):
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) (FIPS 197)
FIPS 201: Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors
Homeland Security Presidential Directive 12 (HSPD-12)
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Security Management System shall function as an electronic access control system and shall
integrate alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital video, ID badging and database management into a
single platform. A modular and network-enabled architecture shall allow maximum versatility for
tailoring secure and dependable access and alarm monitoring solutions.
SUBMITTALS
PART-B 77
MAF: Bidder should be OEM/Authorized Partner/service provider of the OEM. In case the bidder
is an Authorized Partner or Service Provider a valid MAF specific to this tender to quote on
behalf of OEM should also be enclosed along with the technical bid
Manufacturer’s Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data sheets indicating systems and
components proposed for use.
Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings indicating system components, wiring diagrams
and load calculations.
Record Drawings: During construction maintain record drawings indicating location of equipment
and wiring. Submit an electronic version of record drawings for the Security Management System
not later than Substantial Completion of the project.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data,
customized to the Security Management System installed. Include system and operator manuals.
Maintenance Service Agreement: Submit a sample copy of the manufacturer’s maintenance
service agreement, including cost and services for a two year period for Owner’s review.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Minimum ten years experience in manufacturing and maintaining Security
Management Systems. Manufacturer shall be Microsoft Silver Certified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s labeled packages. Store and handle in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty for the security
management system.
PRODUCTS
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Software Requirements: The Security Management System shall be a modular and network-
enabled access control system. The Security Management System shall be capable of
controlling multiple remote sites, alarm monitoring, video imaging, ID badging, paging, digital
video and CCTV switching and control that allows for easy expansion or modification of inputs
and remote control stations. The Security Management System control at a central computer
location shall be under the control of a single software program and shall provide full integration
of all components. It shall be alterable at any time depending upon facility requirements. Security
Management System reconfiguration shall be accomplished online through system
programming. The Security Management System shall include the following:
Multi-User/Network Capabilities: The Security Management System shall support multiple
operator workstations via local area network/wide area network (LAN/WAN). The
communications between the workstations and the server computer shall utilize the TCP/IP
standard over industry standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet). The communications between the server
PART-B 78
and workstations shall be supervised, and shall automatically generate alarm messages when
the server is unable to communicate with a workstation. The operators on the network server
shall have the capability to log on to workstations and remotely configure devices for the
workstation. Standard operator permission levels shall be enforced, with full operator audit.
Concurrent Licensing: The Security Management System shall support concurrent client
workstation licensing. The Security Management System application shall be installed on any
number of client workstations, and shall provide the ability for any of the client workstations to
connect to the database server as long as the maximum number of concurrent connections
purchased has not been exceeded.
Dongle: The Security Management System shall only require a single dongle to be present on
the database server for the Security Management System to operate. Dongles shall not be
required at the client workstations. The Security Management System shall allow a user to read
the information that is programmed on the dongle. The Security Management System shall
support export of the information using the ‘Export Dongle information’ button, which shall allow
the user to forward to the integrator when upgrading new dongle features.
Security Key: The Security Management System shall only require a software security key to
be present on the application server for the Security Management System to operate. Security
keys shall not be required at the client workstations. The Security Management System shall
allow a user to read the information that is programmed on the server security key. The Security
Management System shall support the installation, update, and termination of the security key.
Access Control Software Suite: The Security Management System shall offer a security
management software suite scalable to meet the future requirement without to change existing
system. The Security Management System platform shall offer a complete access control
solution: alarm monitoring, video imaging, ID badging and video surveillance control.
The Security Management System shall operate in the Windows Server 2012/2016 (64-bit) and
Windows Server 2012/2016 R2 (64-bit) environment and utilize SQL Server 2012/2016 SP1
(32-bit and 64-bit) as the database engine.
Terminal Services: The Security Management System shall support Windows Server 2008
Terminal Services. Terminal Services shall allow the Security Management System server
application to reside on the Windows Terminal Server. Operating systems supporting a standard
web browser shall be capable of utilizing the thin client architecture. The Security Management
System shall support unlimited connections, based on concurrent licensing, to the Security
Management System software. Full functionality shall be obtained through the intranet
connection allowing full administration and monitoring without the need for a local installation.
Relational Database Management System: The Security Management System shall support
industry standard relational database management systems. This shall include relational
database management system Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP1.
Database Partitioning: The Security Management System shall provide the option to restrict
access to sensitive information by user ID.
Memory: Proprietary software programs and control logic information used to coordinate and
drive system hardware shall be stored in read-only memory.
PART-B 79
LDAP/ Microsoft Active Directory Services: The Security Management System shall provide
support of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) for enabling the user to locate
organizations, individuals, and other resources such as files and devices in a network, whether
on the public internet or on a private intranet. The Security Management System shall provide a
direct link to Microsoft Active Directory Services. The Security Management System shall allow
the transfer of Active Directory users into the database via the Data Transfer interface.
Conversely, Security Management System users shall be capable of being exported to the Active
Directory.
Unicode: The Security Management System shall utilize Unicode worldwide character set
standard. The Security Management System shall support double-byte character sets to facilitate
adaptation of the Security Management System user interface and documentation to new
international markets. Language support shall include at a minimum English, Spanish,
Portuguese, French, German and Simple Chinese.
Encryption: The Security Management System shall provide multiple levels of data encryption
True 128-bit AES data encryption between the host and intelligent controllers. The encryption
shall ensure data integrity that is compliant with the requirements of FIPS-197 and SCIF
environments. Master keys shall be downloaded to the intelligent controller, which shall then be
authenticated through the Security Management System based on a successful match.
Transparent database encryption, including log files and backups
SQL secure connections via SSL
Supervised Alarm Points: Both supervised and non-supervised alarm point monitoring shall be
provided. Upon recognition of an alarm, the system shall be capable of switching CCTV
cameras that are associated with the alarm point.
Compliance and Validation: The Security Management System shall incorporate signature
authentication where modifications to Security Management System resources will require
either a single or dual signature authentication. Administrators will have the ability to select
specified devices in the Security Management System where data manipulation will be audited
and signatures will be required to account for the data modification. Upon resource modification,
the user will be required to enter a reason for change or select a predefined reason from a list.
All data will be securely stored and maintained in the database and can be viewed using the
reporting tool. This functionality will meet the general requirements of Validation and
Compliance through Digital Signatures with special attention to the case of Title 21 CFR Part
11 Part B compliance.
Clean Room Solution:

Overview: The Security Management System shall provide a clean room solution which
enables users to manage their “Clean Environments” or other areas requiring special restricted
access through a process-oriented graphical user interface (GUI).
Configuration: The user shall have the capability of adding, editing, or deleting clean rooms.
Each “clean room” shall be capable of having a contamination level set. Entry to a higher level
PART-B 80
contamination area shall automatically restrict access to cleaner level areas. Individual cards
shall be capable of being reset on an immediate one time, automatic, or per-hour basis.
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Security Management System Operational Requirements:
System Operations:
Windows Authentication Login: The Security Management System shall use an integrated
login method which accepts the user ID of the person who has logged on to Windows.
Password: The Security Management System shall use an integrated authentication
method which utilizes Windows user accounts and policies.
Information Access: The Security Management System shall be capable of limiting operator
access to sensitive information. Operators must have proper authorization to edit the
information.
Shadow Login: The Security Management System shall allow users to login over a currently
logged-on user without having the current user log off the Security Management System or
out of the Windows operating system.
Graphical User Interface: The Security Management System shall be fully compliant with
Microsoft graphical user interface standards, with the look and feel of the software being
that of a standard Windows application, including hardware tree-based system
configuration.
Guard Tour: The Security Management System shall include a guard tour module, which
shall allow the users to program guard tours for their facility. The tours shall not require the
need for independent or dedicated readers.
Secure Mode Verification (e.g., force guard to do a visual verify): The Security Management
System shall provide ‘secure mode’ control from the verification viewer. This shall allow a
user or guard to decide the access of an individual who presents his/her card at a designated
secure mode reader.
Database Partitioning: The Security Management System shall support dynamic
partitioning. A Security Management System in which partitions are set up at installation and
cannot be easily changed shall not be acceptable.
Status Groups: The Security Management System shall support a real-time system status
monitor that graphically depicts all logical devices.
Keyboard Accelerators: The Security Management System shall allow the user to use a
shortcut key to enable designated system commands.
Automatically Disable Card upon Lack of Use: The Security Management System shall
allow system operators to set a predefined time period in which cardholders must swipe
their card through a card reader in the Security Management System.
User Functions and ADA Ability: The Security Management System shall provide user
functions and ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) ability that provides the capability to
PART-B 81
trigger an event at the Security Management System intelligent controller when a defined
card is presented.
Pathways: The Security Management System shall support the capability of programming
pathways. A pathway shall be an object that combines input points to be masked (shunted)
for a set duration, and an output point to be activated, when a particular card receives a
local grant at a reader.
Database Audit Log: The Security Management System shall be capable of creating an
audit log in the history file following any change made to the Security Management System
database by an operator.
Operator Log: The Security Management System shall be capable of creating an action log
in the history file following actions performed by an operator.
Alarm Routing: The Security Management System shall be capable of defining routing
groups that determine what event information shall be routed to a user or class of users.
Global and Nested Anti-passback: The Security Management System shall support the use
of an optional anti-passback mode, in which cardholders are required to follow a proper
in/out sequence within the assigned area.
Two Person Rule: The Security Management System shall support a “two person rule” to
restrict access to specific access areas unless two cardholders present two different valid
cards to the reader one after the other within a period time defined by the door unlock time
multiplied by a factor of 2.
Occupancy Restrictions: The Security Management System shall allow the user to define
the minimum and maximum occupancy allowed in a designated area.
Multiple Sequential Card Swipes to Initiate Procedure: The Security Management System
shall allow the user to define a logical device, quantity of consecutive identical events, a
time period and a Security Management System procedure to trigger when the event
occurs that quantity of times in the allocated time period.
Hardware Templates: The Security Management System shall include the ability to define
hardware templates (door templates) in order to simplify the process of creating an access
control system. Hardware templates shall allow a user to define a “typical” door
configuration and then use that template over and over in the process of defining doors.
Access Control Functional Requirements: Functions shall include validation based on time
of day, day of week, holiday scheduling, site code verification, automatic or manual retrieval
of cardholder photographs, and access validation based on positive verification of card/PIN,
card, and video. The following features shall be programmable and shall be capable of
being modified by a user with the proper authorization:
Time Zones: Shall define the period during which a reader, card, alarm point, door, or other
system feature is active or inactive. In addition to Monday-Sunday, there shall be at least
one day of the week called Holiday.
PART-B 82
Holidays: The application shall allow holidays to be entered into the Security Management
System. Holidays shall have a start date plus duration defining multiple days. Holidays shall
have a holiday type of 1, 2, or 3, which may be defined by the user.
Response Codes: The Security Management System shall allow the user to enter a
predefined code to represent a response to an alarm occurring in the facility.
Clearance Codes: The Security Management System shall allow the user to establish
groups of readers at a facility for the purpose of granting or denying access to
badgeholders. Clearance codes shall be assigned to companies and individuals employed
by the company, and may be modified for individual users in the badgeholder maintenance
application.
Companies: Each badgeholder entered into the Security Management System shall be
assigned a company code identifying the individual’s employer. The company information
dialog box displays and maintains information related to companies having access to the
facility.
Group Access: The Security Management System shall allow a user or group of users via
company selection, a temporary denial of access to specific readers or areas based on a
preconfigured event. The group access function shall limit access to a group of cardholders,
overriding all other access criteria.
Events: The event editors shall control processing done at the host computer that allows
the user to associate nearly any input (trigger) with almost any sequence of outputs
(actions) that the Security Management System is capable of executing.
Alarm Pages: Security Management System shall include the capability to create an
unlimited number of customized alarm pages for the alarm monitor and each shall be
assignable to users and user classes.
Event Types: Definitions shall be shipped with system software but shall be capable, upon
installation, of being modified, added to, or deleted from the Security Management System.
Dynamic Graphical Maps: The Security Management System shall provide the user with
the means to add maps and indicator icons to maps that shall represent input/output points,
logical devices, or cameras located throughout the Security Management System. Security
Management System maps shall display the state and condition of alarm points. The
Security Management System shall also provide the ability to monitor the channels or
panels.
Brass Keys: Shall maintain information related to assets that are issued in the facility,
including brass keys, laptops, RSA keys, cell phones, company cards, etc.
Blocking Cardholders and Blacklist- The ACS shall allow the blocking of cardholder, for
example by validity period. An operator must also be able to add badges to a black list, for
example when stolen or lost. IF a black-listed card is used at a reader, an alarm has to be
triggered to displaying on the monitoring workstation all defined and corresponding alarm
documents.
The System must support upload of the eDoc s and certificates for a card holders. These
Certificates can be mandatory check to enter a certain area. The ACS must support
PART-B 83
blocking the Card holder access to a critical area based on his certificate expiration,
certificate should be scanned and saved under individual card holder. There should not
any restriction on no of certificates and no of card holder to support this function.
ID Badging Client: The Security Management System Shall maintain information related to
a badgeholder’s card access privileges. Upon entering this application, a window shall
appear on the screen and all actions (add, modify, or delete) involving badges and cards
shall be initiated from this window. Access privileges shall be linked to the cards used to
gain access to doors in the facility. Modifications shall be made by adding or deleting
clearance codes, or by door types assigned to the cards or to a badgeholder.
ID Badging System: The Security Management System shall include seamlessly integrated
ID badging system.
Users: Information related to the users of the Security Management System software shall
be stored in the database. Users entered into the Security Management System shall be
assigned the access privileges of the class to which they are assigned.
Elevator Control: The elevator control shall be of the Security Management System
intelligent controller-based line of devices. The elevator control shall include the following
functional features:
Elevator call: Valid card read calls elevator to the floor. No reader in the elevator car.
Floor control: Valid card read in the elevator car enables selectable floor buttons.
Floor select: Valid card read in the elevator car enables selectable floor buttons and logs
which floor is selected after the card is presented.
Data Transfer Unit (DTU): The DTU enables data to be imported from an external system
directly into the Security Management System database and also exported from Pro-Watch
to an external system.
Insert only: If a “data file key column #” shall be provided, the DTU will only insert a new
badge record if the key column value is not found. An error shall be displayed in the log file
if an existing badge record is found. If no “data file key column #” is provided, every record
will be inserted into the Security Management System.
Updates only: The DTU shall use the “data file key column #” to look for the matching
Security Management System record. An error shall be logged in the log file if the
badgeholder is not found in the Security Management System database.
Inserts, updates: The DTU shall use the “data file key column #” to look for the matching
Security Management System record. If a matching record is not found, the DTU shall insert
the data. If a matching record is found, the record shall be updated.
Generic Channel Interface: The Security Management System shall provide the ability to
define generic communications channels over serial port or TCP/IP network socket including
IP address and port/socket, to support custom integration of external foreign devices. The
Security Management System shall generate events based on data received from the
channel matching operator pre-defined instructions.
PART-B 84
Event Manager: The Security Management System shall utilize an event manager as a
component of system administration and offer the ability to have users control the amount
of data stored as well as a quick snapshot of the logged data in the system. Using the
various logs in event manager, the user will be able to gather information about events,
auditing, and operator actions. The logs are defined as follows: Event log, audit log,
unacknowledged alarms.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS
Distributed architecture shall allow controllers to operate independently of the host. The
architecture shall place key access decisions, event/action processing and alarm
monitoring functions within the controllers, eliminating degraded mode operation.
Flash memory management shall support firmware updates and revisions to be downloaded
to the system. Upgrades to the hardware and software shall occur seamlessly without the
loss of database, configurations, or historical report data.
FIELD HARDWARE
The security management system shall be equipped with access control field hardware
required to receive alarms and administer all access granted/denied decisions. All field
hardware shall meet UL requirements.
Intelligent Controller Board
Single Reader Module (SRM)
Dual Reader Module (DRM)
Alarm Input Module (AIM)
Relay Output Module (ROM)
Card Readers – Prox 125KHz, 13.56 MHz Mifare/DesFire, iClass, Biometric, RFID
SYSTEM INTERFACES
Digital Video Recording Systems
The Security Management System shall provide fully integrated support for a powerful
digital video recording and transmission system. The Security Management System shall
record, search and transmit video, and shall provide users with live, pre- and post- event
assessment capabilities. The DVRs shall be seamlessly integrated with existing video
equipment and incorporated into any TCP/IP network. The DVRs shall provide multiple
levels of integration with the Security Management System software, providing control of
the digital video system from the access control application.
Video Management Systems (VMS):
With integration to VMS, Security Management System shall control multiple sources of
video subsystems in a facility to collect, manage and present video in a clear and concise
manner. VMS intelligently determines the capabilities of each subsystem across various
PART-B 85
sites, allowing video management of any analog or digital video device through a unified
configuration and viewer. Disparate video systems are normalized and funneled through
a common video experience. Drag and drop cameras from the Security Management
System hardware tree into VMS views. Leverage Security Management System alarm
integration and advanced features such as pursuit that help the operator track a target
through a set of sequential cameras with a single click to select a new central camera and
surrounding camera views.
Intercom Interface:
The interface shall provide control of both remote and master intercom stations from within
the Security Management System application. The Security Management System shall
allow the user to define the site, channel, description, and address as well as provide a
checkbox for primary station.
Administrators shall have the capability to program a list of intercom functions that report to
the alarm-monitoring module as events. These functions shall coincide with the intercom
functions provided with the intercom system. For each intercom function, Security
Management System administrators shall be able to define an alphanumeric event
description 1 to 40 characters in length and shall also be able to set the parameter value
of that function.
The intercom interface shall allow for secondary annunciation of intercom calls, events, and
alarms in the alarm-monitoring window. Intercom reporting to the alarm monitoring window
shall report as any other access control alarm and shall have the same annunciation and
display properties as access control alarms.
All intercom calls, events, and alarms that report into the Security Management System
shall be stored in the system database for future audit trail and reporting capabilities.
Intercom events shall include but not be limited to: Station busy, Station free, Intercom call
to busy station, Intercom call to private station, Station disconnected, Function dialed
outside connection, Intelligent station ID, Station reset, Station lamp test, Audio program
changed, Group hunt occurred, Mail message, Digit dialed during connection, Direct
access key pressed, Handset off hook, M-key pressed, C-key pressed
Intrusion Detection Panels:
General Requirements: The Security Management System shall support hardwired and
TCP/IP communication for the intrusion panel. Each panel shall have 8 partitions and 15
zone lists. Zones, partitions, and the top-level panel shall have an events page, with all
supported events present. Features:
Disarm and unlock a door on card swipe.
Arm and lock a door on card swipe.
Common area arm/disarm.
Access denied if intrusion system is in alarm or armed.
Monitor and log intrusion system events and alarms in the Security Management System.
PART-B 86
Associate intrusion system events and alarms to video surveillance integrations.

Security Management System users are able to control and monitor Group and zone status
using the Security Management System client, and control the individual zones and groups
using Security Management System Access control credentials. Depending on the
combined user profiles and access permissions defined in Security Management System,
a Security Management System cardholder is allowed or denied permission to arm/disarm
zones and groups. The access control functionality of the intrusion panel is disabled when
the integration is operational. Features:
Disarm a zone on a card swipe.
Arm a zone on consecutive card swipes. Security Management System will support
definition of quantity of swipes required and the timeout time in seconds to recognize
consecutive swipes.
Security Management System supports linking of intrusion panel users with Security
Management System cardholders.
Security Management System operators may be given control permissions for intrusion
input and output alarms.
Security Management System can associate alarm events with video commands to look at
current or historic footage.
Security Management System stores and reports on intrusion events.
Software Development Kit (SDK)
Security Management System shall permit custom integration with other third party systems
through an SDK. SDK shall support the OBIX communication protocol and interface directly
with the Niagara Framework for support of additional communications protocols.
Web Client
Web Alarms
Web Events
Web Badging
Web Reports
Supported Web Browsers
(Windows) Internet Explorer 9
(Windows) Google Chrome Version 30
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
PART-B 87
Examine site conditions to determine site conditions are acceptable without qualifications.
Notify Owner in writing if deficiencies are found. Starting work is evidence that site
conditions are acceptable.
INSTALLATION
Security Management System, including but not limited to access control, alarm monitoring,
CCTV and ID badging system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
Supervise installation to appraise ongoing progress of other trades and contracts, make
allowances for all ongoing work, and coordinate the requirements of the installation of the
Security Management System.
FIELD TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
Testing: The access control, alarm monitoring, CCTV, and ID badging system shall be
tested in accordance with the following:
Conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed access control and security
monitoring equipment. This includes testing and verifying connection to equipment of other
divisions such as life safety and elevators.
Provide staff to test all devices and all operational features of the Security Management
System for witness by the Owner’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction as
applicable.
Correct deficiencies until satisfactory results are obtained.
Submit written copies of test results.
Intelligent Modular Control (IMC)
The Intelligent Modular Control (IMC) System is advanced access control hardware architecture
capable of providing solutions for Mid to large enterprise applications. The Intelligent Modular
Controller (IMC) Provides power and flexibility with its 32-bit architecture, TCP/IP support, flash
memory, large local cardholder database, and large reader and I/O module support. The
Intelligent Controller is designed to operate off-line, making access control decisions
independently from a PC or other controlling device. It can also be connected to a host computer
for system configuration, alarm monitoring and direct control. Connectivity to the host computer
is accomplished via direct serial communication (RS232 or RS485), dial-up modem, or TCP/IP
network connection. The IMC Master Controller has Ethernet directly embedded and will support
a second Ethernet connection. The IMC Master Intelligent Controllers support any combination of
up to 32 I/O or reader boards to monitor alarm input points, relay output points and access control
reader interfaces. By offering a modular design, the system can be tailored to meet a wide range
of applications, while optimizing cost and mounting space. The IMC will support up to 300,000
cards and 50,000 transactions. The IMC -Series access modules have been designed to
accommodate various mounting options. Units can be wall mounted in a high density
configuration when space is limited, a 19" rack configuration or in a tile mount configuration The
PART-B 88
IMC Master Controller utilizes a built-in Web server to configure the hardware attributes of the
controller.
Key Features of IMC Master Controller
• True 32-bit microprocessor provides fast transaction processing for the most demanding network
applications • Modular hardware architecture provides flexibility and expansion capabilities
• Flash memory allows new versions of firmware to be downloaded from the host computer to
the controller(s) through the central network
• Large, local controller database allows access control decisions to be made by controller in real
time without the need to communicate to the server
• Scalable architecture ensures optimal performance with a seamless upgrade path to

accommodate future growth beyond its initial installation
• Seamless support for TCP/IP protocols to allow intelligent controllers to tap into a LAN or WAN
connectivity • Supports multiple reader and card formats for maximum flexibility and security
options
• Multiple communication methods provide redundant paths for more robust system connectivity
• Supervised communication and Lithium battery backup ensures system reliability
• System offline modes customizable per reader include facility code access, locked (no access),
and unlocked (full access)
• Redundant communication port feature allowing secondary port communication if primary fails.
• Up to 12 intervals per time zone where each interval is a start time, stop time and day map. The
day map indicates the day of the week or holiday
• 255 possible holidays are defined by a starting date and duration • Automatic calculation of leap
year and Daylight Saving Time
• 19-digit (64-bit) user ID
• Support for FIPS long card numbers
• Activation and deactivation dates by card
• Up to 12 access levels per card or individual time zones per readers
• Up to 8-digit Personal Identification Numbers (PIN
• Operating modes include locked, unlocked, facility code, card only, card and PIN, card or PIN,
and PIN only
• Strike modes include fail-safe and fail-secure
PART-B 89
• Up to eight card formats per reader
• Entire card bit-stream reported with invalid facility code or invalid card format
• Anti-passback support – free pass and exempt flags, last area accessed, last reader accessed
and time/date of last access
• Configurable as standard, entry delay latching, entry delay non-latching and exit delay
• Configurable as standard (energize to activate) or fail-safe (de-energize to activate)
• Pulse control: single pulse (up to 24 hours) or repeating pulses (on/off in 0.1 second increments,
up to 255 times)
• Any combination of 32 I/O or reader modules may be connected to the IMC Master Controller
through RS485 ports. 4,000 feet / 1,250 meters total bus length per port
• UL294, UL1076 Listed
• AES FIPS 197 Encryption
• IMC Controller has Web server for hardware configuration
Major Key Features:-
• Cardholders: - 300,000 on IMC

• Transaction storage: - 50,000 on IMC
• Flash programming for firmware revision updates
• Access codes: virtually unlimited
• Holidays: virtually unlimited
• Time codes: 255
• Card reader formats: 8 per reader
• Credential facility codes: 8
• Elevator support: 128 floors
• Dedicated tamper alarm
• Dedicated power fail alarm
• Real time clock: - Geographic time zone support - Daylight Saving Time - Leap year support - 4
bit parallel accurate to 50 ppm Communication Modules:
• Primary communication support: - RS232 - RS485 - Dial up modem - Ethernet (TCP/IP)
• Communication speed: 38.4 KBps
• Redundant communication support, automatic dial back: (IMC) - Dial back on alarm condition -
Dial back on transaction buffer capacity reached - Dial back on primary power loss
• 2 RS485 ports supporting 32 total devices
• POE - Supporting 16 Single Reader Modules via Ethernet (through Another IMC Controller
Module)
• 2 RS485 ports supporting 16 total devices (POE based IMC controller)
 Offline modes (selectable per reader): - Facility code access - Locked (no access) -
Unlocked (free access)
PART-B 90
 Anti-passback support: - While preventing access (hard) - While allowing access (soft)
 Transaction prioritization: 999 levels
Two reader Interface Board (TRIB) communicating with Intelligent Modular Controller
The TRIB Module provides support for up to two access control doors by providing connections
for Wiegand or Clock/Data type readers, supervised inputs, and relay outputs.
TRIB can mount onthe board in a rack or open and flat. On rack-mount the board, only one edge
is accessible for wiring; however, a flat mount increases the amount of available I/O slightly but
significantly decreases the number of boards that can be mounted in one enclosure.
The I/O terminals are organized to support two doors. Starting at the bottom of the rack-mount
side of the board, the first connector provides power to the board.
Smart Card 13.56 MHz based Biometric Reader
Biometric Fingerprint
Sensor Type Optical Sensor (OP5)
Template ISO 19794-2/ANSI 378
Extract/Matcher MINEX certificate and compliant
LFD Supported
RF Option 13.56 MHz MIFARE/DES Fire(EV1)/iCLASS(SE)
CPU 1.2Ghz Quad Core
Memory 2GB Flash + 256 MB RAM
Max. Template 1,000,000(1:1), 200,000(1:N)
Max Logs. 1,000,000 (text)
LED Multi-Color
Sound Multi -Tone Buzzer
Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto MDI/MDI-X
RS-485 1ch host or slave (selectable)
Wiegand 1ch input or output (selectable)
TTL 2ch input
Relay 1 Relay
PoE IEEE802.3af
Ingress Protection IP67
Impact Protection IK08
Tamper Supported
Power Voltage: DC 12 V Current: Max. 600 mA
Operating Temperature -20° C ~ 50° C
Operating Humidity 0% ~ 80% Non-Condensing
Dimensions (WXHXD, mm) 50 x 172 x 43.5
Unit Weight 251g
Certificates CE
Contactless Smart Card Reader.
PART-B 91
1.1.1 Access control card reader shall be from a global company who is a recognized leader in
the access control devices. Card reader manufactured for non-access control applications shall
not be acceptable.
1.1.2 The card reader shall securely read access control data from 13.56 MHz contactless
smart cards.
1.1.3 The card reader shall be optimally designed for use in access control applications by
providing:
a. Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the reader utilizing key
diversification and mutual authentication routines.
b. Universal compatibility with most access control systems.
c. Ease of installation through identical wiring methods as legacy 125 KHz proximity readers.
d. The ability to read expanded data format lengths up to 144 bits.
e. Backwards compatibility with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control formats (E.g. 26-bit,
32-bit, 35-bit, 37-bit, and HID Corporate 1000 formats).
f. Optimal read range and read speed for increased access control throughput.
1.1.4 The card reader provided shall be of ruggedized design, sealed in weatherized UL94
polycarbonate enclosure to withstand harsh environments for both indoor / outdoor used and
provide a high degree of vandal resistance.
1.1.5 The card reader shall comply with the following 13.56MHz-related standards to ensure
product compatibility and predictability of performance:
a. ISO 15693
b. ISO 14443A
c. ISO 14443B.
1.1.6 The card reader shall be configurable to read data simultaneously from one to, at
minimum, two of the following cards:
a. HID iCLASS Access Control Sector/Application data
b. ISO 15693 card serial number (CSN)
c. ISO 14443A card serial number (CSN): including MIFARE & DESFire
d. ISO 14443B card serial number (CSN)
1.1.7 The card reader shall provide the ability to read card access data stored in the secure
access control sector / application area of the ISO 15693 HID iCLASS card.
PART-B 92
1.1.8 The card reader shall be configurable to provide multiple hierarchical degrees of key
compatibility for accessing the smart card access control data. Compatibility shall be provided
for the following key structure options:
a. Compatibility with the default iCLASS key structure to ensure convenient off the shelf
compatibility with iCLASS cards and readers.
b. Compatibility with higher security HID managed ELITE keys which provide a site-specific,
unique, protected key structure.
c. Compatibility with high security user-managed custom keys.
1.1.9 The card reader shall be compatible with HID’s iCLASS mutual authentication algorithm
using 64-bit authentication keys. All RF data transmission between the card and reader shall
encrypted using a secure algorithm to ensure that the communication between the card and
reader can never be copied and repeated back to the reader (sniffing and replay).
1.1.10 The card reader shall be fully compliant with Restriction of Hazardous Substances
directive (RoHS) restricting the use of specific hazardous materials found in electrical and
electronic products. The substances banned under RoHS are lead (Pb), mercury (Hg),
cadmium (Cd), hexavalent chromium (CrVI), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and
polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE).
1.1.11 The card reader shall provide universal compatibility with most access control systems
by outputting card data in compliance with the SIA AC-01 Wiegand standard.
1.1.12 The card reader shall be available to provide Clock and Data output.
1.1.13 The card reader shall allow for secure installation practices through mounting methods
utilizing tamper resistant screws.
1.1.14 The card reader shall provide the ability to transmit an alarm signal via and integrated
optical tamper switch if an attempt is made to remove the reader from the wall.
1.1.15 The card reader shall provide customizable reader behavior options either from the
factory, or defined in the field through the use of pre-configured command cards. Reader
behavior programming options shall include:
a. LED & Audio configurations
b. Disablement of reading specific card technologies (typically used after migration is

complete to new technology).
c. ISO 14443A CSN (E.g. MIFARE/DESFire) output configuration.
d. Wiegand output spacing and timing.
1.1.16 The card reader shall have the ability to provide consistent optimal read range by
implementing an auto-tune function that adjusts for manufacturing tolerances to enhance
consistency of performance from reader to reader. Contactless smart card reader shall provide
the following typical contactless read ranges:
PART-B 93
a. Up to 4.75” (12.1 cm) using ISO 15693 HID iCLASS card.
b. Up to 2.0” (5.1 cm) using ISO 15693 HID iCLASS Key or Tag
c. Up to 2.5” (6.4 cm) using MIFARE/DESFire card (CSN)
1.1.17 The card reader shall be designed for low current operation to enable migration from
most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace existing access control panels
and/or power supplies. Contactless smart card power requirements shall be:
a. Operating voltage: 5 – 16 VDC, reverse voltage protected. Linear power supply

recommended.
b. Current requirements: 55 mA AVG, 121 mA PEAK @ 12 VDC
1.1.18 Contactless smart card reader shall meet the following environmental specifications:
a. Operating temperature: -31 to 150 degrees F (-35 to 65 degrees C)

b. Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
c. Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments
d. Certified rating of IP55
Specifications for Contactless RFID Smart Card Reader For Boom Barrier
1.1.19 Surface mounting style 13.56 MHz contactless smart card readers suitable for minimal
space mounting configurations
1.1.20 Contactless smart card readers shall comply with ISO 15693 and shall read credentials
that comply with these standards.
1.1.21 Shall use 64-bit authentication keys to reduce the risk of compromised data or duplicate
cards. The contactless smart card reader and cards shall require matching keys in order to
function together. All RF data transmission between the card and the reader shall be
encrypted, using a secure algorithm.
1.1.22 On reader power-up, an internal self-test routine checks and verifies the setup
configuration, determines the internal or external control of the LED and beeper, and initializes
the reader’s operation.
1.1.23 The reader’s Wiegand output easily interfaces with most existing Wiegand protocol
access control panels. The reader reads standard proximity format data from Smart cards and
will output data as encoded.
1.1.24 The reader Shall be compatible with all credentials meeting the following ISO standard:
a. • 15693 - read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte), and 32k bit (4k Byte) smart card
credentials
b. • 15693 - read only card serial number (CSN)
1.1.25 The contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability to change operational
features in the field through the use of a factory-programmed command card. Additionally,
PART-B 94
firmware may be updated by flashing the reader. Command card operational programming
options shall include:
a. Contactless smart card readers shall provide the following programmable audio/visual
indication:
b. An audio transducer shall provide various tone sequences to signify: access granted,
access denied, power up, and diagnostics.
c. A high-intensity light bar shall provide clear visual status (red/green/amber) that is visible
even in bright sunlight.
1.1.26 Typical contactless smart card read range shall be 16” - 17” (40.6 - 43.2cm)
1.1.27 Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following physical specifications:
a. Dimensions: 12” (30.48 cm) x 12” x 1.25” (3.175 cm)
b. Weight: 60 oz. (1.86 kgm)
c. Material: UL94 Polycarbonate
1.1.28 Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following electrical specifications:
a. Operating voltage: 12 – 24 VDC, reverse voltage protected. Linear power supply
recommended.
b. Current requirements: (average/peak) 61/178mA @ 12 VDC
1.1.29 Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following certifications:
a. UL 294
b. CE Mark (Europe)
c. IP55 Rated
1.1.30 Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following environmental specifications:
a. Operating temperature: -22 to 150 degrees F (-30 to 65 degrees C)

b. Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
1.1.31 Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments

1.1.32 ISO interoperability standards providing compatibility with many popular card
technologies (ISO 15693, ISO 14443A and ISO14443B).
Warranty of contactless smart card readers shall be lifetime against defects in materials and
workmanship.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOOM BARRIER
PART-B 95
A vehicle access barrier shall mean a rising boom barrier that shall open in case of an
impulse with the use of a valid card. The barrier shall close either after the vehicle has
passed or after an adjustable hold-open time in case the vehicle chooses not to pass
through. Appropriate sensors shall be used for this purpose. It shall meet the following
specifications.
S.No. Item Descriptio

n
1 Application Outdoor
2 IP Rating 54
Barrier Housing Unit: Powder Coated
3 Housing Boom: Powder Coated White RAL9010 with Red
reflectivestrips.
4 Housing Dimension Modular
Housing Material Of All Aluminium Housing with Base frame in SS-
5
Construction 304 for
High
All protection
Housing andagain stcorrosion.
internal parts will be rust &
6 Protection corrosionfreemetalsoralloysofhighstrengthwithsui
tableEpoxycoatingasapplicable.
7 Housing Dimension(WXDXH) 315mmX360mmX915mmapproximately
The Booms shall be extruded aluminium with
Octagonal profile(straight/articulated)100mm.X
55mm.X1.6mm.shall be the structure of the
8 Boom Specifications profile/Alternatively the boom may also be offered
as extruded aluminum
withroundprofileofdia74mmX1.4mm.
The barrier shall usea Block able DC High
Torque
DriveincombinationwithCANbuscommunicationst
9 Intelligence
andardinterfacedController.ItshallofferLCDDispla
y&GraphicUserInterfaceforeasycontrolsetting.Po
ssibilityforintegrationviastandarduserinterfaces.
10 DigitalInputs Minimum8
11 DigitalOutputs Minimum4
12 RelayOutputs Atleast6
 Compliance to CE.
Adherence to Safety Requirements
of the
13 Compliance&Safety  EMCDirective2004/108/EC,
 LowVoltageDirective2006/95/EC and
 The basic requirements of the Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC
14 PowerSupply 230+/-10%VAC,50Hz.
15 MaximumPowerConsumption NotMorethan100watts
PART-B 96
1.3secondsforBoomLengthupto3.5Meters
16 Opening&ClosingTime 4secondsforBoomLengthBetween3.5to6Meters
17 OperatingTemperature -30Degree Celsius to+50Degree Celsius

S/W for Detection of Presence of Vehicle in
Loopor
18 Safety
In the path of Infrared Safety Sensors available.
Loops or Sensors to be used to prevent barriers
19 Duty Cycle from
100%closing on the vehicle.
20 Weight (without boom) 40Kg
Shall function in integration with Smart cards,

21 Integration proximity reader based access control systems
etc
MCBF- 10 Mil Cycles

22 Performance Requirement MTBF- 50,000 Hours
MTTR- 30 Minutes
TUV certificate For Opening & Closing time

23 Certificates Required ISO Certificate of the Company
Certification for Ingress Protection
24 Warranty 1 Years
PART-B 97
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:

System description
General
Building automation and control system requirements
System requirements
General requirement: - Include a digital (DDC) building technology control system to operate
technical equipment in buildings. The system must be able to carry out comprehensive
measuring, control, optimization, and monitoring functions. All applications deployed are
tested, documented, and used multiple times. The possibility for free programming of
individual system components should be available to individually modify customer-specific
requests.The software shall be capable of doing Online engineering i.e. Zero Downtime of
software during any modification of Graphics.
System up-to-datedness
Product lifecycle: - The system provider must offer a transparent product lifecycle to ensure
the required consistency. All equipment offered for this project must be contained in the
current product portfolio. The existing system environment must allow for easy and smooth
integration of devices and extensions.
System continuity: - Products employed must be labeled with a brand for a global standard
that secures the interaction of products from various manufacturers. Products bearing these
brands can also be employed together when manufactured at an interval of more than 10
years.
Architecture
Three system levels:- A building automation and control system featuring system
architecture as per ISO EN 16484-3 is required. The three system levels must be
interconnected via communications.
Management level
Automation level (automation stations/individual room control)
Field level (field devices)
PART-B 98
PART-B 99
Automation stations: - The system offered must provide largely decentralized intelligence to
achieve high operational and plant availability. The devices are autonomous components
that can independently execute assigned automation and control.
Implement third-party systems: - Third-party systems must be able to be integrated on both
management and automation levels to ensure full system consistency. Default interfaces
must be provided. Third-party protocol implementation must be possible and require little
effort. To do this, all hardware and software required for integration, all required services,
clarifications with other technical and mechanical building installations, interface testing,
data transmission testing, data point generation/integration as well as plant picture creation,
backup, test protocol generation and specific documentation must be included in total costs.
Location-independent operation: - The building automation and control system technology
must allow for location-independent operation and management of all messages and trends
on all available types and views for the entire building automation and control system.
Consistency
Uniform system:- The supplier must prove that the required functions originate from a single
manufacturer and using one automation and control system, where the hardware and
software are developed in a manner that allow for simply modification while operational for
subsequent function extensions or changes.
Implement new data points: -Building automation and control must be coherent to ensure
possibility of future extensions and changes. This means that data points must be acquired
once only, and then be provided automatically as needed to operator units and management
level.
Integration of open standards
General
Interfaces: -The building automation and control system must be extendible to ensure long-
term operation and provide all standard interfaces commonly available on today's market.
Implement via BACnet: -Default protocols and suitable physical communications media
must guarantee interoperability (ISO standard). Use only listed protocols and
communications media. Third-party systems are integrated via BACnet. Provide only data
required to efficiently and economically operate building services plants.
Integrate fire detection systems: - Fire detection system BACnet-based.
BACnet-based fire detection systems supporting BACnet BIBB AE-LS-B as well as
objects LifeSafetyPoint and LifeSafetyZone as per the PICS (Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement) document must be able to be integrated for best deployment of
a building automation and control system. The following functions must be supported:
Alarms and events from the fire detection system must be identified clearly and unambiguously.
Signaling device states must be displayed as per the BACnet standard.
Instruction texts must be able to be added to detectors and zones.
Situational and floor plans as well as dynamic symbols must be able to be used for visualization.
A technical hierarchy, e.g. building, building part, zone, detector, must be provided to the operator
for ease of operation.
Integrate Modbus devices: - Decentralized integration of third-party devices via Modbus.

Modbus-capable devices must be able to be connected to a BACnet-capable automation
PART-B 100
station via decentralized interface module for bidirectional data exchange. The
automation station provides the following functions:
Event-oriented communication
Peer-to-Peer (cross communication)
Alarm and message processing, distribution to local operator units and building automation and
control system.
Scheduler program with weekdays
Calendar function
Local trend recording in device buffer (long-term trend).
Integrate via OPC: -Integrate third-party devices via OPC
OPC servers must be able to be connected to a BACnet network for bidirectional data
exchange.
The integration required must form a high-performance link between OPC and BACnet
via presentation as OPC client in OPC and BACnet server in BACnet. The function
extends far beyond simple mapping and transfer of OPC items to BACnet. The following
functions must be ensured to achieve the required openness.
Direct mapping of OPC items to BACnet objects, for display and operation by BACnet clients.
Grouping of OPC items to create standard integrated BACnet objects.
Event-driven transfer of alarms in the BACnet network
Trend server with its own data maintenance for trendlog objects.
Cross communications (peer-to-peer) with other BACnet servers
Integrate third-party devices via OPC: -The system must be OPC Foundation tested and
certified and must be able to integrate and process, but also to provide real-time data as
OPC data points. The System processing must include Alarming, Trending, Scheduling, and
Reporting and allow cross communication with other integrated devices.
The System must be support the OPC specification:
OPC Data Access
Power failure
Data backup:- The data must be saved for extended periods of time in case of power failure or
extensions or removal of automation stations. The applications and all vital operating parameters
(including setpoints, scheduler values, etc.) must not be lost due to a power outage. Other operating
values such as alarms, trend data, etc. must be capable of being saved locally on the automation
station.
System time
Time format:- Time synchronization in BACnet: UTC time (coordinated universal time). The
building automation and control system must have a uniform system time. To this end, a time
master supporting BACnet BIBB DM-UTC-A as per the PICS document must be defined. The
time master must receive the DCF77, GPS or Internet NTP signal and provide it synchronized to
all remaining system devices.
Subsystem autonomy: -The automation stations must autonomously run their own time if
the time master fails. The building automation and control time must be resynchronized
automatically after the time master becomes available again.
Self monitoring and self diagnosis
Watchdog: - The building automation and control system must monitor itself to always know
PART-B 101
its latest and current status. A watchdog function helps detect and signal failed system
devices and restarts them in a defined mode.
Self diagnosis: -Self diagnosis must be available to quickly detect errors. It must provide
information on system function and load. E.g. CPU and memory load must be displayed.
General plant operating states
Overview of operating modes
There are five higher operating modes for all plants:
Local emergency operation without automation station functionality (direct via I/O module or
directly on the control panel as agreed to with owner).
Local manual operation with automation station functionality (control panel in the control panel).
Local - manual operation via visualization on the management level (all functions on the local
automation station are set to Auto).
Scheduler program under the condition that all plants are enabled for automatic operation.
Automatic detection.
All control functions of the automation stations must be set to and remain on automatic
for highest plant availability, if a plant or aggregate is switched to MANUAL. In individual
cases, automatic mode must change over to this unit in case of redundancies when a
plant or aggregate is switched off locally.All safety and interlocking functions must take
highest priority for operation independent of operating mode.
Automatic detection: -The plants of the building automation and control system are switched
on and off either automatic or dependent on time or event. The following functions apply to
the actual plant descriptions. All control loops, safety and interlocking functions must be
guaranteed to work regardless of operating mode.
Controlled via scheduler program:- All plants must be set to automatic for this operating
mode. The plants of the building automation and control system must be switched on and
off by individual use via a day, week, month, or annual scheduler program.
Manual operation: - Different options are required for manual operation.
Manual operation via management level (remote operation)
Manual operation via local operator unit or laptop directly at the control panel.
Manual operation via operator unit or directly at the control panel.
Manual operation generally is possible only if the corresponding automation station is

running. Manual operation allows for manually overriding scheduled plant switchings.
Plants switched off by schedule can be switched on via plant switching command. Manual
control of the plant switching command is equal to automatic control, i.e. the scheduled
control is retained for as long as the scheduler remains active. Search & Replace function
must allow for Mass Changes in parameters can be done across the entire installed
system (eg. Operating hours change, set point etc)
PART-B 102
Energy efficiency & references to applicable standards.

General: - The building is constructed under strict energy guidelines. The control technology
deployed must contain all functions required to efficiently consume energy.
Energy efficiency class "C" as per EN 15232:- Standard EN15232 serves as the basis for
energy efficiency functions. The system supplier must prove that the functions are as
described by the standard. This tender was established based on Class C criteria.
Requirements from EN 50001 placed on building automation and control system.The
processes defined in standard ISO 50001 to improve energy efficiency must be supported
by the data from the building automation and control system. In other words, all required
data and information, measurement and analysis functions as well as outputs and display
must be provided in accordance with this standard.
Energy efficiency monitoring and Evaluation.
Support of eu.bac guidelines, part 4.Energy monitoring and evaluation is required for the
entire building automation and control system. The basis forms the eu.bac guidelines -
EEBACS Certification Scheme, Certifying Energy Efficiency of Building Automation and
Control Systems, at first delivery and during the lifetime, Part 4: Specification of Key
Performance Indicators.
Management level: - Visualize quality state.A violation of the energy efficiency limits values
for monitored measured values on the management level must be displayed using colors or
symbols. Easy to interpret symbols provide the operator with a quick overview on the state
of monitored plants, components, etc. Bar charts or pie charts or similar are still required for
display of the overall state of monitored plants or the entire building. The operator must
recognize how many (in percentages) of the total number of monitored measured values
are in the quality state "good" or "bad", or, however, monitoring and evaluation is disabled.
The quality state indicates whether the monitored measured value is within or outside the
energy-efficient range. Violations of monitored limit values are displayed on the one hand
through the quality state "bad" and, on the other, assessed as an indication that resulted
through a fault operation, manual intervention, error or false or incorrect parameterization,
in non-energy-efficient operation of components, aggregate or plants, ultimately resulting
increased consumption (electricity, water, natural gas, etc.). An individual weighting of the
calculation of resulting quality states must be possible since multiple measured values can
be evaluated within a building or plant. The parameters for weighting, monitoring, evaluating
and forming the quality state can be set based on read and write access rights. As an
alternative: Make possible the simple navigation to an appropriate user program.
Automation level: - Key performance indicators on the automation level.Monitoring and
evaluation of measured values for primary plants (components and plant parts,
software/program/system functions, setpoints, et.) must occur directly on the automation
level. Monitoring and evaluation is intended to recognize unfavorable operations of
plants/components early on and thus lower or optimize energy consumption and wear and
tear.
Monitoring and evaluating analog measured values.The following monitoring and evaluation
must be able to be implemented for analog measured values (sensors, setpoint, modulating
control of valves, dampers, variable speed drives, etc.):
• Determine the minimum value (lowest value) within a defined timeframe.
• Determine the maximum value (lowest value) within a defined timeframe.
• Determine the average value (lowest value) within a defined timeframe.
PART-B 103
• Determine the linger period (in hours) during which the measured value moves between
freely definable limit values.
• Determine deviation that the measured value deviated from the upper and lower setpoint
within a defined timeframe.
The determined value is monitored to a minimum and maximum and displayed as quality
state for breach and/or exceeding thereof. The value from the current timeframe is
displayed; the value from the previous timeframe is also displayed and made available to
the trend data. The evaluation ceases for a fault to the measured value (sensor interrupt,
module fault, etc.), until the measured value once again assumes a reliable state. This
fact must also be recognizable in the trend data.
Monitoring and evaluation of digital and multi-stage measured values. Digital measured
values (messages, switching commands, operating modes, etc.) must be definable as key
performance indicators and make possible the following evaluation and monitoring:
• Determine the runtime (operating hours) within a defined timeframe.
• Determine the switch-on frequency within a defined timeframe.
• Determine the runtime (operating hours) for each stage within a defined timeframe.
• Determine the switch-on frequency for each stage within a defined timeframe.
The determined value is monitored to a minimum and maximum and displayed as quality
state for breach and/or exceeding thereof. The value from the current timeframe is
displayed; the value from the previous timeframe is also displayed and made available to
the trend data. The evaluation ceases for a fault to the measured value (sensor interrupt,
module fault, etc.), until the value once again assumes a reliable state. This fact must
also be recognizable in the trend data.
PART-B 104
Monitoring and evaluating metered values: - Metered values (consumption meters, pulse
meters, etc) must be definable as key performance indicators and make possible the
following evaluation and monitoring. Determine the difference value (consumption value
within a defined timeframe.The determined value is monitored to a minimum and maximum
and displayed as quality state for breach and/or exceeding thereof. The value from the
current timeframe is displayed; the value from the previous timeframe is also displayed and
made available to the trend data. The evaluation ceases for a fault to the measured value
(sensor interrupt, module fault, etc.), until the value once again assumes a reliable state.
This fact must also be recognizable in the trend data.
Evaluation over different timeframes:- Monitoring and evaluation must be able to occur over
definable timeframes (annually, monthly, weekly, daily, hourly, 15-minutes).
Weighting of monitoring and evaluation criteria:- Since an aggregate or component may
include multiple evaluations, it is required to be able to weigh them so that they are included
differently in the calculation of the resulting quality state.
Engineering tools and engineering efficiency
Engineering efficiency
System and tool platform:- Creating solutions must be as efficient as possible, i.e.
programming on construction sites; use of pre-defined application blocks, fast exchange of
standard functions, etc. The goal is to achieve the maximum required level of flexibility at
as little expense as possible.
Preloaded application on devices.
Applications portfolio. Prefabricated and tested must be loaded in a fix manner on the
devices prior to commissioning. They can be used in the basic functions without the use of
additional engineering tools.
Harmonized tools and workflows.
Consistent tools:- Uniform data and functions must be used by the building automation and
control system in a consistent manner throughout all tools to achieve a high level of data
consistency. In other words, all data is only entered once in the system. Consistent tool
processes avoid a manual exchange of data (Import/Export).
Transparency for customers.
Data backup:- A data backup concept must be presented that provides the current state of
a project in a form that is useable and complete to the customer. In includes raw data from
plants, applications, engineering data (e.g. DP, labeling, links, parameters), documentation.
Customer changes
The technical operator at the customer be able independently make simple changes to the
project. Potential training proposals must be appended to the bid.
Corporate performance.
Performance for implementation.
Performance on communication network.
Establish communications network: - The required communications network is part of the
building automation and control system's scope of delivery. All control, monitoring, and
communications tasks must run on this network. The communications network comprises
PART-B 105
all three system levels.

Management level
Automation level.
Field level.
The approved network concept must be documented in full and handed over operational.
Supplier support: - The supplier must have all expertise and capacity required to support
and advise the expert planner on hardware and network structure definition in dependence
of the selected operating concept.
Engineering offerings
Offerings on programming: - The contractor provides all services to successfully operate the
specified plants and systems. This includes:
General review and detailed requirements listing by the expert planner.
Detailed listing of the functions and specifications listed in this document.
Present a detailed communications concept.
Work required to engineer or parameterizes the building automation and control system.
Edit and program all required control, operating, signaling and logging functions including system-
related programming.
Create data point list featuring all entries required by standards.
Review and implement the described measuring concept.
Set switching times, setpoints, and control parameters as per the targets defined and agreed to
with the expert planner.
Review the device application with regard to adherence to targets, especially regarding the
described energy efficiency.
Document the project concerning functions, communications, system topology, and control
panels/panels.
Offerings on commissioning
The contractor provides all services to successfully commission the specified plants and systems.
This includes:
Create configuration and parameterization lists.
Review and ensure working communications across the entire building automation and control
system including all devices on the network.
Check network load and resulting reaction times.
Test the modules and automation stations, all inputs and outputs including associated
documentation (cold commissioning).
Test the safety functions for control and processing algorithms (e.g. with regard to technical and
mechanical installations interaction and simulated operating failure or faults).
Unambiguous labeling of all network components, user address, and/or operating materials.
Comprehensive data point test including review of all connected sensors and actuators.
Check all cabling in the building for adherence to installation guidelines.
Check all bus terminators and voltage supply.
Setting of required configuration parameters.
Commission the connected sensors and/or actuators together with the other mechanical and
electrical installations.
PART-B 106
Review of planned automation functions as per specifications.

Log set and measured values.
Log required function for energy efficiency.
Final documentation: - A final, comprehensive documentation must be provided following building

automation and control system acceptance. To create such documentation, the system must
allow for complete and current data export. As a result, the complete data set must be able to be
exported any time featuring up-to-date data.
Offerings for training: - The contractor provides all services to train maintenance staff. This
includes the following topics.
Structure, properties, and functions of the installed building automation and control system.
Training on all operating options. (Room operation, emergency switch, control switch, operator
units, management level, etc.).
Detailed operation of all management station functions. (Reports, analyses, trends, interpretation
of alarms, alarm handling, data backup, etc.).
Troubleshooting and diagnosis on system and plants.
Adapt simple functions, implementation of updates, etc.
Service offerings: - Service covering all electrical and mechanical installations. This project
contains several, individual electrical and mechanical installations. The supplier must
therefore be able to offer a comprehensive service concept covering all types of building
installations. Possible service offerings must be documented and submitted together with
the bid.
Management level
Management level requirements
General
General: - All information comes together at the management level. The management level
is the graphical, interactive interface for the operator to the automation station and the
integrated plants and plant parts. The operator can display, query, process, save, or print
any plant information via the peripheral units at the management level. System operation
must be simple, i.e. dialog-driven. The plants are displayed in synoptic images and the
values and states are presented and displayed dynamically. Special programs are used for
higher control, optimization functions, maintenance and energy management.
Operating system for building automation and control system: - All data servers, operator
workspaces etc. for the building automation and control system must be compatible with the
current, common 64-bit Windows operating system. As a result, the current Windows
version (at least 6 months after release by Microsoft) must be supported as well as the
previous version as a minimum. Adjustment to the customer network is targeted. The
building automation and control system must thus be able to be installed on any commonly
available PC environment.
Data exchange via various subsystems: - If several subsystems are used, various data must
be exchanged between the automation stations (outside temperature, demand and
coordination signals, etc.).
Automate recurring tasks: - The building automation and control system must take care of
recurring tasks to lower the operator's workload. This includes, for example, cyclical report
PART-B 107
generation triggering, plant release at various conditions, or automatic adjustment of

setpoints or alarm limits.
Designed for use with fire life safety systems (UL certified): - The management station must
have passed performance and environmental tests by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
To combine the comfort and fire life syfe system, the management station must provide all
the relevant functions:
Visualize and treat events
Graphically monitor and control the life safety system
Know where to start as highest priority events are highlighted.
Directly navigate to the triggering element of an event.
Quickly navigate to custom operator instructions and graphical display of event locations.
Store and retrieve fire alarm system activity data.
Distribute fire monitoring and control capabilities across the network of the management stations.
Provide Operating Procedure checklists to guide the operator, under stress conditions, during the
treatment of life safety events.
Send out automatic remote notification of responders through email.
View and schedule automatic history reports.
SCADA platform: The management station must be based on a SCADA plattform, which
must be fully compliant with the BACnet B-AWS profile. It must enable the integration of any
type of building equipment, such as HVAC and lighting.
Help functions: The software shall provide an online, context-sensitive help, including an
index, glossary of terms, and the capability to search help via keyword or phrase.
Single Client License concept: Easy configurable client as the same can be used as Desktop
or Web client in Floating configuration.
Hardware requirements
Minimum hardware requirement (Plants from +/- 2’000 up to +/- 20'000 data points)
A client / server system for large sites is required. The hardware and software
environment must fulfill the thefolowoing definition:
Type: Server 19” Rack
Processor:
1x Xeon E5-2690 or
2x Xeon E5-2690
HDD: 4x Seagate Constellation 2 SAS 2000GB 7.2k Hot Plug SED
Graphic Card:
On-board video graphics or
AMD Radeon 7750 1GB or
Nvidia GeForce GT 610 1GB
RAM: 32GB DDR3-1333 4x 8GB
Recommendet software environment

Windows Server 2008 R2, 64bit Edition
MS SQL 2008 R2 Standard or
MS SQL 2008 R2 Enterprise
Network requirements
Local Network
PART-B 108
1000 Mbps up/down

Latency <lt/>10ms
Range defined
1 server
Max 50 clients (10 Installed + 40 Remote/Web)
Max 4 drivers
Max 64 Cameras
Additional: System must be to extent with a dedicated SQL server if a high data
throughput is required.
Minimum hardware requirements (plants with greater safety requirements)

Hardware requirements as redundant server system
The PC at the management level as a redundant server system must have hardware
satisfying the described requirements.
5 GB of available RAM.
8 GB RAM.
Windows 2008 Server.
Dual Xenon (or equivalent) at 2.8 GHz.
NAS or SAN.
VMware ESX 3.5.
Multi-Monitor Support-(Max 4 Nos):- 4 Simultaneous views of critical systems, Reduction of

client workstation licensing & hardware cost.
User profiles
Plant overview
Individual view: - Individual, specific, or own views must be able to be set up to broaden
plant overview. These views must cover various electrical and mechanical installations or
follow geographic or organizational criteria and must allow personalized hierarchical “tree”
views that represent the workstation, control systems, geographical facility layouts, and
mechanical equipment relationships.
User privileges: - The building automation and control system must allow users to define,
change, or delete predefined reactions as per their user privileges.
Multi language possibility:- The user interface must be able to support minimal three
languages simultaniously in one system.
Related Items:- Information of any data point available in multiple pages, Access to trend,
scheduler, reports, data sheets"
Graphics
General
Operator interface to CAD system: - The operator interface shall allow users to access the
PART-B 109
various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu
selection, point alarm association. Graphics software shall permit the importing of CAD
symbol, or scanned pictures for use in the system.
Operating messages: - Operating messages must be able to be displayed and evaluated at
the management level. Graphics shall be capable of displaying the status of points that have
been overridden by a local priority switch, for points that have been designed to provide a
field local priority override capability.
Full graphics mode: - A fully graphic management level featuring ergonomic images must
be available. The system must be designed for operation, monitoring, optimization, and
logging of all connected automation stations in real-time.
Graphics creation: - User shall be able to add/delete/modify system graphics and state text
for digital points, from standard user interface without the need of any external or specialized
tools.
Navigation: - The navigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achieved
through a hierarchical “tree” structure. Graphics viewing shall also include dynamic pan
zoom capabilities and include the ability to switch between multiple layers with different
information on each layer.
Vector Graphics & Multi-layer with Depth support: - The system must support for Autocad
import of plan with Zoom In& Zoom Out facility through scroll mouse feature & must Enable
simplified and un-cluttered view of all utilities (FAS, ACS, CCTV etc) on any typical floor
plan.
Dynamic 3D & HD Graphics: - Must support for Dynamic 3D & HD Graphics symbols for
better clarity, aesthetics, effective use of change in display technology
Pictures: - Graphic symbols and standard: - The plant pictures must satisfy ergonomic
needs of operators. The displayed graphic symbols must correspond to the generally valid
standard for HVAC symbols (DIN 19227) and ASHRAE guidelines. Symbols must be
supported as two or three dimensional graphics. Capability to create color graphic floor plan
displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including, but not
limited to, air handling units, chilled water systems, hot water boiler systems, and room level
terminal units. Associated prints of standard plant pictures must thus be added to the bid.
Object-oriented graphics: - The building automation and control system must offer dynamic,
high-resolution graphics. The graphics must be object-oriented. Each symbol must be able
to display several states in the same, consistent format. At the same time, several views
must be able to be open concurrently, and all views must be updated dynamically.
Continuous update and display: - Measured values, setpoints, user settings, and alarms
must be displayed immediately and continuously. State changes must be indicated via
symbol, e.g. using animation or changing the color, in general, however, graphic
presentation, or text.
Energy management
Energy measuring functions
Energy and quantity measurements: - The management level must allow for carrying out
various evaluations and analyses of energy consumption in the building. After reviewing the
data, aggregates not working efficiently or rooms not operated optimally must be easily
identified. To this end, the system must be able to process and calculate the listed
PART-B 110
measurement units.
Examples:
Energy:
Instantaneous value of output in: kW

Metered value in energy in: kWh
Volumes:
Volume flow values in: m3
Instantaneous volume flow values in: l/s.
Instantaneous volume flow values in: m3/h.
Operating and consumption data reports: - Complete processing and presentation of

operating and consumption data in the form of a graphical report is required for the highest
possible availability and optimal use of technical installations in buildings. The following
reports and functions must be created and supported:
Energy consumption reports.
Energy cost reports.
Weigthed consumption report.
Adjusted heating degree day report.
Energy efficiency report.
CO2 emissions report.
Display format (line, steps, 3D line, and 3D steps, various colors, automatic or set scaling of y-
axis, zoom).
The generated reports must be printable.
The operating and consumption data must be recorded autonomously in the automation station
using BACnettrendlog objects. This data may not be lost due to short-term management station
failure.
In addition, it must be possible to evaluate reports and data generated by comparing the
data to previous years. Several reports (with max. 10 data series) must be able to be
created and saved for each of the above report templates. Operators must be able to
manually start reports, add a scheduler program or create new reports based on
templates regardless of their user rights.
Scheduler programs
General
Scheduler programs: - At least eight switching times (On/Off) per day must be possible via
operator units (local or management level) to achieve reasonable plant control. The following
schedules must be supported:
Binary: e.g. on/off.
Analog: e.g. setpoint profile.
Multistate: e.g. room operating modes Protection/Economy/Comfort.
Special days must be able to be edited at the management level via two different ways:
Via calendar.
Via direct special day entry in scheduler program.
PART-B 111
Navigation from plant picture to scheduler program: - Every currently used plant picture must offer
user-friendly scheduler program operation.
Management via central scheduler programs: - Operate all scheduler programs online from the
management level to achieve consistent, transparent operation of all integrated systems and
subsystems.
Scheduler program types
Customized scheduler program: - The user can customize the schedule defining the operating
mode for each plant. Switching times are defined via weekly schedule. Overriding recurring
weekly schedules via local or global exceptions as well as operation via any operator unit must
be possible.
Customized calendar: - Local or global calendar exceptions must be able to override the plant-
specific weekly scheduler program. Equal calendars must be assigned priority over each other.
Calendar operation must be possible via all operator units.
Building automation and control system operation
Multiuser-System with online services
Create calendar online: - Calendar programs must be able to be remotely created online to
provide service personnel a high level of flexibility.
Create scheduler online: - Scheduler programs must be able to be remotely created online to
provide service personnel a high level of flexibility.
Online creation of offline trends: - Trends, that also trend offline, must be able to be remotely
created online to provide service personnel a high level of flexibility.
Multiple, concurrent users: - Multiple users must be able to work concurrently on various
workspaces on the building automation and control system for efficient and comprehensive work.
Plants must simultaneously be analyzed and e.g. monitored or operated via a remote station.
Security
Access protection: - Different persons maintain and operate the plant. For this reason, passwords
must be assigned to authorized persons to guarantee transparency for tracking or authorization
purposes. A minimum of four different rights must be assignable.
Administrator.
Program and graphics creation
Operation to change or adjust setpoints.
Guest.
Windows authentication: - The building automation and control system's password administration
must be consistent with the customer's IT guidelines. In other words, corporate customer
guidelines must also apply to the building automation and control system. As a result, password
administration and related properties must be equal to standard Windows login and shall "follow"
the operator to any workstation logged onto.
Closed Mode Operations: - The software should have an option to disable to use other windows
applications such as Microoft Office tools, access to local drives ets to ensure Secure operations
- The BMS server/PC must be prevented to be used as a general purpose PC by the users.
Operating functionsCentralsetpoint shift: - The setpoints in the rooms must be adjustable and
PART-B 112
shiftable for effective and clear room operation for the rooms as a whole and individually via the
building automation and control system.
Alarm handling
General
Alarm function: - The automation station contains an image of the physical data points. Each data
point must be alarmable. Parameterization via operator units must be possible. The alarms either
do not require acknowledgement, i.e. they come and go without acknowledgement, or must be
acknowledged or reset and acknowledged.
Alarm message: - Alarms from the automation station must be displayed on the operator units
within 1 second. Alarms must be acknowledged or acknowledged and reset dependent on access
rights. Delay times (e.g. feedback supervision, triggering of differential pressure monitor, filter)
must be changeable via operator units.
Alarm suppression: - Lower priority messages, undesired reactions from objects or entire plants
must be capable of being suppressed during commissioning, plant servicing or automation station
start up.
System safety
High availability: - High availability is required of the building automation and control system. Data
availability must be increased and any fail times massively reduced.
Alarm generation
Message handling:- Both types of alarm management (Intrinsic Reporting/Algorithmic Reporting)
are supported as recipients. Alarms from automation stations are received at the management
level, but not generated based on a change to Present_Value or Status_Flags in the automation
station. All alarms are displayed when the management level is started.
Intrinsic: Each BACnet object is alarmable.
Algorithmic: Limit value supervision.
Management Station Alarms: - Must be possible to create Alarms for third party systems.
Alarm routing
Media, independence, formats: - Current alarms may need to be routed independent of
media at certain times to a central service (Printer, email). To do this, various formats must
be available (CSV, XLS, PDF). There shall be no limit to the number of points that can be
configured for remote notification of alarm conditions and no limit on the number of remote
devices which can receive messages from the system.
Alarm message escalation list: - System must be configurable to send messages to an
individual person or group of people and shall be configurable to send different messages
to different remote devices based on alarm message priority level.It must be able to send
also to an escalation list so that if the first device does not respond, the message is sent on
to a second device after a configurable time has elapsed.
Acknowledgment
Operator units for acknowledgement: - After user rights are assigned, all alarms (alarms
PART-B 113
and faults, errors) must be acknowledgeable from all operator units. This helps to trace
alarms. A time stamp and assignment (based on user account) is required. This includes:
Local acknowledgement (control panel, automation station).
Management level.
Remote operating equipment.
Alarm management strategy: - The software shall allow the user to configure the alarm
management strategy for each point. The editor shall provide the ability for editing the point
database directly online with the Building Controllers. The operator interface software shall
also provide the capability to perform bulk modification of point definition attributes to a
single or multiple user-selected points.
Assisted treatment of alarms: - The system should support for Guided operations for any
event so as to reduce the human error while handling the alarms must be possible to
configure Predefined & fast intervention steps for faster response.
Alarm display
Color display: - Incoming alarms must be colored for quick and easy interpretation. Both
order and state as well as alarm priority must be recognizable. The alarm window must be
displayed as per operator needs. Alarm window displays must be added to the bid.
Alarm message content: - The message texts must contain all information necessary to
allocate and resolve the error. This includes at least the following attributes:
Clear text.
Control panel name
Plant name
Priority (min. 16 different priorities).
Time.
Status (acknowledged, unacknowledged).
Instructions on how to resolve the problem must be available in the background.
Filter alarms: - The building automation and control system must offer alarm filtering.
Filtering must be possible by alarm lists or priorities. Alarms are displayed in popup windows.
Step-by-step instructions on handling each alarm help the building automation and control
system operator to find a solution.
Event management
Event Routing and sorting: - Event Routing shall allow the user to send event notification
to selected printers or workstation location(s) based on event severity, or point type. The
List must have the ability to list and sort the events based on event status, point name,
ascending or descending activation time.
Event Notification: - Event Notification shall be presented to each workstation in a tabular
format application, and shall include the following information for each event: name, value,
event time and date, event status, priority, acknowledgement information, and alarm count.
Each event shall have the ability to sound an audible notification based on the category of
the event.
Event acknowledge: - Directly from the Event List, the user shall have the ability to
acknowledge, silence the event sound, print, or erase each event. The interface shall also
PART-B 114
have the option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged events, until they have returned
to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to navigate to all information related to
a selected point in order to command, launch an associated graphic or trended graphical
plot, or run a report on a selected point directly from the Event List.
Report generation
Reports
Report generation: - The system must spontaneously (snapshot) generate predefined
reports (real-time and historical data) to provide vital plant data at any time. These reports
must be printable or exported to third-party spreadsheet software and as PDF file. The data
must be editable in other programs (Microsoft Excel, or Microsoft Access) for further
analysis.
Standard report templates: - Templates help generate comprehensive reports without much
effort. At least three different report templates must be available.
Reports to record alarm and fault states.
Reports to record logbook entries.
Reports to record plant and building panels states
List of all points currently in override status
List of all disabled points
List of alarm strategy definitions
Point totalization report
Point Trend data listings
Initial Values report
User activity report

Event history reports
Customized report templates: - The system must allow for creating specific report templates
to meet individual report generation requirements, which also may include plant and trend
graphics.
Remote operation
Operating options
Internet access: - The building automation and control system must offer an Internet solution
via Microsoft IIS (Internet Information Server). The management level programs must be
mapped to APS (Active Server Pages) and optimized for Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Terminal server: - Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants regardless
of location via a terminal server function. This openness, of course, may in now way impact
plant safety.
General requirement for operating: - The Web based interface shall provide the same
functionalities as those available at any other workstation, including operation and
configuration capabilities. All operator interface functions must be available in clients
running in a browser, installed client console, or Windows desktop app.
Via web browser: - Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants regardless
of location with the same user interface. This openness, of course, may in no way impact
PART-B 115
plant safety. The client must run in a browser as a Full Trust client application
Dedicated Desktop Installed client: - Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer
plants regardless of location. This openness, of course, may in now way impact plant safety.
The client must run as a fully installed software installation that can lockdown desktop space
and prevent the ability for the software to be minimized or covered by other applications.
Windows Desktop APP: - Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants
regardless of location with the same user interface. This openness, of course, may in no
way impact plant safety. An app must be downloaded to the client from the server PC that
runs like an installed application, and must be automatically updated whenever new apps
are available at the server.
Trend data
Analyses
Simultaneous, multiple trends: - Multiple trend views must be possible simultaneously to
provide a comprehensive plant overview. Standard plants from medium to higher complexity
(as in this project) require a simultaneous display of up to 10 trend curves on the current
page view to assess the plants. Multiple trend curves must thus be recorded at the same
time.
Freely assign trend data: - For greatest possible flexibility, operators must be able to assign
and thus record max 4 additional data points individually for each plant. The assignment
must be carried out from the management station.
PART-B 116
Decentralized data storage: - None of the trend data may be lost during communications
failure to achieve gap-free trend documentation. For this reason, all trend data must be
created and saved to the automation station. After communications are restored, all values
saved on the management station must be updated automatically.
Intermediate storage of history data: - Trend data are collected in the automation station
and transferred to the management level after a specific time has expired or specific number
of data has been recorded. Trend data may not be lost if the management station is
unavailable temporarily.
Trend comparison: - To make analysis of changed conditions in different times, the system
must provide a time shifted trend view.
Automation level
Requirements at the automation level
General
Automation station standard: - Automation stations must be intelligent. They must be
autonomous. They must be built to go from high decentralization into small units (DDC).
Automation stations must be freely programmable and feature graphical programming
optimized for building automation and control. The following functions must be available:
Control, measure, signal at various priorities and by event, monitor, alarm, count, calculate,
schedule, save trend values, and log as per DIN EN ISO 16484-5. BACnet server
(automation stations) certificates must be added to the bid.
System design: - Manufacturer must prove that they have various scalable automation
stations to ensure optimal automation station design. Associated system documentation
must be added to the bid and included in system evaluation. Documentation must show that
the hardware (DDC and I/O modules) is designed optimally for the number of the required
data points.
Delineation, automation to management level: - All management level functions must be
fully engineered in the automation station to increase plant availability. Delineation is defined
to ensure that no additional engineering is required at the management level (BACnet client).
Delineation,Room automation to management level: - All management level functions must
be fully engineered in the room automation station to increase plant availability. Delineation
is defined to ensure that no additional engineering is required at the management level
(BACnet client).
Specifications: - The DDC controller to be 32 bit controller with BTL certification. The
decentralised small units (DDC) to have UIO concept for configuration of inputs &ouputs to
suite the project specific requirement and the last miniute changes at site.
The CPU frequency of 100 for controller upto 22 IO’s & 133 MHz for 36 IO’s and above with
RTC & having Bacnet/LON OR Bacnet/Ethernet IP having SDRAM of16MB to 64MB &
Flash Memory for 22 IO’s & 36 IO’s respectively. 8 MB to 16MB for 22 IO’s & 36 IO’s
respectively. Maximum IO for small units to support upto 36 IO’s.
The DDC to be capable of accepting inputs of 0-10 VDC; PT1000; NTC 10K; LG-Ni1000.
The same to have agency compliances like EN 60730-1; EN 50491-x; EN 60730-5-2/-5-3;
CE 2004/108/EC; CE 2006/95/EC; UL916; FC PART15, CLASS B; ISO 14001; ISO
9001 .Each decentralised small units (DDC ) should be capable of being operated through
room units to a maximum of 5 nos via PPS2 inertface for various operations aprat from
portable operating terminal(POT).
PART-B 117
Operation concept at automation level

Local operation
General:- Local operation with access for the corresponding automation station, or network
operation via BACnet to all or selected automation stations, or simple room operation must
be available.
Operator and monitoring units
Local operator and monitoring unit: - Local operation must be possible via a locally usable
operator unit. All vital operating parameters of the automation station must be displayed in
clear text. All current plant values, setpoints, and parameters must be displayed on the
operator units. All operator units must be configured to allow for acknowledging
maintenance and fault messages.
Networkable operator and monitoring unit: - Plant operation must be possible both locally
and via management level. Local operation must be location-independent and allow for
maintenance staff work from any automation station or be integrated in the control panel
door. Operation must allow for access to all values (current values, setpoints, parameters,
maintenance and fault messages) without special engineering as well as plant-specific
composition of vital values. Operation must allow for graphic display of weekday and
exception programs, heating curves and trends set up individually.
Graphical plant operation via network-capable touch panel: - A network touch panel
operates the building management system. They must inform the operator without log on
using plant graphics on the present state of the plant. Multiple plants must be able to be
operate via touch panel. Is must be capable of displaying and acknowledging alarms. The
operator should be informed about faults directly by a common alarm display via faults even
when the display is switched off. At the same time, functions to control the plant must be
supported, so that plants must be able to be graphically operated and displayed using select
data points, schedulers as well as trend views. A capacitive display is used to operate. The
touch panel as be added as an integral component of the overall system via a scalable web
interface as well as a pleasant form of polished aluminum frames. User name and password
is required to run functions that can change to plant settings in order to protect the plant.
Web operation independent of hardware: - A web interface, independent of hardware,
operates the building management system. The entire user interface must be optimized for
finger operation. To ensure operation not tied to a location, web operation must also support,
for example, off-the-shelf tables (Android, i OS App, Microsoft) or notebooks. It must be
capable of operating multiple plants as well as display and acknowledge alarms. At the
same time, functions to control the plant must be supported, so that plants must be able to
be graphically operated and displayed using select data points, schedulers as well as trend
views. User name and password is required to run functions that can change to plant
settings in order to protect the plant. Existing, system touch panels must be able to be
integrated, or devices able to use standard web browser functions without further upgrades.
Operation via web browser or mobile clients: - Vital functions must be viewable regardless
of plant location. To this end, access is required via mobile clients (mobile phone, pocket
PC, PDA, etc.) to all actual values and setpoints, plants and operating states.
Online trends: - Local operator units must support temporary recording of trend data to allow
local operators to record a trend at the control panel for diagnostic purposes.
I/O modules
General
PART-B 118
Construction: - As highly flexible I/O modules are needed for complex and large technical
equipment in buildings, they must be composed individually for each plant. To this end,
modules must be configurable for various signal types, grouped, labeled per channel with
clear text, two-sided readable, and distributed or set across several control
panels/panels.The entire module electronics must be protected by a stable plastic housing
against touch and soiling.
Diagnostic function: - A status diagnosis for each channel is required to quickly locate
installation or plant errors. The status is displayed by LED or on the module.
LED display: - The color of the status LED must be configurable to correspond with message
type to provide and easy overview in the control panel. Feedback: green, maintenance:
yellow, warning: red.
Remote I/O modules: - Remote I/O modules must be able to be used for small plants or
parts thereof to keep the size and number of control panels/panels as low as possible. The
modules must be able to be as far as 200 m from the automation station. The maximum
number of data points edited this way may only be limited by the maximum capacity of the
automation station.
Isolating terminal functionality: - The electronic modules must have isolating terminals to
simplify hardware tests and commissioning. As a result, connected field devices can be
measured at the test plug sockets without module electronics influence. At the same time,
the connection terminals must act as cabinet/panel terminal strips. If the bidder cannot
provide proof for this function, all inputs and outputs must be run via separate isolating
terminals. The resulting costs must be included in the unit prices.
Connection
Short-circuit proof: - Field devices and motors must be connected directly without requiring
coupling relays or other proprietary hardware. All terminals are protected against short
circuit and incorrect wiring using AC/DC 24 V. Field device errors must be recognized and
displayed reliably to retain high plant availability.
Broken wire interlock: - Interlocks (hardware) and fault messages must be designed for
possible wire breaks or loose terminals under closed-loop rules, i.e. the automation station
then has status "1" OK (closed monitoring loop) or no fault, and status "0" (interrupted
monitoring loop) or fault.
Connect field devices
Field device standards: - The automation stations or I/O modules must support all common
sensors (e.g. temperature, humidity) and actuators (valves, damper actuators) without
requiring additional conversion hardware. The bidder must provide proof that the field
devices used for the project were tested under the entire system and documented
accordingly.
Use of I/O modules on the automation level: - Functionality for the I/O system must be
implemented on the automation level.
Updates and adaptations
Updates
Changes during operation: - Customer-specific plant programs must allow for minor
adjustments without having to switch off unrelated plants and without changing set
parameters and setpoints.
PART-B 119
Changes to applications during operation: - Minor program changes must be able to be

introduced without operational interruptions.
Adaptations
Access via system network: - Operators must be able to enter adapted parameters,
setpoints, times etc. in each automation station via the system network under their password.
Communication
Standard BACnet / AMEV
DIN EN ISO 16484-5 / AMEV
BACnet conformance and BTL logo: - The BACnet servers (automation stations) used must
support at least BACnet standard Version 1, Revision 10 (1.10) or higher. In addition, a test
must be carried out successfully in a neutral testing laboratory (conformance testing) and
the automation stations must have the BTL logo.
B-AWS (management station): - Management stations must match the BACnet Profile B-
AWS (Advanced workstation) as per the BTL Listing.
B-BC (automation station): - Automation stations must match the BACnet Profile B-BC
(Building Controller) as per the BTL Listing.
AMEV AS-A and AS-B (automation station): - Automation stations must meet the AMEV
profile AS-A and AS-B as per AMEV guidelines "Bacnet 2011"
B-AWS (management station): - Management stations must match the BACnet Profile B-
AWS (Advanced workstation) as per the BTL Listing and also specified in ANSI / ASHRE
135 guidline. It must also support the BACnet Life Safety Points and BACnet Life Safety
Zones functionality
ONVIF video standard: - The system must be able to implement Video streams of IP
cameras. The presentation in “video wall” modus must be supported.
Conformance declaration
Protocol implementation and conformance declaration (PICS): - Manufacturer self-
declaration PICS is required prior to executing work to gain information on the type of
communication for the building automaton and control system.
Communication via LonTalk
BACnet over LonTalk: - The automation stations must allow for communication via LonTalk
and work on simple two-wire cabling in a freely selectable bus topology with a total possible
length of 900 m. Ethernet/IP must serve as the backbone.
Communication via BACnet / IP
BACnet/IP: - The automation stations (room automation stations as well) must support
BACnet/IP communication (as per the standards described previously) for later system-
independent plant extensions.
BACnet/IP(v4-v6) to BACnet/MS/TP: - The automation station must be able to integrate,
using a router manufactured by the same vendor, the MS/TP protocol via BACnet/IP.
BACnet/IP(v4-v6) to BACnet/MS/TP or BACnet/LonTalk: - The automation station must be
able to integrate, using a router manufactured by the same vendor, the BACnet/MS/TP
protocol via BACnet/IP as well as BACnet/LonTalk.
PART-B 120
BACnet/IPv4 to BACnet/IPv6: - The building management system must be able to

connected the BACnet/IPv4 protocol with BACnet/IPv6 protocol using a router
manufactured by the same vendor.
BACnetLonTalk to BACnet MS/TP: - The building management system must be able to
connected the BACnet/LonTalk with BACnet/MS/TP protocol using a router manufactured
by the same vendor.
Physical structure
Network structure
Structure: - The offered network must be flexible and allow for all types of networks (line,
star, ring, tree, etc.) to satisfy all owner/operator needs.
Cable types: - The manufacturer must add to the bid any requirements for specific types of
cable, cable installation, or diameters etc., if the manufacturer or offered bus topology
require them.
Building automation and control system - Automation stations
Openness
Extendibility: - Integrating existing technical equipment without additional conversion
hardware (existing, open system, or other standardized bus systems such as BACnet or
third-party) in the new environment is a vital task. The same applies to LonTalk, DALI, or
KNX integration.
Integration of third-party systems: - If possible, the same communication protocol must be
used as for the existing technical equipment in the building to integrate third-party systems
(refrigeration machines, lighting and building automation and control systems, etc.). Building
automation and control systems not offering this integration as specified must include and
clearly declare any additional conversion hardware (gateways) in their price.
Open and neutral communication via BACnet: - Automation stations are connected to the
management level via communication bus. System structure must allow open, neutral and
manufacturer-independent communication. Communications must take place in principle
via BACnet even if proprietary communications would be possible based on the automation
stations used. Intermediate OPC servers are not allowed.
Engineering interface via the network or remote: - Access over the network, VPN, or modem
is required for maintenance and diagnostics purposes.
Automation station - Automation station
Standard protocol
Uniform protocol: - Communication must also be standardized even between individual
modules and automation stations. All devices must communicate on the same protocol on
the entire room level.
Automation station - Field level
Field device connection.
Connect field devices: - The automation stations or I/O modules must support all common
sensors (e.g. temperature, humidity) and actuators (valves, damper actuators, lighting
control, blinds drives) without requiring additional conversion hardware. The bidder must
provide proof that the field devices used for the project were tested under the entire system
PART-B 121
and documented accordingly.

Use of communicative field devices: - Communicative field devices are required to achieve
simple cabling and consistent communication structures.
Connect communicating field devices: - Common manufacturers must be integratable to
connect third-party devices and subsystems. (E.g. communicating pumps, Modbus
subsystems, M-bus capable heat meters, etc.)
Third-party system connection: - A interface is required to connect various devices that
supports communication protocols such as Modbus, M-Bus, Genibus and USS.
Support of Plug&Play commissioning: - The communications protocol used on the field level
must support "Plug&Play", i.e. commissioning must be able to be conducted by a person
without tools other than a PC/notebook without expensive software tools.
Number of supported communicative field devices: - The communications protocol used on
the field level must support at least 30 communicative field devices for each controller with
the use of gateways.
Field level
Requirements at the field level
Product range
Field level contents: -
The field level comprises all measuring sensors, actuators, transmitters and energy
measuring devices used to control, regulate, monitor, and optimize plants. The bidder is
expected to provide all required field devices from own production to the installer to
provide a harmonized plant image. The associated field device product range overview
must be added to the bid.
Actuators for ventilation and air conditioning plants
General
Mechanical strength: - Robust and long-lived actuators are required for reliable operation of
ventilating plants.
Connecting cable: - Actuators are required to have color and number-coded connecting
cables to prevent wiring mistakes.
Axis attachment: - The actuators must allow for fast mounting to maintain ventilation plants
optimally at reasonable costs.
Damper positioning display: - Damper actuators must be equipped with an easily visible
optical position indication for clear and visual check of the damper position.
Auxiliary functions: - Auxiliary functions such as auxiliary switches, position feedback, etc.,
are supplied mounted in the housing.
Disposal: - Actuators must be easily disposable.
Manual adjustment
Actuators are equipped with manual adjustor or disengagement function.
PART-B 122
Actuators for fire dampers

Security
Demand: - Fire dampers are intended to provide protection against plant damage and/or
personal injury. Periodic function checks guarantee highest safety. Motorization and
position feedback is therefore a must. Fire dampers must guarantee secure closure in
emergencies for the entire product life. All fire damper actuators as a rule must have a spring
return actuator.
Sensors
General
Product line consistency: - As part of uniform plant design, all sensors must originate from
the same manufacturer with recognizable, consistent appearance. All sensors must be CE-
approved. For the final documentation, data sheets must be provided for all sensors used.
Reverse voltage protection: - The sensors must have reverse voltage protection to reduce
error sources during electrical connection of the sensors.
Test functions: - The sensors must have a test function to ensure commissioning on a tight
construction schedule. Allowing errors and faults to be recognized during point test or for
analytic purposes during operation
Environmental declaration: - Proof for the materials used in the sensors must be provided if
requested by the building owner. In addition, packing materials must be disposed of in an
environmentally compatible manner.
Sensor connection: - For cabling, it must be noted in principle that disturbances occur the
longer the wiring runs in parallel and the smaller the distance between lines. Use shielded
cabling in environments subject to strong EMC. Use twist pair wiring for customer power
lines as well as signal lines.
Sensor types:-
Temperature sensor
Outside air sensor: - Outside air sensors must allow for high-quality temperature
measurements to promote efficient and ecologically meaningful control. A temperature
measuring concept including wind and solar radiation is required.
Duct sensor: - Sensors acquiring temperature values via mean value acquisition are
required to retain the necessary flexibility for sensor integration in air ducts.
Humidity sensor
Outside sensor: - Only maintenance-free sensors are used. The supplier must provide proof
that the offered sensors feature compensation of inherent temperature. The sensor build
must ensure protection against dust.
Duct sensor: - Only maintenance-free sensors are used. The supplier must provide proof
that the offered sensors feature compensation of inherent temperature. The sensor build
must ensure protection against dust.
PART-B 123
Air quality sensor

Duct sensor: - Duct sensors may not feature additional duct mounting housings or other
sealing masses for exchange during operation. Installation depth must be seamlessly
adjustable to achieve a small product range. The sensor's design does not require
sophisticated orientation to the flow direction in the duct.
Pressure sensor
Absolute pressure sensor: - Robust sensors ideal for measuring static and dynamic
overpressure at intensive load changes are required for pressure control of liquids and
gases. The related sensor build must ensure that the sensors are immune against humidity
and temperature deviations in the long term.
Differential pressure sensor: - Sensor with highly stable membrane are required to monitor
differential pressure of air and non-aggressive gases. Robust sensors ideal for measuring
static and dynamic overpressure at intensive load changes are required for pressure control
of liquids and gases. The related sensor build must ensure that the sensors are immune
against humidity and temperature deviations in the long term.
Flow sensor
Flow monitor: - For flow monitoring of liquids, sensors of fiberglass reinforced plastic or in
robust gun metal. The sensors must be constructed to be insensitive to contamination and
have a high level of media resistance. Multiple configurations for the output signal must be
possible to permit matching to a specific application.
Flow switch: - Maintenance-free sensors with reed contact are specified to monitor the flow
of liquids. The sensors must be deployable to a wide nominal range to optimize application.
The reed contact must be a proximity switch. The set switching point must be stable and
independent of pressure.
Air velocity sensor: - The sensor used must be immune to contamination regardless of
the flow direction. However, these sensors must be able to be adapted to various velocity
measuring ranges without auxiliary tools to avoid measuring accuracy disadvantages.
Multiple configurations for the output signal must be possible to permit matching to a specific
application.
Valves and actuators
General
Own development and assembly competence: - The bidder provides proof that owns
development competence is available to quickly and comprehensively adapt to new market
requirements.It is important that both development and manufacture are from one bidder to
ensure fast and consistent advanced development of the products.
CAD / CAE symbols: - The manufacturer must provide 2D and/or 3D CAD models in a
standardized format for all valve-actuator combinations to ensure efficient pipe planning.
Backward compatibility between actuator and valve: - The valve and actuator supplier must
ensure 100% backward compatibility for valve and actuator to simplify service planning and
warehousing and ensure trouble free, future exchange.
VDI3805 symbols: - The manufacturer must provide the data sets under VDI 3805 for all
valve-actuator combinations to ensure efficient pipe planning.
PART-B 124
Requirements for valves and actuators

Mechanical requirements
Robust actuators: - Overload-proof actuators with robust components and easy-to-operate
manual adjustment must be used for reliable operation.
Documentation: - Documentation for mounting and commissioning staff in the respective
country's language must be added to the product to ensure smooth mounting and plant
commissioning.
Manual adjustment: - The actuators must be equipped with tool-free manual adjustment for
efficient service and secure emergency operation during plant faults.
Maintenance: - Robust and long-lived actuators are a must to ensure maintenance-free
operation.
Electrical requirements
Energy consumption: - Actuators with the lowest possible power consumption should be
used to achieve environmentally-friendly and energy-efficient plant operations. (The power
consumption data must be documented),
The following upper limits are defined for electromotive and electro-hydraulic actuators:
Actuators for valves up to DN50: 20 VA.
Actuators for valves up to DN65 to DN150: 25 VA.
Declarations
European standards: - The supplier must provide proof for adherence to the specific
European standards for valves and actuators. (EMC Guideline)
RoHS / environmental declaration: - Only actuating devices conformant to RoHS and with
an environmental declaration provided by the manufacturer may be used to ensure
environmentally-compatible plant design.
Combination valves
Automatic differential pressure controller: - Valves must have differential pressure control to
simplify installation and hydraulic balancing.
Treatment and primary distribution
Direct-mounted rotary actuators
General: - Use only direct-mounted actuators with integrated console for globe valves and
butterfly valves to ensure efficient, trouble-free mounting.Thanks to the integrated console,
there are not too many parts at the mounting location and errors due to wrong consoles are
avoided.
Product range accessories: - The bidder provides proof of the fact that he/she has a
comprehensive range of accessories allowing for flexible functional extensions any
time.This aims at keeping the actuator range manageable for users, and ensures that
standard functionality is not influenced by unused functionality. At the same time, the
standard product does not include extra costs for other functions.
Kvs value gradation: - The bidder must offer a valve product range that ensures high
efficiency in hydraulic circuits based on highly incremented kvs values. Optimal valve
gradation is required based on exact adjustment of the volume flow at lowest possible
pressure drop. In addition to operating energy savings for the hydraulic circuit, exact sizing
must also ensure energy efficiency for hot and cold water generation by reaching optimized
PART-B 125
operating points more quickly.

Nominal widths: - The following valve-actuator combinations with the following
runtime/nominal width gradations must be used for control tasks to optimize energy
efficiency.Actuators for valves up to DN50: Actuators for valves from DN65 to DN150: 120
sec
Nominal pressure levels: - The bidder must offer a large range of valves for various nominal
pressure levels in his/her own product range, and be able to mix the products without
problems.
Operating and status indications: - The actuators used must have easy to understand visual
operating and status indications. The movement of an actuator must be possible as well as
from a certain distance (some meters) to simplify function checks. Operating state of
continuous actuators must displayed externally via Leeds, to allow less training personnel
to quickly localize a plant or actuator error.
Direct-mounted rotary actuators ISO5211: - For efficient, trouble-fee mounting and compact
installation, use only direct-mounted rotary actuators with connection as per ISO 5211.
Thanks to the integrated console, there are not too many parts at the mounting location and
errors due to wrong consoles are avoided.
Uniform valve interface: - The must document that it has a defined valve actuator interface
to protect the investment in the plant.
Electrical requirements
Flexible voltage supply: - All actuators can be operated on both 24 VAC and VDC to achieve
flexible application of actuators in the plant and to avoid double actuator warehousing.
Real electric positioning feedback messages: - Valves must offer real feedback to ensure
reliable position indication/plant monitoring.
Position signal provisioning: - The selected actuators must be able to be operated on 0-10
V or 4-20 mA for the positioning signal even under critical EMC conditions.
Position indication / operating state indication: - Actuators offering possible position
feedback for efficient plant monitoring and quick troubleshooting from the management level
must be provided.
Mechanical requirements
Runtimes: - Actuators with very short positioning times, preferably faster than 5 seconds,
must be used to optimize energy efficiency in very fast control paths.
Drinking water conformance: - Only DVGW (German Technical and Scientific Association
for Gas and Water) certified valves may be used for valves in drinking water plants.
Connection types: - For optimal selection, various mechanical connection types are required
for flexible installation. The valves must be delivered with flanges, external or internal
threads (external threaded valves including screwed fittings) and comprehensive
recommendations and instructions for various mounting systems.
Operation & mounting: - Uniform operation of all actuators: - rouble-free commissioning and
efficient operation is guaranteed through uniform and user-friendly operation of all rotary
and stroke actuators.
Tool-free manual adjustment: - The actuators must be equipped with tool-free manual
adjustment for efficient service and secure emergency operation during plant faults
PART-B 126
Manual adjustment with two operating modes: - Manual adjustment must be both temporary
(reset to automatic occurs automatically) as well as permanent (reset to automatic only upon
user request) to allow for optimum use during each project phase (commissioning and
service).
Robust manual adjustment: - Manual adjustment must be designed to preclude damage to
the actuator and activated valve, even for unintended operation.
Integrated actuator bracket for quick mounting: - Use only stroke actuators with integrated
brackets for efficient and trouble-free mounting; for quick mounting using one tool.
Mechanical adjustments, that cause an error, are not allowed.
Easy extension of functionality with a comprehensive offering of accessories:- The bidder
provides proof of the fact that he/she has a comprehensive range of accessories for
actuators allowing for flexible functional extensions any time. This aims at keeping the
actuator range manageable for users, and ensures that standard functionality is not
influenced by unused functionality. At the same time, the standard product does not include
extra costs for other functions.
Easy-to-handle actuator accessories: - Accessories should be designed to simplify
mounting and planning/logistics so they can be used on all actuators in the product range
requiring as few parts as necessary for mounting.
Protection functions
Fail-safe function (safety of persons): - The bidder must guarantee fail-safe functionality for
the entire valve-actuator range. The valve must mechanically move to the defined fail-safe
position in the event of a power failure. The bidder must provide proof that the valves used
are certified accordingly as part of the final project documentation.
Fail-safe function (safety of assets):- The bidder must guarantee fail-safe functionality for
the entire valve-actuator range. The valve must mechanically or electrically move to the
defined fail-safe position in the event of a power failure.
1) Room Temperature Sensor:
Sensing Element : Pt1000
Range of Use : 0...50 °C
Degree of protection : IP 30 to IEC 529
Output Signal : Resistive Output
Environmental conditions :
Temperature : 0...50 °C
Humidity : <85 % r. h.
2) Room Temperature & RH Sensor:

Sensing Element : NTC 10k (Temperature), capacitive sensing element (Humidity)
Range Of Use : 0...50 °C/ - 35...+ 35 °C / - 40. . +70 °C (Temperature), 0... 100 %
relative humidity
Degree of protection : IP 30 as per IEC 60529
Output Signal : DC 0...10 V for both (Temperature and Humidity)
Power supply : AC 24 V + 20 %, 50/60 Hz
Accuracy : +0.8 K (15...35 °C), + 3 % r. h. (30...70 % r. h.)
Approval : CE, UL 873, and C-Tick
PART-B 127
Environmental conditions : Température: -15...50 °C; Humidity: <95 % r. h.
3) Duct Temperature Sensor:

Sensing Element : Pt1000
Range of Use : - 50...+ 80 °C
Degree of protection : IP 42 to IEC 529
Probe Length : 400mm
Environmental conditions : Temperature: - 40...+ 70 °C; Humidity: 5...95 % r. h.
4) Duct Temperature & RH Sensor:

Sensing Element : NTC 10k (Temp), capacitive sensing element (Humidity)
Range of Use : 0...50°C/ -35...+35 °C /- 40...+70°C (Temperature),0..100% r. h.
Degree of protection : IP 54 as per IEC 60 529
Output Signal : DC 0...10 V for both (Temperature and Humidity)
Accuracy : + 0.8 K (15...35 °C), + 3 % r.h (30...70 % r.h.)
Approval : CE, UL 873, and C-Tick
Environmental conditions : Température: -25...70°C; Humidity: <95 % r. h.
5) Water Temperature Sensor:

Sensing Element : Pt1000/LG-Ni1000
Range of Use : -30...+130 °C
Degree of protection : IP 42
Thermo well : 100/150mm Length
Time constant : approx. 30s (With Protection Pocket)
Immersion rod : Stainless steel
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -40...70°C; Humidity: <5...95 % r.h.
6) Duct Differential Pressure Sensor (Air)

Sensing Element : Piezo-resistive
Range of use : 0...200 Pa/ 0...250 Pa/ 0...500 Pa
Output Signal : DC 0...10 V
Accuracy : <+ 0.1 % FS / °C (at 20°Ambient, TC zero point)
Overload Pressure : 5,000 Pa
Medium temperature : 0...70 °C
Pressure connection : PVC nipples □ 6.2 mm
Approval : CE, C-Tick, ROHS
Accessories : consisting of 2 m plastic tubes, 2 air duct probes
Environmental conditions : Temp: -25...70°C; Humidity: <90 % r.h. (without condensation)
7) Room Differential Pressure Sensor (Air)

PART-B 128
Range of Use : +50 Pa/ +100 Pa

Output Signal : DC 0...10 V
Accuracy : <+0.1 % FS / °C (at 20°Ambient, TC zero point)
Overload Pressure : 5,000 Pa
Medium temperature : 0...70 °C
Pressure connection : PVC nipples □ 6.2 mm
Approval : CE, C-Tick, ROHS
Environmental conditions : Temp: -25...70°C; Humidity: <90 % r. h. (without condensation)
8) Air Differential Pressure Switch (Air):

Sensing Element : spring-loaded diaphragm
Range of Use : 50...500 Pa
Output Signal : Single-pole change-over, multi-layer contact (AC 250 V, max. 5 A
res.)
Overload Pressure : 7500 Pa
Cycle Time : > 1 micro switching cycle
Approval : CE, UL94, C-Tick, DVGW approval
Environmental conditions : Temp: -30...85 °C; Humidity: <90 % r.h.(without condensation)
9) Water Pressure Sensor:

Range of Use : 0...10 bar
Degree of protection : IP 65 to EN 60 529
Output Signal : DC 0 ...10 V
Power supply : AC 24 V +15 %, 50/60 Hz
Rupture Pressure : 3 x scale end value of measuring range (FS)
Medium Temperature : - 40...+ 80 °C
Accuracy : <+ 0.6 % FS
Approval : CE, C-Tick
Accessories : Mounting kit 1 m copper capillary line, both ends
prefabricated ready for connection Thread adapters and
terminal nuts.
Pressure connection : G1/ 8“ or G1/2“ outer threading.
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -40...80 °C; Humidity: insensitive to condensation
10) Water Differential Pressure Sensor:

Sensing Element : ceramic sensor
Range of Use : 0...10 bar
Degree of protection : IP 65 to IEC 60 529
Output Signal : DC 0 ...10 V
Overload Pressure : 8 bars
Medium Temperature : - 15...+ 85 °C
PART-B 129
Accuracy : <+ 0.4 % FS

Accessories : Mounting kit 1 m copper capillary line, both ends
prefabricated ready for connection Thread adapters and
terminal nuts
Pressure connection : G1/ 8“ or G1 /2“ outer threading.
Environmental conditions : Température:-15...85°C; Humidity:<90% r. h. (non-condensing)
11) Water Flow Switch:

Suitable media : All liquids (not suitable for ammonia)
Pipe Diameter : DN 20….200
Switching capacity : max. AC 230 V, 1A, 26 VA
Degree of protection : IP 65 per EN 60 529
Output Signal : Reed contact
Nominal pressure : 25 bars
Medium Temperature : -20. ..110 °C
Approval : CE
Environmental conditions : Température : -20...80 °C; Humidity: <95 % r. h
12) Air Velocity Sensor:

The sensor measures a point, i.e., it measures the values at a specific location in the flow profile.
Principle : Anemometric measurement
Range Of use : 0.5 m/s, 0...10 m/s, and 0...15 m/s
Output Signal : DC 0...10 V or 4.. .20 mA
Operating Voltage : AC/DC 24 V + 20 %, 50/60 Hz
Degree of protection : IP 42
Medium Temperature : -20...110 °C
Approval : CE
Environmental conditions : Temp: -10...+45 °C; Humidity: <95 % r.h.
13) Modulating Valves:

Threaded : Up to 40mm
Flanged : > or Equal 50mm
PN Rating : PN16
Valve Body : bronze up to 4omm, Grey cast iron for 5omm & above
∆p max across the valve : Minimum 175Kpa
Two Way/ 3-Way : As per BOQ
Stem : Stainless steel
Medium temperature : +1 . . .95 °C
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -10...55 °C; Humidity: 5...95% r.h.
14) Valve Actuator:

Type : Electromotoric up to 65mm, Electrohydraulic for 8omm and above
Operating voltage : AC 24 V + 20 % 50 or 60 Hz
IP Rating : IP54
Type of Signal : Modulating DC 0.10V
PART-B 130
Nominal stroke : 5.5mmupto 40mm dia;20mm for 50,65,80mm Dia; 40mm for
100,125,150mm Dia.valves
Manual Override : YES
Approval : CE
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -5. . .50 °C; Humidity: 5...95% r.h.
15) Damper Actuator (FireDamper Actuator On/Off)

Type : Rotary version with spring return
IP Rating : IP54
Type of Signal : Two-position control
Torque : 7NM (1.5SQM damper Area) or 18NM, (3SQM Damper Area)
Runtime for rotary angle 90° : 90s
Closing time with return spring : 15s
Round / square shaft : 6.4...20.5 / 6.4...13 mm (7NM)
Round / square shaft : 8...25.6 /6...18 mm (18NM)
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -32…+70°C; Humidity: <95 % r.h.
16) Damper Actuator (Modulating)

Type : Rotary version without spring return
IP Rating : IP54
Type of Signal : DC 0...10V
Torque : 5NM (0.8SQM damper Area); 10NM,(1.5SQM Damper Area);15
NM (3SQM Damper Area)
Runtime for rotary angle 90° : 150s
Round / square shaft : 6.4...20.5 mm /6.4...13 mm (I5NM)
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -32...+70 °C; Humidity: <95 % r.h.
17) Butterfly Valves:

Valve Body : Grey cast iron
PN Rating : PN 16 to EN1333
Permissible operating pressure : 1600 kPa (16 bar)
Angle of rotation : 90° (to end stop)
Medium temperature : -10. . . 120 °C
Permissible media : chilled water, low temp hot water, high temp hot water, Brine
Approval : CE
18) Butterfly Valve Actuator:

Type : Electromotoric rotary actuators
Type of Signal : 3-position
Operating voltage : AC 230 V +15%( 3-position)
Operating voltage : AC 24 V + 20% (DC 0.10V, Modulating) if included in BOQ
Type of Signal : DC 0...10V if included in BOQ
IP Rating : IP54 as per EN 60529
PART-B 131
Positioning times : 120s

Approval : CE, UL
Environmental conditions : Temperature: -15...+55 °C; Humidity: 5.95 % r.h
19) BTU Meter:
• Meter to be tampering-proof with Single button design. No tampering through the
keypad. Parameters of the meter can be changed through software only.
• All meters need to be wet calibrated (temperature sensor and flow meter need to
be calibrated together) and calibration certificate to be provided for the BTU
meters.
• Meters need to have an inbuilt Lithium battery backup - guaranteed for a min. of 6
years.
• No reflector used for detection of flow. This ensures that meters are very robust
and efficient and maintenance free for years of operation.
• The flow sensor to be a high capacity flow meter, to take velocities as high as 10
m/s.
• Meters need to be CE certified and needs to have IP65 Protection.
• Meter should have the facility to be used as a hot meter as well as a cold meter
without any modifications. The meter should have auto switching of Hot/ Cold
meters.
• The enclosure protection needs to be IP65 and environment class A.
• The temperature sensor should be matched pair with Pt1000 type. The measuring
range should be -20 to +95 deg C.
• The BTU meter shall provide the following points both at the integral LCD and as
outputs to the building control system: Energy Total, Energy Rate, Flow Rate,
Supply Temperature and Return Temperature. Output signals shall have protocol
conforming to BACnet/IP, LONWORKS®, MODBUS RTU or MODBUS TCP.
• The entire Energy Measurement System shall be built and calibrated by a single
manufacturer, Each Btu meter shall be factory programmed for its specific
application.
• The BTU meter system shall consist of a flow meter, two temperature sensors, a
Btu meter, temperature thermowells.
• The installation of flow meter and the thermowells of temperature sensors shall be
HVAC.
Installation:
System shall be installed by the controls supplier. BACS vendor shall submit their system
architecture schematic with necessary cabling/conduiting drawings for this specific project
with the data sheets of the individual components that has been taken into account in the
design.
Programming, testing and commissioning:
The entire system shall be programmed, tested and commissioned by the BACS vendor using
qualified and trained personnel with necessary service tools/software that has been
provided by the factory/principal manufacturer. They shall co-ordinate as necessary with
the other equipment supplier, wherever 3rd party integrations are required to successfully
bring their data to the BACS Workstation.
PART-B 132
Training
Necessary training shall be conducted by the BACS contractor and shall utilize IOM manuals,
data sheets and as-built drawings and necessary documentation; Operator training shall
be carried out for a minimum period of six hours including a site familiarization of the
facility, various critical functioning of the BACS, data recovery, transfer & storage, text
editing and graphics, review of sequence of operation.
BACS Specifications
Preparation of reports and modifying the same for presentation to management, trouble shooting
of various important functions, password control; the training shall be done immediately
upon system completion and handing over.
One copy of the draft O & M manual shall be submitted for review that will have all the necessary
data sheets and drawings (in A3 sizes) immediately upon the commissioning of the
project; copies of O&M manual shall be submitted after review and finalization with all the
necessary data sheets of the equipment and components supplied and installed with as-
built drawings and commissioning data sheets.
1.5.9 Warranty
All component, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the BACS contractor shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from
the owner’s acceptance date. All corrective software modifications made during warranty
service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer
archived software disks.
Labour to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components including all the cost of
the components (landed at site) shall be furnished by the BACS contractor at no extra
charge at site to the owner during the warranty period.
1.5.10 Drawings:
BACS vendor shall submit working drawings for all their works at site including conduiting, cable
layouts, cable schedule and DDC panel details; contractor shall also submit all data
sheets, graphics layout of the screen for approval; Submittal shall be done within a week
of the award of contract with all the necessary details like system architecture, conduiting&
cable routing, DDC enclosure panel drawings with all necessary wiring terminations etc.,
necessary co-ordination shall be done along with other vendors for smooth execution of
the project.
PART-B 133
IO LIST:-
By BMS By 3rd Party

DESCRIPTION QTY DATA POINT TYPE
SL Contractor Contractor
No. DI AI DO AO SW
PLANT ROOM - HIGH SIDE
WATER COOLED CHILLERS 3
POTENTIAL FREE ACCEPTANCE OF

CHILLER START/STOP CONTACT FROM POTENTIAL FREE
1.01 3
COMMAND BMS TO CHILLER OUTPUT IN CHILLER
MCC PANEL PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
1.02 CHILLER RUN STATUS 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
CHILLER MCC CHILLER PANEL
PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
CHILLER CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
1.03 AUTO/MANUAL 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
SWITCH CHILLER MCC CHILLER PANEL
PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
1.04 CHILLER TRIP STATUS 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
1 PANEL
CHILLER COMMON SUITABLE
HEADER IMMERSION INSERTION
1.05 2
SUPPLY/RETURN TEMP SENSOR PROVISION IN
TEMP WATER LINE
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO
MOTORISED MOTORISED
CHILLER ISOLATION
1.06 3 BUTTER FLY BUTTERFLY VALVE
VALVE- OPEN/CLOSE
VALVE WITH & ACTUATOR
LIMIT SWITCH
FOR POSITION
STATUS.
SUITABLE
COMMON HEADER
INSERTION
1.07 CHILLED WATER FLOW 1 FLOW METER
PROVISION IN
MONITORING
WATER LINE
SUITABLE
OUTSIDE T+RH
1.08 AMBIENT T + RH 2 INSERTION
SENSOR
PROVISION
PART-B 134
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
CHILLER. HVAC
VENDOR TO SHOW
THE PARAMETERS
BACNET / ON THE MODSCAN
MODBUS /BACSTACK/CIMETR
CHILLER SOFTWARE
1.09 30 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
INTEGRATION
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
LICENSE INTEGRATING TO
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
CHILLERS TO BE
DONE BY THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
AIR COOLED HEAT PUMP TYPE

3
CHILLERS
CHILLER START/STOP CONTACT FROM POTENTIAL FREE
2.01 3
COMMAND BMS TO CHILLER OUTPUT IN CHILLER
MCC PANEL PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
2.02 CHILLER RUN STATUS 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
CHILLER CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
2.03 AUTO/MANUAL 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
SWITCH CHILLER MCC CHILLER PANEL
2 PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
2.04 CHILLER TRIP STATUS 3 BMS FROM CONTACT IN
PANEL
CHILLER COMMON SUITABLE
HEADER IMMERSION INSERTION
2.05 2
SUPPLY/RETURN TEMP SENSOR PROVISION IN
TEMP WATER LINE
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT FROM
MOTORISED
CHILLER ISOLATION BMS TO
2.06 3 BUTTERFLY VALVE
VALVE- OPEN/CLOSE MOTORISED
& ACTUATOR
BUTTER FLY
VALVE WITH
PART-B 135
LIMIT SWITCH
FOR POSITION
STATUS.
SUITABLE
COMMON HEADER
INSERTION
2.07 CHILLED WATER FLOW 1 FLOW METER
PROVISION IN
MONITORING
WATER LINE
SUITABLE
OUTSIDE T+RH
2.08 AMBIENT T + RH 2 INSERTION
SENSOR
PROVISION
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
CHILLER. HVAC
VENDOR TO SHOW
THE PARAMETERS
BACNET / ON THE MODSCAN
CHILLER SOFTWARE
2.09 30 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
INTEGRATION
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
CHILLERS TO BE
DONE BY THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
PRIMARY CHILLER WATER

6
PUMP
PRIMARY CHW PUMPS
CONTACT FROM POTENTIAL FREE
3.01 START/ STOP 6
BMS TO PUMP OUTPUT IN PUMP
COMMAND
STARTER PANEL PANEL
WATER SUITABLE
PRIMARY CHW PUMPS DIFFERENTIAL INSERTION
3.02 6
3 RUN STATUS PRESSURE PROVISION IN
SWITCH WATER LINE
SIGNAL FROM POTENTIAL FREE
PRIMARY CHW PUMP
3.03 6 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT IN PUMP
TRIP STATUS
CONTACT. PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
PRIMARY CHW PUMPS POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT AT
3.04 AUTO/ MANUAL 6 CONTACT IN PUMP
AUTO/MANUAL
STATUS MONITORING PANEL
SWITCH
VARIABLE SECONDARY PUMP
6
SYSTEM
4 SECONDARY PUMPS
4.01 START/STOP 6
COMMAND
PART-B 136

STARTER PANEL PANEL
WATER SUITABLE
SECONDARY PUMP DIFFERENTIAL INSERTION
4.02 6
RUN STATUS PRESSURE PROVISION IN
SWITCH WATER LINE
SECONDARY PUMP
4.03 6 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT IN PUMP
TRIP STATUS
CONTACT. PANEL
VFD BY HVAC
SECONDARY PUMP
CONTRACTOR WITH
4.04 VFD SPEED CONTROL 6 6 0-10 V DC SIGNAL
ACCEPTANCE OF 0-
& FEEDBACK
10V DC SIGNAL
POTENTIAL FREE
SECONDARY PUMPS POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT AT
4.05 AUTO/ MANUAL 6 CONTACT IN PUMP
AUTO/MANUAL
STATUS MONITORING PANEL
SWITCH
CONDENSOR WATER PUMP 3
CONDENSER WATER
5.01 PUMP START/STOP 3
COMMAND
STARTER PANEL PANEL
WATER SUITABLE
CONDENSER WATER DIFFERENTIAL INSERTION
5.02 3
PUMP RUN STATUS PRESSURE PROVISION IN
5
SWITCH WATER LINE
CONDENSER WATER SIGNAL FROM POTENTIAL FREE
5.03 PUMP AUTO/MANUAL 3 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT IN PUMP
OPERATION STATUS CONTACT. PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
CONDENSOR PUMP CONTACT AT
5.04 3 CONTACT IN PUMP
TRIP STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
COOLING TOWER 3
SUITABLE
COOLING TOWER
IMMERSION INSERTION
6.01 SUMP OUTLET 3
TEMP SENSOR PROVISION IN
TEMPERATURE.
WATER LINE
COOLING TOWER FAN CONTACT FROM POTENTIAL FREE
6 6.01 3
ON/OFF COMMAND. BMS TO CT OUTPUT IN CT
STARTER PANEL PANEL
COOLING TOWER FAN
6.01 3 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT IN CT
TRIP STATUS.
CONTACT. PANEL
COOLING TOWER FAN SIGNAL FROM POTENTIAL FREE
6.01 AUTO/ MANUAL 3 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT IN CT
STATUS. CONTACT. PANEL
PART-B 137
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO
COOLING TOWER MOTORISED MOTORISED
6.01 ISOLATION VALVE 3 BUTTER FLY BUTTERFLY VALVE
(OPEN/CLOSE) VALVE WITH & ACTUATOR
LIMIT SWITCH
FOR POSITION
STATUS.
SUITABLE
SUMP LEVEL
WATER BI-LEVEL INSERTION
6.01 MONITORING 6
SWITCH PROVISION IN
LOW/HIGH
COOLING TOWER
SUITABLE
MAKE UP WATER WATER BI-LEVEL INSERTION
6.01 3
TANK SWITCH PROVISION IN
COOLING TOWER
SUITABLE
6.01 PH MONITORING 1 PH SENSOR INSERTION
PROVISION
SUITABLE
6.01 TDS MONITORING 1 TDS SENSOR INSERTION
PROVISION
SUITABLE
HARDNESS HARDNESS
6.01 1 INSERTION
MONITORING SENSOR
PROVISION
81 19 33 6 60
LOW SIDE WORK

AIR
HANDLING 86
UNIT
AHU START/STOP CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
1.01 86
COMMAND BMS FROM FAN OUTPUT IN AHU
STARTER PANEL PANEL
AIR DIFFERENTIAL SUITABLE
AHU BLOWER RUN
1.02 86 PRESSURE INSERTION
STATUS
SWITCH PROVISION IN AHU
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
AHU AUTO/MANUAL CONTACT AT
1 1.03 86 CONTACT IN AHU
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
SUITABLE
ROOM
ROOM AIR INSTALLATION
1.04 172 TEMPERATURE +
TEMPERATURE & RH PROVISION IN
RH SENSOR
ROOM
1.06 AHU FILTER STATUS 86 PRESSURE INSERTION
PART-B 138
2 / 3 WAY CONTROL
VALVE BY HVAC,
CHW VALVE
1.07 86 0-10 V DC SIGNAL WITH ACCEPTANCE
MODULATION
OF 0-10 V DC
SIGNAL
2 / 3 WAY CONTROL
VALVE BY HVAC,
HW VALVE
MODULATION
OF 0-10 V DC
SIGNAL
VFD BY HVAC
AHU VFD SPEED CONTRACTOR WITH
1.09 86 0-10 V DC SIGNAL
CONTROL ACCEPTANCE OF 0-
10V DC SIGNAL
VOLT FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT FROM
1.10 FIRE DAMPER STATUS 91 CONTACT IN
DAMPER
DAMPER PANEL
ACTUATOR
VOLT FREE
MOTORIZED DAMPER ACCEPTANCE OF
CONTACT TO
1.11 START/STOP 70 POTENTIAL FREE
DAMPER
COMMAND OUTPUT
ACTUATOR
VOLT FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
MOTORIZED DAMPER CONTACT FROM
1.12 70 CONTACT IN
STATUS DAMPER
DAMPER PANEL
ACTUATOR
IO POINT FOR AIR HANDLING UNIT 419 172 156 ### 0
TREATED FRESH AIR UNIT 2

TFA START/STOP CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
2.01 2
COMMAND BMS FROM FAN OUTPUT IN TFA
STARTER PANEL PANEL
TFA BLOWER RUN
STATUS
SWITCH PROVISION IN TFA
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
TFA AUTO/MANUAL CONTACT AT
2.03 2 CONTACT IN TFA
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
2
DUCT SUITABLE
RETURN AIR
2.04 2 TEMPERATURE INSERTION
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR PROVISION IN TFA
2.05 TFA FILTER STATUS 2 PRESSURE INSERTION
SWITCH PROVISION IN TFA
2 / 3 WAY CONTROL
VALVE BY HVAC,
CHW VALVE
MODULATION
OF 0-10 V DC
SIGNAL
PART-B 139
VFD BY HVAC
TFA VFD SPEED CONTRACTOR WITH
2.07 2 0-10 V DC SIGNAL
10V DC SIGNAL
INDOOR AIR CO2 SUITABLE
DUCT CO2
2.08 MONITOR ON RETURN 2 INSERTION
SENSOR
SIDE PROVISION IN TFA
IO POINT FOR TREATED FRESH AIR
6 4 2 4 0
UNIT
HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL WITHOUT

2
COIL
HRW START/STOP CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
3.01 6
STARTER PANEL PANEL
HRW BLOWER RUN
STATUS
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
HRW AUTO/MANUAL CONTACT AT
3 3.03 6 CONTACT IN AHU
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
VFD BY HVAC
FANS VFD SPEED CONTRACTOR WITH
3.04 4 0-10 V DC SIGNAL
10V DC SIGNAL
3.05 HRW FILTER STATUS 4 PRESSURE INSERTION
IO POINT FOR HEAT RECOVERY
14 0 6 4 0
WHEEL
HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL WITH COIL 4

HRW START/STOP CONTACT TO POTENTIAL FREE
4.01 12
STARTER PANEL PANEL
HRW BLOWER RUN
STATUS
POTENTIAL FREE
4 POTENTIAL FREE
HRW AUTO/MANUAL CONTACT AT
4.03 12 CONTACT IN AHU
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
2 / 3 WAY CONTROL
VALVE BY HVAC,
CHW VALVE
MODULATION
OF 0-10 V DC
SIGNAL
PART-B 140
VFD BY HVAC
FAN VFD SPEED CONTRACTOR WITH
4.05 8 0-10 V DC SIGNAL
10V DC SIGNAL
4.06 HRW FILTER STATUS 8 PRESSURE INSERTION
IO POINT FOR HEAT RECOVERY
28 0 12 12 0
WHEEL
ANIMAL HOUSE ROOM POINTS 1

SUITABLE
ROOM PRESSURE INSTALLATION
5.01 ROOM PRESSSURE 29
SENSOR PROVISION IN
ROOM
SUITABLE
ROOM TEMP + INSTALLATION
5.02 ROOM TEMP + RH 58
RH SENSOR PROVISION IN
ROOM
MOTORIZED
ACTUATOR BY
5.03 MOTORIZED DAMPER 8 0-10 V DC SIGNAL HVAC, WITH
ACCEPTANCE OF 0-
10 V DC SIGNAL
ACCEPTANCE OF
HEATER START/STOP POTENTIAL FREE POTENTIAL FREE
5.04 26
5 COMMAND CONTACT OUTPUT IN AHU
PANEL
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT AT
5.05 HEATER RUN STATUS 26 CONTACT IN
AUTO/MANUAL
STARTER PANEL
SWITCH
POTENTIAL FREE
HEATER POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT AT
5.06 AUTO/MANUAL 26 CONTACT IN
AUTO/MANUAL
STATUS STARTER PANEL
SWITCH
DUCT SUITABLE
HEATER ELEMENT AIR
5.07 26 TEMPERATURE INSERTION
INLET TEMPERATURE
SENSOR PROVISION IN TFA
HEATER ELEMENT AIR DUCT SUITABLE
5.08 OUTLET 26 TEMPERATURE INSERTION
TEMPERATURE SENSOR PROVISION IN TFA
IO POINT FOR ANIMAL HOUSE 52 139 26 8 0
PRESSURIZATION FAN 29
6 6.01 FAN ON/OFF 29
BMS TO FAN OUTPUT IN AHU
STARTER PANEL PANEL
PART-B 141
DIFFERENTIAL SUITABLE
FAN AIR FLOW
6.02 29 SWITCH ACROSS INSERTION
STATUS
FANS PROVISION IN FAN
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
FAN AUTO / MANUAL CONTACT AT
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
IO POINT FOR FAN COIL UNIT 58 0 29 0 0
VENTILATION FANS 12
7.01 FAN ON/OFF 12
BMS TO FAN OUTPUT IN AHU
STARTER PANEL PANEL
DIFFERENTIAL SUITABLE
FAN AIR FLOW
7 7.02 12 SWITCH ACROSS INSERTION
STATUS
FANS PROVISION IN FAN
POTENTIAL FREE
POTENTIAL FREE
FAN AUTO / MANUAL CONTACT AT
STATUS AUTO/MANUAL
PANEL
SWITCH
IO POINT FOR VENTILATION FANS 24 0 12 0 0
FIRE AND PLUMBING PUMPS

FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN FIRE
POTENTIAL FREE FIGHTING PANEL BY
FIRE BOOSTER PUMPS
10.01 11 CONTACT FROM FF CONTRACTOR.
RUN STATUS
BMS TO FF PANEL BMS CONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
SUITABLE
HYDRANT PUMP
PRESSURE INSERTION
10.02 PRESSURE 1
SENSOR PROVISION IN
MONITROING
WATER LINE
SUITABLE
10 SPRINKLER PUMP
PRESSURE INSERTION
10.03 PRESSURE 1
SENSOR PROVISION IN
MONITROING
WATER LINE
SUITABLE
JOCKEY PUMP
PRESSURE INSERTION
10.04 PRESSURE 1
SENSOR PROVISION IN
MONITROING
WATER LINE
PF CONTACT
JOCKY / SPRINKLER / POTENTIAL FREE PROVISION IN FIRE
10.05 HYDRENT PUMP AUTO 3 CONTACT FROM FIGHTING PANEL BY
MANUAL STATUS BMS TO FF PANEL FF CONTRACTOR.
BMS CONTRACTOR
PART-B 142
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN FIRE
JOCKY / SPRINKLER / POTENTIAL FREE FIGHTING PANEL BY
10.06 HYDRENT PUMP RUN 3 CONTACT FROM FF CONTRACTOR.
STATUS BMS TO FF PANEL BMS CONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN FIRE
FIRE PUMP RUN POTENTIAL FREE FIGHTING PANEL BY
10.07 STATUS (DIESEL 1 CONTACT FROM FF CONTRACTOR.
DRIVEN) BMS TO FF PANEL BMS CONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR FIRE FIGHTING 18 3 0 0 0
WATER SUPPLY PUMPS IN PUMP

ROOM
FILTER FEED PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
PUMP ON / OFF 2 AMP, 230 V
8 8.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
PUMP AUTO MANUAL CONTACT FROM
8.02 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
8.03 PUMP RUN STATUS 2 PLUMBING
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 143
SUITABLE
INSERTION
PROVISION.
PUMP DISCHARGE WATER PRESSURE
8.04 2 PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER &
WIRE UP TO DDC BY
BMS CONTRACTOR
IO POINT FOR FILTER FEED PUMPS 4 2 2 0 0
SOFTNER FEED PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
8 8.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
8.02 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SOFTNER FEED
4 0 2 0 0
PUMPS
HYDROPNEUMATIC
(DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY 3
TO OHT)
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 144
IO POINT FOR HYDROPNEUMATIC

3 0 0 0 0
(DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY TO OHT)
HYDROPNEUMATIC SYSTEM
(SOFT WATER SUPPLY TO 2
OHT)
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
SYSTEM (SOFT WATER SUPPLY TO 2 0 0 0 0
OHT)
SUBMERSIBLE DRAINAGE
2
PUMPS
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
8 8.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
8.02 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SUBMERSIBLE
4 0 2 0 0
DRAINAGE PUMPS
SEWAGE TREATEMENT PUMPS
SEWAGE LIFTING PUMPS 2
PART-B 145
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
PUMP START/STOP 2 AMP, 230 V
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
12 12.02 PUMP RUN STATUS 2 PLUMBING
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
PUMP AUTO/MANUAL CONTACT FROM
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SEWAGE LIFTING
4 0 2 0 0
PUMP
SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS
2
(FOR TRANSFER OF SLUDGE)
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
12 PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PUMP AUTO/MANUAL POTENTIAL FREE
12.03 2 PROVISION IN
STATUS CONTACT FROM
PUMP STARTER
PART-B 146
BMS TO PUMP PANEL BY

PANEL PLUMBING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SLUDGE TRANSFER
4 0 2 0 0
PUMPS (FOR TRANSFER OF SLUDGE)
SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS
(FOR RE-CIRCULATION OF 2
SLUDGE FOR ANOXIC TANK)
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PUMPS (FOR RE-CIRCULATION OF 4 0 2 0 0
SLUDGE FOR ANOXIC TANK)
SUBMERSIBLE MIXTURE IN
2
ANOXIC TANK
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12 12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR.
FROM MCC
BMSCONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 147
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SUBMERSIBLE
4 0 2 0 0
MIXTURE IN ANOXIC TANK
AIR BLOWER PUMPS 3
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 3 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 3 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR AIR BLOWER PUMPS 6 0 3 0 0
PART-B 148
FILTER PRESS FEED SCREW

2
PUMPS
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR FILTER PRESS FEED
4 0 2 0 0
SCREW PUMPS
FILTER FEED PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
12
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 149
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
TREATED WATER TRANSFER PUMPS

(FLUSHING WATER SUPPLY TO 3
OHT).
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SEWAGE LIFTING
3 0 0 0 0
PUMP
(GARDEN IRRIGATION WATER 2
SUPPLY)
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
SYSTEM (GARDEN IRRIGATION 2 0 0 0 0
WATER SUPPLY)
SUMP PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12 12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 150
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SUMP PUMPS 4 0 2 0 0
ULTRAFILTRATION PLANT 4
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR ULTRAFILTRATION
4 0 0 0 0
PLANT
HYPO CHLORINE DOSING
1
PUMP 1PH
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR HYPO CHLORINE
1 0 0 0 0
DOSING PUMP 1PH
EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT
EFFLUENT LIFTING PUMPS 2
PART-B 151
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR EFFLUENT LIFTING
4 0 2 0 0
PUMPS
SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
12 PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PUMP AUTO/MANUAL POTENTIAL FREE
12.03 2 PROVISION IN
STATUS CONTACT FROM
PUMP STARTER
PART-B 152
BMS TO PUMP PANEL BY

PANEL PLUMBING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
4 0 2 0 0
PUMPS
AIR BLOWER PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR.
PANEL
BMSCONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR AIR BLOWER PUMPS 4 0 2 0 0
FILTER PRESS FEED SCREW
2
PUMPS
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12 12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 153
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR FILTER PRESS FEED
4 0 2 0 0
SCREW PUMPS
FILTER FEED PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 154
TREATED WATER TRANSFER

2
PUMPS
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR TREATED WATER
4 0 2 0 0
TRANSFER PUMPS
SUMP PUMPS 2
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 2 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
12
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PART-B 155
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 2 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR SUMP PUMPS 4 0 2 0 0
FLASHMIXER PUMPS 1
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 1 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR.
PANEL
BMSCONTRACTOR
TO WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 1 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR FLASHMIXER PUMPS 2 0 1 0 0
FLOCCULATOR PUMPS 1
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
RELAY OUTPUT @
PUMP STARTER
12 12.01 1 PANEL BY
COMMAND AND WIRING
PLUMBING
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR. BMS
CONTRACTOR TO
PART-B 156
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
PANEL BY
12.03 1 PLUMBING
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR FLOCCULATOR
2 0 1 0 0
PUMPS
HYPO CHLORINE DOSING
1
PUMP 1PH
RELAY CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
RELAY OUTPUT @
PANEL BY
12.01 1 PLUMBING
COMMAND AND WIRING
CONTRACTOR. BMS
FROM MCC
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
PUMP STARTER
POTENTIAL FREE
12 PANEL BY
CONTACT FROM
BMS TO PUMP
CONTRACTOR. BMS
PANEL
CONTRACTOR TO
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
PF CONTACT
PROVISION IN
POTENTIAL FREE
PUMP STARTER
12.03 1 PANEL BY
STATUS BMS TO PUMP
PLUMBING
PANEL
CONTRACTOR. BMS
CONTRACTOR TO
PART-B 157
WIREUP TO THE
DDC
IO POINT FOR HYPO CHLORINE

2 0 1 0 0
DOSING PUMP 1PH
LIFT 8
PFC CONTACT IN
WIRING FROM
13.01 LIFT RUN STATUS 8 LIFT PANEL BY LIFT
MCC
VENDOR
PFC CONTACT IN
LIFT OUT OF SERVICE WIRING FROM
13.02 8 LIFT PANEL BY LIFT
STATUS MCC
VENDOR
PFC CONTACT IN
FIRE EMERGENCY WIRING FROM
13.03 8 LIFT PANEL BY LIFT
ALARM MCC
VENDOR
VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
13 LIFT. LIFT VENDOR
TO SHOW THE
PARAMETERS ON
THE MODSCAN
SOFTWARE /BACSTACK/CIMETR
13.04 LIFT INTEGRATION 80
INTEGRATION ICS SOFTWARE
BEFORE
INTEGRATING TO
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
LIFT TO BE DONE BY
THE LIFT VENDOR
IO POINT FOR LIFT 24 0 0 0 80
DG SYSTEM 4
PFC CONTACT IN
WIRING AND
14.01 DG ON/OFF STATUS 4 DG PANEL BY DG
TERMINATION
VENDOR
PFC CONTACT IN
WIRING AND
14.02 DG TRIP STATUS 4 DG PANEL BY DG
TERMINATION
VENDOR
SUITABLE FLANGE
14
TO BE PROVIDED BY
DG BATTERY VOLTAGE DC VOLTAGE
14.03 4 DG VENDOR FOR
STATUS TRANSDUCER
MOUNTING LEVEL
TRANSMITTER
PFC CONTACT IN
WIRING AND
14.04 DG OVERLOAD ALARM 4 DG PANEL BY DG
TERMINATION
VENDOR
PART-B 158
SUITABLE FLANGE
FLAMEPROOF TO BE PROVIDED BY
DIESEL DAY TANK
14.05 4 LEVEL DG VENDOR FOR
LOW LEVEL ALARM
TRANSMITTER MOUNTING LEVEL
TRANSMITTER
DG VENDOR SHALL
PROVIDE NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
TO RELEASE
DG MICROPROCESSOR INFORMATION ON
INTEGRATION FOR SOFTWARE MODBUS-RTU AND
14.06 80
PARAMETER INTEGRATION MAPPING DETAILS
MONITORING .SNAP SHOTS OF
ON-LINE
PARAMTERS TO BE
SHOWN TO BMS
VENDOR
IO POINT FOR STP 16 4 0 0 80
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
VFD. VFD VENDOR
TO SHOW THE
PARAMETERS ON
BACNET / THE MODSCAN
1 VFD 107 1070 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
VFD'S TO BE DONE
BY THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
ENERGY METERS.
BACNET /
VENDOR TO SHOW
MODBUS
THE PARAMETERS
2 ENERGY METERS 1 10 INTERFACE
ON THE MODSCAN
HARDWARE/
/BACSTACK/CIMETR
LICENSE
ICS SOFTWARE
BEFORE
INTEGRATING TO
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
PART-B 159
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
ENERGY METERS TO
BE DONE BY THE
HVAC CONTRACTOR
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
UPS. VENDOR TO
SHOW THE
PARAMETERS ON
3 UPS 8 80 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
UPS TO BE DONE BY
THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
PAC. VENDOR TO
SHOW THE
PARAMETERS ON
4 PAC 4 40 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
PAC TO BE DONE BY
THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
PART-B 160
HVAC VENDOR TO
PROVIDE RS 485
MODBUS / BACNET
INTERFACE IN EACH
VAV. VENDOR TO
SHOW THE
PARAMETERS ON
5 VAV 104 624 INTERFACE ICS SOFTWARE
HARDWARE/ BEFORE
BMS. ALL MAPPING
DETAILS & THE
MASTER/SLAVE ID
SETTING IN THE
VAV TO BE DONE
BY THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
IO POINT FOR SOFTWARE
0 0 0 0 1824
INTEGRATION
754 324 283 286 1984
PART-B 161
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

Equipment Approved makes
CCTV SYSTEM
1 CCTV CAMERAS ( DOME,BULLET , Honeywell- Equip / Pelco – Syrix Global /
PTZ) Axis – Q Series
2 VMS, NVR Software applications Honeywell- Maxpro / Pelco – Video Expert /
Axis
4 LED TV Samsung / LG / Sony.
5 CAT – 6 UTP CABLES Systimax / Corning/ AMP
6 PERSONAL COMPUTER/SERVER Dell / HP

(PC).
7 MANAGED NETWORK SWITCH Cisco / HP/ Juniper
(L2/L3)
8 PVC CONDUIT (ISI MARKED). BEC / AKG / Polypack
DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM
1 Cat 6 UTP Cable Systimax / Corning/ AMP
2 Face Plate Systimax / Corning/ AMP
3 24 Port Cat-6 Patch Panel Systimax / Corning/ AMP
4 Cat 6 UTP Patch Cord Systimax / Corning/ AMP
5 Single Mode OFC 24 Core Systimax / Corning/ AMP
6 Multimode OFC 6/12/24 Core OM3 Systimax / Corning/ AMP
7 Fibre Optic LIU Systimax / Corning/ AMP
8 SC/ LC Coupler / Adapter Systimax / Corning/ AMP
9 Single Mode OS1/OS2 Pigtails Systimax / Corning/ AMP
1 L2 /L3/PoE Switch HP / Cisco/ Juniper
1 Fire Wall Palo Alto/ Fortinet/ Cisco
1 Wireless access points Aruba / Cisco/ Juniper
PART-B 162
1 Network Rack NETRACK, WALRACK, RITTAL
Avaya / Cisco / Nortel
IP TELEPHONY
1 IP Telephones Avaya / Cisco / Nortel
2 IPPBX, Voice Mail System Avaya / Cisco / Nortel
3 MDF Krone / TVS R&M
4 Analog Handsets Panasonic / Beetel
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
1 Main access controller Honeywell - Prowatch / Cardax/ Lenel –

Onguard
2 DOOR controller Honeywell - Prowatch / Cardax/ Lenel –

Onguard
3 Card readers / smart cards Honeywell / Cardax/ Lenel
4 Electromagnetic locks BEC / Assa Abloy / HID
5 Access control software Honeywell – Prowatch 4.3 / Cardax/ Lenel –

Onguard 7.0 and above
6 Push To Exit Switch Honeywell / Assa Abloy / HID
7 Multi strand Copper cable Havells / Polycab / Rallison
8 PVC Conduit BEC / AKG / POlypack
9. BOOM BARRIER Magnetic Controls / Neptune Automation-

FAAC/ Gunnebo
Building Management System
A Controller/Software
1 Central Control BMS Server IBM/HP/DELL/ Compaq
2 Printer HP/Canon
PART-B 163
3 Building management System Siemens/Honeywell EBI/Johnson

Controls/Schneider/ Anergy
4 Building Management Web Based Server Siemens/Honeywell EBI/Johnson

Software Controls/Schneider / Anergy
5 Programmable & Application Specifier Siemens/Honeywell EBI /Johnson

Controller (DDC) Controls/Schneider/ Anergy
6 Web Server Engines Siemens/Honeywell EBI / Johnson

(Network/Supervisory Controller) Controls/Schneider/ Anergy
7 System Intergration Units for 3RD Party Siemens/Honeywell EBI/Johnson

software Integration Controls/Schneider/ Anergy
8 Enclosure for DDC Controller Rittal/Siemens/BCH
B Sensor & Field Devices
1 Immersion type temperature sensors Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Johnson

Controls/Schneider/Greystone
2 Ultrasonic BTU Meter/Flow Meter Siemens/Forbes Marshall / L&G /

Kele/Dywer/Greystone
3 Outside T+RH Sensor Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Schneider/Invens

ys/Greystone
4 Differential pressure Switch Air/Water Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Johnson

5 Differential Pressure Sensor-Air/Water Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Johnson

6 Room/Duct Type Temp Sensor Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Johnson

7 Pressure Sensor Water Siemens/Honeywell/Dwyer/Johnson

8 Water Level Switches Kele/Veskler/Flipro/ABB/Johnson Controls

/Siemens/Honeywell/Schneider/Greystone
9 Flame Proof Level Switches Kele/Veskler/Flipro/ABB
PART-B 164
1 DC Voltage /Current/Power Factor L&T/ABB/Omicron/Honeywell/Johnsons

Transducer Controls/Schneider/Greystone
1 Current Relay L&T/ABB/Situ/Omron/Johnson Controls /

Siemens/Honeywell/Schneider/Greystone
1 CO Sensor Dwyer/Greystone/MSR
Germany/Elektron/Johnson Controls
/Siemens/Honeywell/GE/Schneider
1 CO2 Sensor Siemens/Dwyer/Honeywell/Johnson

Controls/MSR (Germany) / Schneider
/Greystone
1 Energy Meter Schneider/L&T/ABB/Siemens / Trinity
1 PH Analyser/ TDS Analyser/ Water Hach/Omicron/Forbes Marshall/ABB

Hardness
C Wiring & Conduiting
1 Signal Cable , PVC Insulated , tinned Fusion Polymer/Polycab/Finolex/Bonton

Copper
2 Communication Cable , PVC Insulated , Fusion Polymer/Polycab/Finolex/Bonton /RR

tinned Cable/Teleflex/Excel
3 PVC Conduit of 20 & 25 mm dia BEC/AKG/Polycab/Precision/NIC/Steelcraft
4 MS Conduit of 20 & 25 mm dia BEC/AKG/Polycab/Precision/NIC/Steelcraft
5 Lan Cable Systimax / Corning/ AMP
6 Networking Components CISCO/HP/ JUNIPER
-0-0-0-
PART-B 165
INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE TECHNOLOGY
Schedule of Quantities for SITC of CCTV, Data Networking, EPABX, Access control, Boom Barrier & Building Management
System for Institute of Nano Science & Technology at Knowlede city, Sector-81 Mohali, Punjab
Item Amount
Description Unit Qty Rate (In Rs.)
No. (in Rs)
1 2 3 4 5
I CCTV SYSTEM
1.0 Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of IP
Network TDN Low-Light IR Rugged Dome Camera,
1/2.8" CMOS, 2 MP @ 25fps or better, triple stream, Min.
Illumination required 0.01 lux @ F1.4(color), 120dB True
WDR, Min. pixels : 1920 × 1080, triple stream, 2.7–12
mm motorized focus & zoom lens, BLC, HLC, 3DNR,
Privacy Mask, 3 IR LEDs Smart IR with upto 50m IR
distance, Dual channel Audio G.711a/G.711u/AAC, Nos 188 53098 9982424
128GB SD card support, Alarm: 2 In/ 1out, PoE, H.264
High Profile and MJPEG, PoE Class 3 and 12V DC, IP
67, IK 10 vandal proof, Having Operating temp range :
–40°C to 60° C. Certifications: ONVIF Profile S & Profile
G compliant, UL, CSA 60950-22, CE (EN 50130-4 & EN
55022) , FCC Part 15 & RoHS compliant.

Network TDN Low-Light IR Bullet Camera, 1/2.8" CMOS,
2 MP @ 25fps or better, triple stream, Min. Illumination
required 0.01 lux @ F1.4 (color), 120dB True WDR, Min.
Pixels 1920 × 1080, triple stream, 2.7 – 12 mm
motorized focus & zoom lens, BLC, HLC, 3DNR, Privacy
Mask, 4 IR LEDs Smart IR with upto 60m IR distance,
Dual channel Audio G.711a/G.711u/AAC, 128GB SD Nos 126 62951 7931826
card support, Alarm: 2 In/ 1out, PoE, H.264 High Profile
and MJPEG, PoE Class 3 and 12V DC, IP 67, IK 10
vandal proof, Having Operating temp range : –40°C to
60° C. Certifications: ONVIF Profile S & Profile G
compliant, UL, CSA 60950-22, CE (EN 50130-4 & EN
55022) , FCC Part 15 & RoHS compliant.
3.0 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of 4 Mtr.

Nos 40 24907 996280
MS Pole with 75 mm dia for CCTV camera

Network TDN Low-Light PTZ Camera with auto tracking,
Illumination required 0.005 lux @ F1.6 (color) & 0.0005
lux @ F 1.6(B/W) or better, 120dB True WDR or better,
Min. Pixels 1920 × 1080, triple stream, 6mm –180 mm
or 4.5 to 135mm 30x motorized focus & zoom lens, BLC,
HLC, 3DNR, Defog, Electronic Image Stabilitzation,
Privacy Mask, Internal / External Illuminatrion range with
Nos 10 301070 3010700
upto 200m IR distance, Dual channel Audio
G.711a/G.711u/AAC, 128GB SD card support, Alarm: 7
In/ 2 out, PoE, H.264 High Profile and MJPEG, PoE
Class 5 and 12V DC/24VAC, IP 67, IK 10 vandal proof,
Having Operating temp range : –10°C to 65° C.
Certifications: ONVIF Profile S compliant, UL, CSA
60950-22, CE (EN 50130-4 & EN 55022) , FCC Part 15
& RoHS compliant.
5.0 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of 6 Mtr.

Nos 10 34705 347050
MS Pole with 75 mm dia for CCTV camera
PART-C 1
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
6.0 Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of

Network Video Management & Monitoring Software
(NVMMS) system with distributed architecture to collect,
manage and present video from all the cameras and
supports emerging technologies in the industry, like 4K
resolution, H.265 video compression codec, multi-
imager/lens cameras and 360° fisheye cameras. The
NVMMS shall have option to support database
redundancy and 1+1 and N+M NSM failover features for
unforeseen/maintenance scenarios for increased system
reliability. NVMMS shall support upto 500 cameras & 10
user clients without any additional version upgrade. The
NVMMS should support network joystick controller, GPU
rendering support for H.264 and H.265 decoding , video
on demand, Adaptive video throttling, rule engine, Nos 1 10701670 10701670
operatore role management, server based Video Motion
Detection (VMD), edge storage backfill support,
bookmark with manual comment, bookmark based
search, timeline search, Preview search, synchronous
playback from all NSMs, monitor wall support,
surrounding camera mode, Cybersecured with features
such as Digital Signing, General Data Protection
Regulation (GDPR) compliance, HTTPS & SSL base,
smart web client, secured firewall configuration,
password expiry, non-recoverable password; support
ANDROID & iOS phones, seamless integration with
intgegrated security platform which provides HSDK&API
for further integration with 3rd party systems. NVMMS
shall support iLIDS certified Analytics like
7.0 SITC of Central Video Management Server with following

specifications:
Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit
Microsoft SQL Express 2012
Single Intel® 6 Core Xeon® E5 2630V2 2.6 GHz
System Memory (RAM): 16GB
Optical Drive: DVD+/-RW
Hard Disk Drives: Two separate hard drives or two sets
of RAID arrays.
Disk/RAID set 1 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM
SCSI 146 GB
Disk/RAID set 2 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM
Nos 1 985320 985320
SCSI 146 GB
Network Interface Card (NIC): Dual or compatible pair of
NICs, 1 Gbps
Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse
pointing device
Graphics Adapter: 32-bit color or higher, video resolution
1280x768 pixels, 65K colors non-interlaced
For installations where the system is integrated with
recording software with more than 500 cameras, Quote
for a separate database server.
PART-C 2
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
8.0 Supply Installation Testing & Commissioning of Network
Storage Manager(NSM) supporting ONVIF Profile S & G,
PSIA, real time streaming protocol (RTSP) standards,
emerging technologies in the industry, like 4K resolution,
H.265 video compression codec, 3D PTZ control, 360°
Fisheye camera and multi-imager/lens camera support,
and intelligence events. System proposed shall have
scalability of upto 128 cameras per NSM with sufficient
licenses to record all the cameras in this requirement.
NSM shall support simultaneous recording, live
monitoring, playback/search of recorded video for up to
4K resolution on all cameras, taking snapshots and
viewing presets for PTZ cameras and system
management. NSM shall have integrated Dashboard to
easily monitor the health and recording status, Flexible Nos 4 6021400 24085600
retention time / archive time for cameras, Smart Motion
detection, Role-based operator privileges supporting
Windows and local users, Video Archiving, Multi-stream
support, Advanced security features with encryption
support for communication between desktop client to
NSM and secure https login for Web Client and Mobile
apps, Event history and operator log reporting with export
to PDF, Crystal Reports, MS Excel/MS Word. NSM Shall
support scheduled backfilling of the recordings from the
edge storage/SD card of cameras to the NSM using
ONVIF Profile G for robust recording against temporary
network failure, N+1/N+M recorder failover and failback
automatically or manually to have maximum system
uptime and recording continuity.
NSM shall be 2U-12 bay dual module design storage
server, with 12Gb/s SAS interface; Single/Dual Intel
Xeon E2620 v4- 8 core 2.1 GHz, Mnimum 16GB RAM,
4nos. x 1G NIC, 2 Nos. x 10G SFP; 2 nos. x USB 3.0; 2
nos. x USB 2.0; RAID 0,1,5,6,10,50,60 support,
Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit OS versions
recommended)/Windows 10/Windows 2008 Server R2
SP1 Operating System or better , Microsoft SQL Express
2012. The NSM shall be complete system for
satisfactory surveillance operations with all necessary
softwares, licenses, required PC Hardware, Storage,
accessories etc., civil, electrical works & peripheral
items, as required as per specification in Annexure A at
site of work inline with the Engineer in Charge
instructions.
The System proposed should have 132TB Storage
expandable upto 300TB. Storage must to calculated for
30 days of recording based on 2MP, 25fps on higher
native resolution.
9.0 OPERATIONAL Manager Work Station with below

specification, Intel Core i7-6700, 3.4GHz, 8GB RAM,
Windows 10 (64 Bit) OS, DVD R/W, Integrated Intel HD Nos 10 120428 1204280
graphics 530 and NVIDIA Quadro NVS 315 1 GB PCIE x
16 LP supporting 4 Monitors.
10.0 43 inch Full HD LED Colour Display Nos 10 60214 602140
PART-C 3
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
11.0 Supplying and fixing of following sizes of medium class
PVC conduit along with accessories in surface/recess
including cutting the wall and making good the same in
case of recessed conduit as required
20mm Mtr 2000 84.00 168000
25mm Mtr 10000 90.00 900000
32mm Mtr 2000 92.00 184000
II DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM

Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
A
Active for CCTV & DATA
1.0 SITC of LAYER 2 PoE Access Switch, 24 x10/100/1000BaseT
PoE Ports, with 4 x 10G SFP+ ports and dedicated Stacking
Nos. 81 322966.00 26160246
ports with 3 Years Product Warranty.
2.0 SITC of LAYER 2 Access Switch, 24 x10/100/1000BaseT Ports,
with 4 x 10G SFP+ ports and dedicated Stacking ports with 3 Nos. 118 301070.00 35526260
Years Product Warranty.
3.0
SITC of LAYER 3 Distribution Switch, with 40-10Gig ports with
Nos. 4 2474248.00 9896992
2*40G QSFP ports with 3 Years Product Warranty Included,
4.0 SITC of LAYER 3 Core Switch, with 24-1/10/25Gig SFP+ ports
Nos. 2 1801805.00 3603610
with 3 Years Product Warranty Included,
5.0 SITC of 10GBASE-LR SFP Module, Single Mode Nos. 56 107838.00 6038928
6.0 SITC of 1G-SR-SFP Module, Multimode Nos. 280 34869.00 9763320
7.0 SITC of authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA)
Nos. 2 2163161.00 4326322
Solution with required license and hardware
8.0 SITC of Firewall in HA with 10G SFP+ Ports and 10G DAC
Nos. 1 1259020 1259020
Cables from Day-1
B
WiFi
1.0 SITC of dual-band 802.11abgn/ac Wave2 Wireless Access
Point. Mounts to ceiling and all accessories as per tender Nos. 250 93058.00 23264500
specifications.
2.0 SITC of Wireless Hardware Based AP Controller, BASE licensed
for up to 200 Access Points. Controller can be upgraded to
support up to 500 APs with AP license upgrades. All Nos. 1 2134860.00 2134860
accessories included. 3 Years Product warranty Support
included
3.0 NMS for above Devices scalable upto 1000 devices Nos. 1 2173884.00 2173884

C
Passive CAT-6 for CCTV & DATA
1.0 ETL Verified Category 6 U/UTP Cable, low smoke zero halogen
(IEC 60332-3-22), white jacket, 4 pair count, 1000 ft (305 m) Boxes 380 16148.00 6136240
length, 23 AWG.
2.0 CAT 6, Stranded, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (IEC 60332-1),
Nos 628 493.00 309604
Patch Cord, Yellow Jacket, 7 Feet
3.0 Category 6 U/UTP Information Outlet, white Nos 314 602.00 189028
Nos 1291 350.00 451850
Patch Cord, Blue Jacket, 3 Feet
PART-C 4
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
Nos 1291 492.00 635172
Nos 396 350.00 138600
Patch Cord, Red Jacket, 3 Feet
Nos 375 350.00 131250
Patch Cord, Red Jacket, 3 Feet
Nos 276 493.00 136068
9.0 Category 6 U/UTP Information Outlet, white Nos 2002 602.00 1205204
10.0 Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, Straight, Intelligent Ready, 24
Nos 124 9251.00 1147124
port

D
Passive OFC for CCTV & DATA
12Fiber, Singlemode, OS2, Single Jacket/Single Armor, Gel-
1 Mtrs 4000 153.00 612000
Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable
6 Fiber, Multimode, OM3, Single Jacket/Single Armor, Gel-
2 Mtrs 4000 195.00 780000
Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable
3 3*3, Square faceplate Single port Nos 505 142.00 71710
4 2-Port Faceplate Shuttered Square type White color Nos 851 153.00 130203
1U Sliding Face Plate shelf, up to 24 Duplex LC ports, with
5 Nos 80 10839.00 867120
Splice Trays
6 LC Duplex Adapter, Multimode OM3 Nos 460 493.00 226780
7 Nos 920 3722.00 3424240
OM3/OM4 LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm LSZH
8 LC-LC, MM Patch Cord, LSZH, 10 Feet 50/125 Nos 145 4927.00 714415
9 SMOUV Splice protectors Sleeve, PK of 100 Nos 10 10839.00 108390
1U Sliding Face Plate shelf, up to 24 Duplex LC ports, with
10 Nos 20 339.00 6780
Splice Trays
Singlemode, OS2, LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9
11 Nos 250 3065.00 766250
mm LSZH
12 LC-LC, SM Patch Cord, LSZH, 10 Feet Nos 42 4927.00 206934
13 SMOUV Splice protectors Sleeve, PK of 100 Nos 5 4,352.00 21760
E
Network Racks
15U Rack Frame, 600 mm(W) X 500 mm (D) X 498 mm
(H), Pre-configured 19" Wall-Mount Enclosure for
networks, Passive ventilation with vent slots, Wall-Mount
1 Nos 28 19159.00 536452
Enclosure with front glass door, Key lock arrangement,
Top and bottom with vents, 4 rubber grommets for cable
entry, Ø 50 mm, Mounting provision with two fans

2 Nos 58 11441.00 663578
entry, Ø 50 mm, Mounting provision with two fans.
Outdoor 9U Rack Frame, 600 mm(W) X 500 mm (D) X
498 mm (H), Pre-configured 19" Wall-Mount Enclosure
for networks, Passive ventilation with vent slots, Wall-
3 Mount Enclosure with front glass door, Key lock Nos 10 19953.00 199530
arrangement, Top and bottom with vents, 4 rubber
grommets for cable entry, Ø 50 mm, Mounting provision
with two fans
PART-C 5
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
4 Nos 2 47898.00 95796
42U Rack Frame, Width: 800 mm, Height: 1200 mm,

Depth: 1000 mm, Load capacity:10000 N, Sheet steel,
Doors, roof and side panels: Dipcoat-primed and powder-
5 coated, Glazed door: Single-pane safety glass, 3 mm Nos 2 97382.00 194764
III EPABX SYSTEM
EPABX ‐ IP PBX Telephone System

1 Supply of Server based IPPBX (should support 1:1
redundancy of Call Control Servers) with support upto
2000 lines with following features :‐ As Per technical
Specification
234 IP Users ( Licenses)
26 Analog Users Set 1 2243997.00 2243997
2 IP based Receptionist Soft Console along with 2 IP
phones
2 PRI Trunk lines (30 Channel) Circuit with CLIP Facility
Parallel ringing on GSM as well as on desk phone.
2 Supply of 6 port inbuilt Voice Mail System for Item No.1

Set 1 246330.00 246330
as Per technical Specification.
3 Supply of Type-1 IP phones compatible with Item No.1
nos. 10 60214.00 602140
4 Supply of Type-2 IP phones compatible with Item No.1
nos. 224 20254.00 4536896
5 Main Distribution Frame 10 pair with Modules No 3 35964.00 107892
6 Main Distribution Frame 50 pair with Modules No 1 27917.00 27917
7 Server/Network Rack 36 U for EPABX along with all
No 1 60707.00 60707
accessories
8 Analog PBT CLIP Telephone Instruments as per
Nos. 26 2463.00 64038
specification
9 PC for Receptionist Softconsole nos. 2 96890.00 193780
Installation, Testing, commissioning and Training of
Job 1 492660.00 492660
above items
IV ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART-C 6
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
1 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
Intelligent modular Controller (IMC) having 32 bit
embedded microprocessor chip, on board TCP /IP
10/100BaseT and utilizes a built-in Web server to
configure the hardware attributes of the controller, min
300,000 Card holders, 50,000 offline transaction buffer,
Weigand Interfaces for readers, Supports up to 8
different Card formats, Enhanced anti-passback
capabilities, Up to 32 access level per Card, 255 holidays
with grouping, 255 timezones, Individual extended door Nos. 3 355810.00 1067430
held open and strike times (ADA required), Up to 9-digit
user PIN codes, status LEDs, 2 dedicated inputs for
tamper and power failure status as per the specification
with enclosure, power supply & Maintenance free
Batteries with min 2 hours back up. IMC can be
expandable up to 64 Reader through Two reader
Interface Board(TRIB). Must be UL294 ,FCC, CE,EN as
per the specification.
2 Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of 2

reader control module to be connected with Main
controller supporting 2-standard Wiegand Data1/Data0
or Clock/Data communication reader, remote firmware
download, Six Form-C 5A at 28 VDC relay outputs, 08
Supervised Auxilary Inputs, 8 different formats
simultanously, Issue code support, Door contact
supervision (open/closed), REX push-button monitor, Nos. 69 158746.00 10953474
Strike control output, Bicolor reader status LED support
and 2-wire LED support, Beeper control, 2 dedicated
inputs for tamper and power failure status as per the
specification with enclosure, power supply &
Maintenance free Batteries with min 2 hours back up.
Must be UL294 ,FCC, CE,EN as per the specification.
3 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning Access

Control System Server Software for 200 readers/Doors,
2 concurrent clients, Graphical user Interfce, System
adminitration, Alarm Monitoring, MapDesigner, Guard
Tour, Automatic E-Mail Interface, LDAP Based Single
Sign On Login Users, Web based and Desktop based
thick client application, Mobile app for card holder
management and remote emergency door control,
Database Partitioning for multi tenent application,
Customized Crystal reporting module with report export Nos. 1 3120180.00 3120180
to excel, CSV and/or PDF formats, Area Occupancy
control, Virtulization Support on VMWare and Microsoft
Hyper-V in a single package as per specification. The
ACS Software should integrate seamless with CCTV
VMS without requirement of any SDK or any other
third party software.
4 Supply, testing and commissioning of Server as per the

Nos. 1 498134.00 498134
OEM specifications along with OS.
5 Supply, testing and commissioning of Client
Workstations along with 32 inch monitor as per the OEM Nos. 2 145061.00 290122
specifications along with OS.
PART-C 7
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
6 Supply Installation testing and Commissioning of multi
technology Biometric reader having option of
EM/HID_Prox/Mifare/DesFire_EV1/ iClass_SE/Seos.
Multi technology Biometric reader having min CPU of
1.2GQuad core ; minimum memory of 2GB flash & 256
MB RAM ; Optical Fingerprint Sensor ; Should have min
matching specs of 1:150000 match/Sec ; Maximum user
enrollment 1 lakh (One finger per user) & 2 lakh (2
Nos. 1 137397.00 137397
template per user) ; minimum log capacity of 10lakh ;
should support live fingerprint ; multiple communication
option like – OSDP ,weigand, RS485, TTL ; Should have
IP67 ingress Protection ; tamper supported; reader
should work at Operating Temperature of -20°C ~ 50°C
& Operating Humidity 0% ~ 80% (Non condensing)
7 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of UL

Listed 13.56MHz based Smart Card Readers, Read
Range 3" with weigand data output format, UL, CE, FCC
listed, Optical Tamper output, Operating Temp 0 to 60
Deg C, IP55 as per specification suitable for mounting on Each 132 14068.00 1856976
metal surface/metal frames or wooden frames wall or as
required based on site conditions.
8 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Long

Each 4 50087.00 200348
range Tag reader for Boom Barriers
9 Supply, testing and commissioning of iClass Smart
cards, 13.5MHz, ISO 14443A/B, 1 Kilo Byte (1KB)
memory 16 sectors, ISO Thickness, Smart Cards with Each 1000 465.00 465000
the possibility of printing the company details on its facia
using sublimation method.
10 Supply, testing and commissioning of passive smart
Each 500 246.00 123000
Tags sticker type for cars
11 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of UL listed
Double Leaf Electro Magnetic Lock of Suitable Capacity(Min Each 130 24633.00 3202290
1200 lbs).
12 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of UL listed
Single Leaf Electro Magnetic Lock of Suitable Capacity(Min Each 2 10401.00 20802
1200 lbs).
13 Supply and Fixing of ''U'' Bracket with Accessories. Each 132 1642.00 216744
14 Supply and Fixing of ''L'' Bracket with Accessories. Each 132 1916.00 252912
15 Supply Installation testing and Commissioning ofPush to exit
Each 132 2901.00 382932
Switch.
16 Supply Installation testing and Commissioning ofPush to exit
Each 132 137.00 18084
Switch.
17 Supply, Fixing and Laying of 8 Core multi strand, copper,
unarmoured Cable (between the every readers & the access Mtr 5000 153.00 765000
controllers).
18 Supply, Fixing and Laying of 2 Core x 1.5 Sq mm, multi
strand, copper, unarmoured cable (between the controller Mtr 5000 71.00 355000
and EM Lock/Request to exit button).
19.0 Supplying and fixing of following sizes of medium class
PVC conduit along with accessories in surface/recess
including cutting the wall and making good the same in
case of recessed conduit as required
20mm Mtr 3000 84.00 252000
PART-C 8
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
25mm Mtr 2000 90.00 180000
V BOOM BARRIER
1.0 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Hydraulic
Boom Barrier with 5 Meter of Arm length with 5.0 Sec.
opening / Closing with 100% duty cycle with
microprocessor based control board with arm support
and 3 station push button for opening & closing of
No. 4 405076.00 1620304
barriers, wide voltage range 230 V AC , 50 Hz, IP-44
rated galvanized and painted barrier for protection
against corrosion for outdoor application. Boom barrier to
be provided with photo cells (Safe beam) for closing
safety.
2.0 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of 3 x 1.5
RM 50 180.00 9000
sq. mm copper cable in 25 mm dia PVC conduit.
VI BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning
A (SITC) & Handing over the Building Management System
(BMS) and allied systems as per specifications as below.
BMS COMPUTER SYSTEM: PC I7 Processor or

Equivalet Server PC, Intel(R) Xeon(R) Processor,
2.93GHz, 4MB Cache with 4 GB RAM, & 1 TB HDD,
10/100 Mbps Ethernet card, USB connection & internal
modem, Microsoft(R) Windows(R) 7 OS Professional
1 Enterprise, Web server software, DVD-ROM Drive (with No. 1 239850.00 239850.00
RAM), 100/1000 Mbps NIC for Network connection and
anti virus software with 22" colour graphics monitor as
per Tender Specifications. Accessories included Optical
Mouse, Key Pad, Laserjet colour A4 printer with the
above BMS System configuration.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WEB-BASED

SERVER SOFTWARE: Supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the multi user with simultaneous
minimum 2 user web based Server license.Software for
Building Management System with dynamic graphics.
2 No. 1 1212954.00 1212954.00
The Web-Based Server software shall permit use of
Standard Web-Browsers such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, etc with EMAIL / SMS
OPTION AVAILABLE. Software Shall be capable of High
Availability Mode and Multiple Screen Aproach.
Note: All required Software with original license
competent with BMS software
PART-C 9
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
WEB SERVER ENGINES (NETWORK / SUPERVISORY

CONTROLLERS): Supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Microprocessor based 32 Bit ,UL
Listed Embedded Web Server Engine-cum-Network &
Supervisory controller on BACnet/IP units for connecting
all field DDC controllers and 3rd party System Integration
Units to it and for transferring data from field devices to
BMS Web-Server Software . The Network Controller
3 shall support BACnet standard MS/TP Protocol and shall Lot 1 485182.00 485182.00
be BACnet testing lab certified (BTL) and carry the BTL
label .The Network supervisory Controller shall have
imbedded graphic capability for generating web based
user graphics & support minimum of Five Concurrent
User .The Web user shall have the capability to access
all system data through one Network Controller. In case
of PC/Software Failure, User can access the system
using POT.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION UNITS FOR 3RD PARTY

SYSTEM SOFTWARE INTEGRATION - UL listed
Controllers Supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of BACnet/ MSTP Based System
Integration unit consisting of microprocessor based
4
controller units as required to communicate between the
Network Controller & the individual 3rd party
microprocessor system controllers like Chillers, VFDs,
DG, VAV, EM & UPS ETC. as per distribution given
below :
4.01 For Chillers Plant on Bacnet/IP Set 1 96145.00 96145.00
4.02 For DG on Bacnet/IP or MODBUS Set 1 96145.00 96145.00
4.03 For VAV's (10 points) Plant on Bacnet/IP Set 1 192291.00 192291.00
4.04 For VFD's Plant on MODBUS Set 1 192291.00 192291.00
4.05 For PAC & EM & UPS Plant on MODBUS Set 1 192291.00 192291.00
4.06 For Lift & DG on MODBUS Set 1 192291.00 192291.00
PROGRAMMABLE & APPLICATION SPECIFIC
CONTROLLER (DDC) - UL LISTED Supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of Programmable and
Application specific 32 bit, UL Listed BACnet (BTL
certified) Real Time controllers, field mounted configured
as per Data Point Summary for respective building
5 services and as per below distributions. The DDC shall
be with Minimum of 18 IO Points in it & with a polling
speed of 100 ms. The controller shall be housed in
vandal proof lockable MS cabinets. No Digital output to
Analog Output, Analog Output to Digital output Module
shall be allowed. Proprietry Protocol shall not be
accepted. As per Tender Specifications
5.01 DCC controllers for Chiller Plant Lot 1 507111.00 507111.00
5.02 DCC controllers for AHU (Max 2 AHU in 1 DDC) Lot 1 2635606.00 2635606.00
5.03 DCC controllers for TFA (Max 2 TFA in 1 DDC) Lot 1 70708.00 70708.00
5.04 DCC controllers for HRW & Animal House Lot 1 481755.00 481755.00
5.05 DCC controllers for Ventilation System Lot 1 500258.00 500258.00
5.06 DCC controllers for Animal House Lot 1 1439099.00 1439099.00
DCC controllers for Plumbing/Raw/Domestic Water
5.07 Lot 1 201474.00 201474.00
Pump & Tank
5.08 DCC controllers for Fire Fighting Lot 1 62567.00 62567.00
5.09 DCC controllers for WTP/STP Lot 1 62567.00 62567.00
PART-C 10
Item Amount
No. (in Rs)
5.10 DCC controllers for lift & DG Lot 1 226144.00 226144.00
Note
Each DDC shall have minimum 10% spare I/O points.
:
B Sensors and field devices

Supply, installation, testing, commissioning of
necessary Input sensor transmitters/transducers
comprising the following:
1 Immersion Temp Sensor for CHW line Nos. 7 4454.00 31178.00
2 Outside Temp & Humidity Sensor Nos. 2 30838.00 61676.00
3 Water Differential Pressure Switches for Water Pumps Nos. 15 17132.00 256980.00
Air Differential Pressure Switch DP for Monitoring
4 Nos. 241 4180.00 1007380.00
Blower, Fan & Filter Status
5 Room Type Temp cum RH Sensor Nos. 115 12472.00 1434280.00
6 Duct CO2 Sensor Nos. 2 32688.00 65376.00
7 Flow Meter Nos. 2 383760.00 767520.00
8 Level Switch Nos. 17 10279.00 174743.00
9 Duct Temp Sensor Nos. 54 4221.00 227934.00
10 Room Pressure Sensor Nos. 29 10773.00 312417.00
11 Current Relay Nos. 15 11650.00 174750.00
12 TDS Transmitter Nos. 1 205586.00 205586.00
13 Pressure Sensor Nos. 4 15762.00 63048.00
14 Water Hardness Transmitter Nos. 1 465994.00 465994.00
15 PH Sensor Nos. 1 130204.00 130204.00
16 Flame Proof Level Transmitter for DG Tank Nos. 4 62471.00 249884.00
C Conduiting , Wiring and cabling
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
1
following cables:
Supplying, laying, termination, testing and commissioning
a) of signal cables. (2 core 1 mm2), PVC insulated, tinned RM 15,000 85.00 1275000.00
copper conductor cable Un-armoured cable.
Supplying, laying, termination, testing and commissioning
of communication cables. (2 core 1 mm2), PVC
b) RM 4,500 89.00 400500.00
insulated, Twisted Pair, tinned copper conductor cable
Unrmoured cable.
Supplying and laying of following sizes of ISI Mark 1.6
mm thick FRPVC conduit on surface/recess including
2
cutting/filling chases along with conduit accessories etc.
complete as required.
a) 25 mm dia RM 12,000 192.00 2304000.00
b) 20 mm dia RM 2,500 178.00 445000.00
Supplying and laying of following sizes of ISI Mark
3
flexible conduit complete as required.
a) 25 mm dia RM 2,000 123.00 246000.00
Total in figures 2593,03,739.00
Quoted Rates in Figures( Percentage) Less (-)/ Above (+)
Quoted Rates in words ( Percentage)
PART-C 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
4000 4000 4000 4000 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 2320 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 2320 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 4000 4000 4000 4000
750 750
50 EXP. JT. 50 EXP. JT.
AD
AD
AD
AD
5890
A'
1930
B FUME HOOD FUME HOOD

*
*
AD
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
6310
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
*
*
AD
AD
AD
*
C
6310
ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
D
44150
*
6310
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
2000
*
*
FUME HOOD FUME HOOD
E FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME

PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS GAS LV HVAC HVAC PL. PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS GAS LV HVAC HVAC PL. PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS GAS LV HVAC HVAC PL. PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS GAS LV HVAC HVAC PL.
HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD
F
2390
AD AD
G
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
LVL + 5000
1110
G'
4500
AD
AD
H
6700
1'
2' 2 3' 4' 5'
8565 6695 740 6750 LVL ±0.00
1705 1575
J
700
R3
issue revisions
R2
R1
status no.
date description
GFC DRAWING
INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
architects owner
& TECHNOLOGY, MOHALI
urban design
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering
sikka associates architects project management
A-2/1 , Africa Avenue, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029.

Tel:(011)43235235, Fax:: (011)26194481 Web: www.saaindia.net, Email: saa@saaindia.net
STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT
V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
A-1/36, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029
AD Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
Email: shubham_mehro@rediffmail.com
SERVICES CONSULTANTS
dwg type dwg title consultant-2

Plumbing and fire Airconditioning
Electrical
Engineering Techno Abid Husain
Services Engineering Consultants
Consultants Consultants
LAB BLOCK
FIRST FLOOR
CCTV & NETWORKING
LAYOUT PLAN
INST/LB/EL-02
(CCTV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
4000 4000 4000 4000 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 2320 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 2320 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 4000 4000 4000 4000
750 750
50 EXP. JT. 50 EXP. JT.
PRS
AD
AD
AD
AD
5890
FHC
ELE
A'
1930
FUME PR.S. HVAC FUME

PL. PL.
HOOD HOOD
B DOOH EMUF FUME HOOD
AD
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
6310
ACCESS
ACCESS
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
AD
AD
C
6310
ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
D
44150
6310
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
2000
FUME HOOD FUME HOOD
E FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME

F
2390
G
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
LVL + 10000
1110
G'
4500
AD
AD
H
6700
2'1' 2 3' 4' 5'

8565 6695 740 6750 1595 LVL + 9950
TOC + 9420
1705
J
700
K R3
revisions
R2
R1
no.
date description
status
issue
GFC DRAWING
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
AD A-1/36, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
Electrical Plumbing and fire
dwg title
LAB BLOCK
SECOND FLOOR
dwg type
CCTV & NETWORKING
LAYOUT PLAN
INST/LB/EL-03
(CCTV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4
A
FUTR. FUTR. FUTR.
AD
AD
AD
AD
LIFT LIFT LIFT
A'
B
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
AD
AD
C
UP DN
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
AD
AD
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
E FUME FUME FUME

PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS PL. HVAC HVAC LV GAS GAS LV HVAC HVAC PL.
AD
HOOD HOOD HOOD
F
G
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
LVL + 15000
FHC
FHC
UP
G' DN
LV
DN
PRS
AD
UP AD
2'1' 2 3' 4' 5'
J KHURRA
KHURRA
450 X 450 450 X 450
SL
OPE
SLOPE
K
SLOPE
PE
R3
O
SL
revisions
R2
R1
no.
date description
status
issue
GFC DRAWING
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
AD Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
dwg title
LAB BLOCK
THIRD FLOOR
dwg type
CCTV & NETWORKING
LAYOUT PLAN
INST/LB/EL-4
(CCTV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14' 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4
FUTR. FUTR. FUTR.
AD
AD
AD
AD
LIFT LIFT LIFT
A'
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
AD
AD
C
UP DN
ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
D
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
HVAC
AD
G
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
LVL + 20000
FHC
FHC
UP
G'
DN
TERRACE TOC
LV
LV
LVL +19850
DN
PRS
PRS
AD
UP AD
1 2' 2 3' 4' 5'
R3
revisions
R2
R1
no.
date description
status
issue
GFC DRAWING
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
AD Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
dwg title
LAB BLOCK
FOURTH FLOOR
dwg type
CCTV & NETWORKING
LAYOUT PLAN
INST/LB/EL-5
(CCTV)
750
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 / UNLODING
LOADING 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14' 15 JT. LOADING
50 EXP. 16 / UNLODING
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 / UNLODING
LOADING 26 27 750
28 28
50 29
EXP. JT. 30 31 32 33 34 / UNLODING
LOADING 35 36 37 38 39 41
40
LVL - 25 LVL - 25 158900 LVL - 25 LVL - 25
4000 4000 4000 4000 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 2320 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 3020 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 2320 4980 4980 3020 3120 4880 3700 4880 3120 4000 4000 4000 4000
A LOBBY-L3
PRS.
PRS.
PRS.
PRS.
LIFT FUTR. FUTR. FUTR.
AD
AD
AD
AD
LIFT RAMP LIFT LIFT
5890
LOBBY-L3
FHC.
FHC.
FHC.
FHC.
MH
LOBBY-L3 MH MH MH MH LOBBY-L3 MH MH
ELE. MECH.
ELE.
ELE.
ELE.
MECH.
A' UP UP UP UP
1930
FUME PRS. ST-03

FUME
PL. PL.
FUME PRS
ST-03
HVAC FUME
PL. PL.
FUME PRS ST-03 MECH. HVAC FUME
PL. PL.
FUME PRS HVAC FUME
PL.
PL. HVAC HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD HOOD
HOOD MECH. ST-03
B
CONTROL
ACCESS
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
AD
6310
SERVICE CORR.
NMR LAB
DOUBLE HEIGHT
AD
SERVICE CORR. 3M WIDE

CRYOGENIC LAB
DOUBLE HEIGHT DN ANIMAL TISSUE CULTURE
AD
300 MM SUNK DOUBLE HEIGHT

C FHC
PHYSICAL
PROPERTY MEASUREMENT
UP
CONTROL
TECH RM. DEPOSITION FACILITY
ACCESS
TECH RM.
TECH RM. TECH RM.
6310
SERVICE CORR.
CLEAN ROOM,DEVICE TESTING & FABRICATION ACCESS ACCESS
FACILITY CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
UPPER X RAY LAB
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
PART 2.7 M WIDE CORRIDOR CORRIDOR WIDE CORRIDOR
44150
D EQUIPMENT MASS SPECS

NANO
2.5 M WIDE CORRIDOR
2.5 M WIDE CORRIDOR

2.5 M WIDE CORRIDOR
STORAGE TOXICOLOGY LAB LAB
6310
ELECTRON MICROSCOPY
OPEN TO SKY OPEN TO SKY SPM OPEN TO SKY OPEN TO SKY 300 MM SUNK OPEN TO SKY OPEN TO SKY
2000
LVL - 150 LVL - 150 LVL - 150 LVL - 150 LVL - 150 LVL - 150
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
CONTROL
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
ACCESS
200Ø FAN
E P
D/W
H/C
FUME
ACCESS
CONTROL
FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME FUME H/C
D/W
P
F
2390
CORRIDOR
G
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
LVL ± 00
SM
LIFT LIFT
1110
DISCUSSION RM.
AD
LIFT LIFT
FHC
FHC
ST-01 UP
G' TOI (M) J J TOI (M)
4500
TOI (F)
FHC
FHC
1500 LOBBY-L1 ELE. LINE OF
PROF X1 ELE. TOI (F) 1500
CLADDING
X1200 UP PROF DISCUSSION RM.
AHU X1200
M.S RAILING
X1
LV
LV
LIFT
AS/DETAIL
CUTOUT
ABOVE
RECEPTION LIFT
CUTOUT
CUTOUT CUTOUT
ABOVE
CUTOUT ABOVE
ABOVE ST-02
AHU
ABOVE
PRS
PRS
AD
CUTOUT
WIDTH - 1500
AD
ABOVE TREAD - 300
H
RISER - 34EQ
X2 X2
VENT ABOVE
LANDING
CONCOURSE
2100 HT WALL DOUBLE HEIGHT VENT ABOVE
LVL-150 2100 HT WALL
MULTI LAYER
LVL ± 00
6700
1' 2' 2 3' 4' 5' POLYCARBONATE

SHEET ABOVE 1050x300x600
CUTOUT IN RETAIN.
1000x300x200 CUTOUT
IN RETAIN. WALL IL OF
CUTOUT=-900
6695 6750
740 LVL - 600
WALL IL OF
HARDSCAPE @-600
CUTOUT=-1280
1400x1000x230
250X300X200 200X300X200 CUTOUT 200X3000X200 CUTOUT 450X300X200 CUTOUT CUTOUT IN WALL IL 600x300x250 CU
1000x300x500 1100X230X400 IN RETAIN. WALL IL. IN RETAIN. WAL
CUTOUT IN IN RETAIN. WALL IN RETAIN. WALL OF CUTOUT= +1350
RETAIN. WALL CUTOUT IN RETAIN. CUTOUT IN WALL IL. OF CUTOUT = -900 IL. OF CUTOUT = -900 IL.OF CUTOUT -900
RCC WALL @-150 LVL WALL IL OF OF CUTOUT = +1950
1705 5575 WITH 1100 HIGH

RAILING ABOVE
CUTOUT=-1280
1800 WIDE CORRIDOR

VOID
CUTOUT
RAMP LVL - 25 RAMP TOI(F)
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
ABOVE
700
K
2000x1000x230
SEWERAGE SUMP
2850 X 2370
WIDTH - 2000 WIDTH - 2000 TOI(F) RECORD 3785 x 2795 CUTOUT IN WALL IL
SEWERAGE SUMP
1.5MX1.5M X2M SLOPE - 1:10 SLOPE - 1:10 1.5MX1.5M X2M
RM. OF CUTOUT= +1350
EQ
LVL ± 00
EQ
LENGTH - 24750 LENGTH - 24750
3.8 M DRIVEWAY 3200 x 4110
LVL - 1790 TOI(M) SERVICE YARD DRAIN
3350 x 4110
UPS/ELE. SEWERAGE SUMP
LVL - 1790
JANITOR 1.5MX1.5M X2M
TWO WHEELER PARKING UPS & ELE. RM.
EQ R3
issue revisions
R2
TOI(M) MAINTENANCE ROOM R1
status no.
UP DROP OFF UP 7420 X 3300 10565 x 4845
date description
GFC DRAWING
architects owner
urban design
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
dwg type dwg title consultant-2

AD
Electrical
LAB BLOCK
GROUND FLOOR
CCTV & NETWORKING
LAYOUT PLAN
INST/LB/EL-01
(CCTV)
LVL-7600
700
UPS & ELE. RM.
TOI(F)
RECORD SEWERAGE SUMP
RM 1.5MX1.5M X2M
TOI(M)
SEWERAGE SUMP
1.5MX1.5M X2M
FIRE TANK- 1
COOLER CAP.=150 CUM
COND.
CUTOUT FOR
ACCESS
900x900
(beam bottom)
COOLER
FIRE TANK- 2
CAP.=100 CUM
COND. CUTOUT FOR
ACCESS
14610
900x900
(beam bottom)
1370
COOLER
COND.
1.5MX1.5M X2M SEWERAGE SUMP

RAW WATER TANK
2MX2M X2M
CAP.=160 CUM
CUTOUT FOR
COOLER ACCESS
900x900
COND. (beam bottom)
CUTOUT FOR
ACCESS
900x900
(beam bottom)
TREATED WATER TANK

2880
CAP.=160 CUM
CUTOUT FOR HVAC TREATED

ACCESS WATER TANK
900x900 CAP.=75 CUM
(beam bottom)
45155 560Ø MH COVER
CUTOUT FOR HVAC TREATED

WATER TANK
ACCESS
CAP.=75 CUM R3
issue revisions
900x900
(beam bottom) R2
3780
R1
status no.
date description
4400
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Electrical
dwg title
AD
PUMP ROOM & AC PLANT
ROOM
dwg type
CCTV,DATA,TEL,WIFI LAYOUT
BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN
scale 1:150 @A1
dwg. no
INST/AB/EL-01(LV) date 05.12.2018
dealt: RAMESH KUMAR
checked by: SANDEEP NEGI
2045
2770
720
1500 4200 1675
B
AD
LVL-7600
1580 2840 2290 3520 1730 4200 1110 2040
VENT ABOVE 230 230 230
2550
750
2100 HT WALL LANDING
MULTI LAYER LVL-150
B B B B 2' 2 B B B
6700
POLYCARBONATE
SHEET ABOVE
8000 8000 8565 6695 6750
4200
1135
1705 1575
350
395
B
B CUTOUT
ABOVE
B SEWERAGE SUMP
2850 X 2370
5270
1.5MX1.5M X2M
250 WIDE DRAIN
3.8 M DRIVEWAY
B EQ
1730
SEWERAGE SUMP
4030
1.0MX1.0M X2M MANHOLE
MANHOLE 900X800
900X800
2300
B
0067-LVL
6330
B
2315
6260
2470
B
3425 3425
11950 3150
NOTE: 14 EQ.
DIVISIONS OF
Q
CIRCLE OF
RADIUS 16030
B
8390
°
155
16
5°
0
800
R3
revisions
B R2
R1
no.
0
date description
750
status
issue
SEWERAGE SUMP
1.5MX1.5M X 2M
5615
100∅ SUMP
LVL-7600 INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
RISING MAIN
800 355 & TECHNOLOGY, MOHALI

B 0 B urban design
architects
masterplanning
0
architecture
700
interior design
engineering
800 sikka associates architects project management
0 A-2/1 , Africa Avenue, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029.

B 6917
V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
dwg title
AD
SEMINAR BLOCK
dwg type
CCTV,DATA,TEL,WIFI LAYOUT
BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN
scale 1:175 @A1
dwg. no
date
INST/SB/EL-01(LV) 05.12.2018
dealt:
RAMESH KUMAR
checked by:
SANDEEP NEGI
1 2 3 4 5 6 S2 7 E3 8 9 10 11 12 13
3530 1765 4630 3230 660 4350 4350 660 3230 4630 1765 3530
AD
173 170
170 172
4265
167 177 165
S4 179 177
162
181
162 181
B
1365
C
2565
E4 E2
D S6
1480
E
2515
S1 S1
F
1200
G
S4 S5
S3
S2 E1
1 2 3 4 5 6 S2 7 E3 8 9 10 11 12 13
3530 1765 4630 3230 660 4350 4350 660 3230 4630 1765 3530
A
4265
S4
status
issue
FD
1365
FD
FD FD
C FT FT INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
FT
FT
2565
TTB
FD
urban design
masterplanning
E4 E2
architects
architecture
FD FD FD interior design
engineering
D S6 sikka associates architects project management
1480

consultant-1
E Mehro Consultants
FD A-1/36, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
2515
S1 S1
consultant-2
Airconditioning
FT Electrical Plumbing and fire
FT
FT Engineering Techno Abid Husain
FT
F FT FT
1200
FD FD
FD FD FD
FD
dwg title
S4 S5 OFFICERS' HOUSING
S3
S5 CCTV,DATA,TEL,WIFI LAYOUT PLAN FOR
dwg type
SECOND FLOOR PLAN(TYPICAL FOR 4th,
S2 E1 6th,8th FLOOR PLAN),TERRACE FLOOR PLAN
scale 1:75 @ A1
dwg. no
INST/OH/EL- date 05.12.2018
02(LV)
dealt PARVEEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 S2 7 E3 8 9 10 11 12 13
AD
3530 1765 4630 3230 660 4350 4350 660 3230 4630 1765 3530
A
4265
S4
B
FD
1365
FD
FD FD
C FT FT
FT
FT
2565
TTB
FD
E4 E2
FD FD FD
D S6
1480
E
FD FD
2515
S1 S1
FT
FT
FT FT
F FT FT
1200
FD FD
FD FD FD
FD
G
S4 S5
S3
S2 E1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3530 1765 4630 3230 660 S2 4350 E3 4350 660 3230 4630 1765 3530
A
4265
S4
B AD
1365
status
issue
2565

AD
owner
E4 E2
D
1480
S6 urban design
masterplanning
architects
architecture
E interior design
engineering

2515
consultant-1
S1 S1
Mehro Consultants
AD

F Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
1200
consultant-2
Airconditioning
G Engineering Techno Abid Husain
S4 S5
dwg title
S3
E1 OFFICERS' HOUSING
S2
CCTV,DATA,TEL,WIFI LAYOUT PLAN FOR
dwg type
GROUND & FIRST FLOOR PLAN
(TYPICAL FOR 3rd,5th,7th FLOOR PLAN)
scale 1:75 @ A1
dwg. no
INST/OH/EL- date 05.12.2018
01(LV)
dealt PARVEEN
A
A
1
1
12
00 00
16
12
15
2
2
B
15
16
B
AD
S2
16
15
15
16
C
C
36
45
45
36
D4
3
58
25
E2
25
58
D
D
15
25
E
E
5
71
S1
71
25
1
S1
5
5
F 5 4
F
71
71
5
D3
58
25
S3
25
58
G
G
17
0
3
30
17
5
16
15
15
16
H
H
D2 16
15
15
16
J
J
K
1820
L
1975
M S2
S3
1790
D1
N
2388 3230 3137 2481
1' 2' 3230 3' 4' S4 5' 6'

GROUND FLOOR PLAN E1
SCALE 1:75
A
A
1
1
12
00
15
16
2
2
00
12
16
1
B
B
5
16
S2 15
15
16
C
C
45
36
36
45
D4
3
3
58
25
E2
25
58
D
D
5
15
25
E
E
71
71 S1
25
15
S1
5
4 71
F
F
5
5
71
D3 R3
R2
revisions
58
25
S3 ELECTRICAL ROOM LAYOUT
25
58
R1 20-02-18
G CHANGE & GENERAL REVISION
17
G
30
no. date description

30
17
status
5
issue
15
16
H
16
15
H
D2 INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
16
15
15
16
J
J
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering
K sikka associates architects project management

1820
L V IN ECH
TV
consultant-1
1975
B
TT
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
M Email: shubham_mehro@rediffmail.com
S2 S3 SERVICES CONSULTANTS
consultant-2
Airconditioning
1790

D1 Services Engineering Consultants
N
dwg title
2388 3230 3230 3137 2481 MARRIED SCHOLARS' HOSTEL
FIRST & THIRD FLOOR PLAN
SCALE 1:75 1' 2' 3' 4' S4 5' 6'
dwg type
E1 GROUND & FIRST FLOOR PLAN
(TYPICAL FOR 3RD FLOOR PLAN)
INST/MSH/EL-
01(LV)
A
A
1
1
00
12
16
12
15
2
00
B
1
16
AD
5
S2
16
15
15
16
C
C
36
54
45
36
D4
3
8
25
5
E2
25
58
D
D
25
15
15
E
E
5
S1
71
71
25
S1
5
5 4
F
F
71
71
5
D3
25
58
58 S3
25
G
30
17
G
17
30
5 16
15
15
16
H
H
D2
16
15
15
16
J
J
K
1820
L
TV
1975
B
TT
M S2
S3
1790
D1
N
2388 3230 3230 3137 2481

SECOND FLOOR PLAN
SCALE 1:75 1' 2' 3'
E1
4' S4 5' 6'
R3
R2
revisions
ELECTRICAL ROOM LAYOUT
R1 20-02-18
CHANGE & GENERAL REVISION
date description
status
issue
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Electrical
dwg title
MARRIED SCHOLARS' HOSTEL
dwg type
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
INST/MSH/EL-
02(LV)
C
9
SHOP
5
414
8
PL. SHAFT
5
558
SHOP
7
SHOP
80
6 60
SHOP
1 2 3 4 5 80
7440 42
SHOP
30
00
35
21
1050
LVL ± 00
SHOP PL. SHAFT

300X535
PROJECTION
A ABOVE
MULTIPURPOSE HALL
PANTRY
LVL ± 00
5
66
11
C
FH
N
GRC JALI MALE TIO
CUT JEC
O
OUT PR OVE
AB
FEMALE
H/C TOI.
CORRIDOR
LVL ± 00
R3
issue revisions
R2
R1
status no.
date description
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Electrical Plumbing and fire Airconditioning
AD
dwg title
HUB
dwg type
CCTV,DATA,TEL LAYOUT PLAN
GROUND FLOOR
SCALE: 1:100@A1
dwg. no
INST/HUB/EL-
01(LV) date: 5.12.2018
dealt HARDEEP check. SANDEEP NEGI
S1 S2
S5
AD
900 HIGH PARAPET WALL PLUMB. SHAFT 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL
WITH 200 HIGH RAILING 280X885 WITH 200 HIGH RAILING PROJ. WITH 200 HIGH RAILING WITH 200 HIGH RAILING PROJ. WITH 200 HIGH RAILING 900 HIGH PARAPET WALL PROJ.
ABOVE ABOVE WITH 200 HIGH RAILING ABOVE
BAL. BAL. BAL.

BAL. BAL. BAL. BAL. BAL. BAL.
BEDROOM SUITE ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM SUITE BEDROOM

4345
50 Ø SPOUT
PARAPET
WITH 200 HIGH RAILING
KHURRA
B TOILET TOILET TOILET TOILET

TOILET
TOILET TERRACE
1685
E
Y LIN
TOILET
LLE
TOILET TOILET
C
VA
1130
SHAFT SHAFT SHAFT SHAFT SHAFT
D
1500 WIDE CORRIDOR 1500 WIDE CORRIDOR
1730
AD
AD
AD
E E4 E2
LV SHAFT
KHURRA
UP
SDB-HVAC
ELEC
3530
MRL BED LIFT

1700X3000
CAP-15 PAX
TERRACE
CUTOUT
DN
F
345 HIGH
PARAPET
S1 E1 S2
3845 1900 1945 1715 2130 2460 1385 1385 2460 3845 1485 2360 2090 1755 3845
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
S2
PROJ. PLUMB. SHAFT PROJ. PROJ.
S1 PLUMB. SHAFT PROJ. PROJ. PLUMB. SHAFT PROJ. PROJ. PROJ.
ABOVE AT CILL & F.FL. LVL. ABOVE ABOVE ABOVE ABOVE AT CILL & F.FL. LVL. ABOVE
UP UP
A
BEDROOM
ROOM R3
issue revisions
SUITE LOUNGE
R2
4345
VERANDAH R1
status no.
DINNING date description
KITCHEN
owner
B TOILET H/C
TOILET & TECHNOLOGY, MOHALI
1685
AD
TOI (M)
10MM UP urban design
TOILET
architects
DROP LOBBY/RECEPTION masterplanning
architecture
C interior design
engineering
1130
SHAFT SHAFT TOI (F) SHAFT SHAFT AD sikka associates architects project management

D STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT
1500 WIDE CORRIDOR 1500 WIDE CORRIDOR
BRICK PIER
1730
V IN ECH
AD
LOUVER LOUVER
E E4 E2
consultant-1
FHC
DB-F2
ELEC Mehro Consultants

PLUMB. SHAFT PLUMB. SHAFT
WITH GRC WITH GRC A-1/36, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029
MRL BED
3530
JALLI IN FRONT ENTRY JALLI IN FRONT Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
LIFT Email: shubham_mehro@rediffmail.com
ELE. TRENCH
consultant-2
Airconditioning
UP Electrical Plumbing and fire
CUTOUT Engineering Techno Abid Husain
ABOVE
F Consultants Consultants
dwg title
2360 2090 1755 3845 GUEST HOUSE
S1 S2
13 14 15 16
dwg type
CCTV,DATA,TEL LAYOUT
RAMP UP
E1
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
3820 1900 1945 2130 2460 1385 1385
LVL -600
2460 3845 1485 INST/GH/EL-
1 2 3 4 1715 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 01(LV)
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
33145
115 2930 D3 680 680 2930 680 680 2930 740 2065
S1 2065 740 2930 680 680 530 2400 680 680 2930 680 680 810 2120 115
E3
1000 MM WIDE 1000 MM WIDE 1000 MM WIDE 1000 MM WIDE 1000 MM WIDE
BALCONY ABOVE BALCONY ABOVE BALCONY ABOVE BALCONY ABOVE BALCONY ABOVE
900 115
8
3530
G G G G
G
7
1730
SPACE FOR DRINKING

WATER COOLER
6
S3 S3
FHC
1545
5
E2
E4
UP UP UP
LVL. -600
3040
RAMP UP LVL. -100

SLOPE=1:12
LVL. ± 00
UP 300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON
800 HIGH WALL
4
1545
3
1730
2
4430
S1
1
1115
D1 D2 E1
S2
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
33145
115 2930 680 680 2930 680 680 2930 740 2065 2065 740 2930 680 680 530 2400 680 680 2930 680 680 810 2120 115
115 TH.BRICK PIER 115 TH.BRICK PIER 115 TH.BRICK PIER

300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH 300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON RAILING ON RAILING ON RAILING ON RAILING ON RAILING ON RAILING ON
800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL 800 HIGH WALL
900 115
8
3530
R3
issue revisions
R2
R1
status no.
7 date description
F.F.L. +3680
1730
SPACE FOR DRINKING

WATER COOLER
300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON
800 HIGH WALL
6
KHURRA
450X450 1500 X 350mm
CUTOUT IN SLAB
1545
owner
1500 X 600mm
CUTOUT IN SLAB
5 & TECHNOLOGY, MOHALI

DN DN
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
3040
300 MM HIGH
T.O.C. +3450 900 MM HIGH 900 MM HIGH
RAILING RAILING
RAILING ON interior design
800 HIGH WALL
engineering
UP UP sikka associates architects project management
300 MM HIGH
300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON
RAILING ON 800 HIGH WALL Tel:(011)43235235, Fax:: (011)26194481 Web: www.saaindia.net, Email: saa@saaindia.net
800 HIGH WALL
4
1545
3 PL. CUTOUT
50X50
KHURRA
450X450
V IN ECH
PERFORATED
1730
WALL AS/DETAIL
300 MM HIGH
consultant-1
RAILING ON
800 HIGH WALL
2 Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
230mm WIDE SERVICES CONSULTANTS
consultant-2
300 MM HIGH
PROJECTION
4430
RAILING ON
BELOW
800 HIGH WALL
Electrical
dwg title
1115
300 MM HIGH
300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON
800 HIGH WALL
HOSTEL
300 MM HIGH
RAILING ON SHEAR WALL SHEAR WALL SHEAR WALL SHEAR WALL SHEAR WALL
230mm WIDE 230mm WIDE 230mm WIDE RAILING ON 230mm WIDE 230mm WIDE 230mm WIDE 230mm WIDE
800 HIGH WALL BELOW 300 MM HIGH BELOW BELOW BELOW 300 MM HIGH BELOW
PROJECTION PROJECTION PROJECTION 800 HIGH WALL PROJECTION PROJECTION PROJECTION PROJECTION
RAILING ON RAILING ON
BELOW BELOW
CCTV,DATA TEL,WIFI LAYOUT PLAN FOR
dwg type
BELOW 800 HIGH WALL BELOW BELOW 800 HIGH WALL BELOW BELOW
GROUND & FIRST TO TERRACE

TYPICAL FLOOR
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
INST/H/EL-
01(LV)
S2 E3
S2 E3
1 2 3 4 5
115 3530 5150 6540 4760 115 1 2 3 4 5
115 115 3530 5150 6540 4760 115
115
F
F
2100
2100
E
E
1975
1975
D
D
3795
E2
3795
E2
C
C
AD
4480
4480
S1
S1
B
B
T.O.C.
4015
LVL. +2950
4015
A
115
FIRST FLOOR PLAN A
115
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
S2
E1
S2
E1
1 2 3 4 5
115 3530 5150 6540 4760 115
115
F
2100
LVL. +2950 R3
issue revisions
R2
R1
status no.
E date description
1975
D INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
urban design
3795
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
CT CT CT CT CT CT engineering
T.O.C. A-2/1 , Africa Avenue, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029.

CT

LVL. +5950
C
CT
V IN ECH
CT
consultant-1
4480
Mehro Consultants
CT
T.O.C.+ 7300
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
B Consultants
Services Engineering
dwg title
4015
DIRECTOR'S RESIDENCE
AD
dwg type
CCTV,DATA.TEL FOR
GROUND, FIRST & TERRACE
A
FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN
115
TERRACE FLOOR PLAN
INST/DR/EL
-01(LV)
E3
1 2 3 4
S2
2970 2445 2970
A
OPEN TO SKY
3670
E2 E4
S1
B
1500
R2
R1
TTB date description
status
C
issue
TELE TAG
BLOCK(10 PAIR) PLANTER INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
urban design
UP UP
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
E1 engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Electrical
dwg title
DIRECTOR'S RESIDENCE
(SERVANTS' QUARTER)
AD
dwg type
CCTV,DATA LAYOUT PLAN
SERVANT QUARTER
INST/SQ/EL-
01 (LV)
1 1'
4820 2 6230 3 6140 4 2700 5 6140 6 6230 7 7'
4820 8
37980
2190
PL.SHAFT
PL.SHAFT PL.SHAFT
G
1500 WIDE DIRTY CORRIDOR

5480
PLUMBING & AHU

CUTOUT ABOVE
AD
HISTOPATHOLOGY RM. NECROPSY ROOM CAGE ASSEMBLY CLINICAL CHEMISTRY RAT ROOM RABBIT ROOM RECOVERY SURGERY
DOUBLE SPACE FOR MICE ROOM ROOM
ROOM DOOR ROOM
AUTOCLAVE
LAUNDRY &
CAGE WASHER
A.H.U.
(For Clean Areas)
FREEZER
PL. SHAFT PL. SHAFT
F
2400 WIDE CLEAN CORRIDOR
CLEAN CORRIDOR
CT
2700
CT
CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT
DB-HE/2
DB-HE/1
E
CT
PL. SHAFT PL. SHAFT DB-G1
19550
CT
IMAGING
ANIMAL BEHAVIOUR
ROOM
CT
RADIOLOGY
QUARANTINE ROOM TERMINAL SURGERY
5295
SICK ROOM 2 FEED PREP. ROOM BEDDING ROOM

ROOM
CT
MICE ROOM RAT ROOM RABBIT ROOM
CT
DB-G1 DIRTY CORRIDOR
ACCESS CONTROL
DB-G1
CT
AD
CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT
D
CT
PROJECTION
ABOVE LVL ± 00.0 USDB-GF G.
GENTS LOCKER &
CHANGE ROOM
CT
MDB-ANIMAL HOUSE F.H.C. (2125 X 1335)

DB-G2
1100MM
CT
HI. RAILING
ELEC.RM. AHU
D/W DB-G2
3245
8 5 1
BATTERY
LADIES LOCKER &

CUTOUT
CHANGE ROOM
ABOVE OFFICE
10KVA UPS DB-G2 UP
UDB-G L.
C RECEIVING AREA
1450 930
STORAGE ROOM
ENTRANCE LOBBY 6U DATA RACK
AD
B UP LVL ± 00.0 FOR DATA POINT

PL.SHAFT PL.SHAFT
TELE TAG
BLOCK(20 PAIR)
TTB
A
1800
PROJECTION
EP 2000 EP ABOVE
1 1'
4820 2 6230 3 E3
6140 4 2700 5 6 7 7' 8
6230
37980 6140
2190 2630 450 R3
issue revisions
PL.SHAFT PL.SHAFT 4820 PL. SHAFT R2
R1
status no.
300
date description
G KHURRA
KHURRA KHURRA
450X450 PARAPET WALL PARAPET WALL 450X450
PL.SHAFT
HVAC 110X200
CUTOUT ABOVE. INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
LAB-2 LAB-4
LAB-3
5480
LAB-1
A.H.U.
PLUMBING & AHU 800X2900
CUTOUT IN FLOOR SLAB & TECHNOLOGY, MOHALI
SHAFT (For Clean Areas)
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
CUTOUT IN interior design
FLOOR SLAB
engineering
PL. SHAFT
F A-2/1 , Africa Avenue, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029.
2700
LVL UP
UP 2400 WIDE CORRIDOR
RIDGE LINE TELE TAG
V IN ECH
BLOCK(10 PAIR)
PARAPET WALL
PARAPET WALL VDB-AC/1F
AD
CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT
TTB DB-1F UDB-1F

CT
E PL.SHAFT
PL.SHAFT RIDGE LINE
consultant-1
SHAFT
CT
E4 Mehro Consultants
CT
HVAC PANEL
CT CT CT CT
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
5295
CT
(IN SCOPE OF HVAC WORK) Email: shubham_mehro@rediffmail.com

CT
PROJECTION
LAB-5 PROJECTION
TERRACE
ABOVE
LAB-6 LAB-7 LAB-8 ABOVE SERVICES CONSULTANTS
CT
E2
consultant-2
CT
Airconditioning
KHURRA
CT
CT
450X450
750 Services Engineering Consultants
Consultants
CT
Consultants
CT
CT
D
CT
32Ø SPOUT
CT
CT
dwg title
PARAPET
ANIMAL HOUSE
CT
DETAIL A
3245
SHAFT
CT
WALL
CT
TRAP DOOR
ON ROOF F.H.C.
17
CUTOUT IN
CT
25 20
CT
CT
FLOOR SLAB
KHURRA
S1 S1
dwg type
TRAP DOOR DN
CCTV,DATA.TEL,WIFI LAYOUT
CT
450X450 ON ROOF
CT
PARAPET WALL
AD
CT
C KHURRA
KHURRA PARAPETCTWALL
CT

110X200 MS
450X450
450X450 TERRACE CUTOUT TO BE
CT
CT
CLOSED AT
B TERRACE LVL.
RIDGE LINE
PL.SHAFT SHAFT
CT
CT
PARAPET WALL
dwg. no
CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT
INST/AH/EL-
A 01(LV)
150
PARAPET WALL
LVL + 3250 TOC + 2420
LVL + 3250 SLOPE
PERFORATED
WALL
CUTOUT ABOVE
CUTOUT CUTOUT CUTOUT
CUTOUT
FHC
PANTRY H/C
2000CFM AHU LUNCH ROOM
ELEC. 2.20KW/3PHASE
TOI(F)
DOC. RM.
TOI(M)
LVL + 2475 11000CFM AHU
VAV
7.50KW/3PHASE
FHC
DIRECTOR ROOM
1800MM WIDE CORRIDOR

VAV
ACCESS
CONTROL
PLANTER
RECEPTION &
WAITING
MEETING ROOM
3000 CFM AHU

3.70KW/3PHASE
VAV
LVL + 2325
VAV
LOUNGE
CONTROL
ACCESS
DISCUSSION
ROOM
CONFERENCE ROOM DATA RACK FOR

ASSISTANCE DATA/CCTV
ADMIN CORRIDOR
ASSISTANCE
OFFICER-2 ADMIN OFFICER-1
ADMIN
ESTABLISHMENT
AUDIT
5000 CFM AHU
3.70KW/3PHASE
PURCHASE
CONTROL SECTION
LVL + 2325
R3
revisions
R2
R1
no.
date description
status
issue
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering

V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
consultant-2
Airconditioning
dwg title
ADMIN BLOCK
CCTV,DATA,TEL,WIFI
dwg type
LAYOUT PLAN
GROUND FLOOR
INST/AB/EL-02
(LV)
TRENCH WITH CHECKERED PLATES
TRENCH WITH SOLID RCC SLAB(NON OPENABLE TYPE)
AD
E3
1100 HIGH FENCING
OVER 1000 BRICK WORK
100 Ø SLEEVE 100 Ø SLEEVE 100 Ø SLEEVE
FUTURE OIL TANKS

(HSD)
500KVA, 415V DG SET-5 E E E
E (SILENT TYPE) A
600MM WIDE TRENCH
FUTURE E
1200MM WIDE TRENCH

100 Ø SLEEVE
500KVA, 415V DG SET-4

1465 1465 1465 1420
780 780 1465 1420
8300
(SILENT TYPE)
100 Ø SLEEVE
(SILENT TYPE)
(SILENT TYPE)
(SILENT TYPE)
E2
500KVA, 415V DG SET-6 A E4
2300
E (SILENT TYPE) A
FUTURE
600MM WIDE TRENCH A A A
600 WIDE TRENCH 600 WIDE TRENCH
600 WIDE TRENCH
1795
600 WIDE TRENCH
800A TPN 1250A TPN

AL BUSDUCT 1250A TPN
AL BUSDUCT AL BUSDUCT
600MM WIDE TRENCH

E (SILENT TYPE) A
MAIN LT CUM SYNCHRONIZING PANEL
SLOPE FUTURE
RS2
L.T PANEL ROOM 1900 X 800 LOUVER FOR
EXHAUST AIR (B.O.B)
24725 X 7085
CAP-1 CAP-2 CAP-3 CAP-4

4.5M WIDE ROAD SHAFT D2 1200MM WIDE TRENCH
370X700
2000A TPN
AL BUSDUCT 2500A TPN
AL BUSDUCT
TOILET 1000MM WIDE TRENCH
W1
2575X 3090
D1
32 U 1250KVA 1250KVA 1600KVA 1600KVA S1

DATA OFFICE 11/0.433 11/0.433 11/0.433 11/0.433
RACK
4305 X 4000
TRF-1 TRF-2 TRF-3 TRF-4
HT PANEL ROOM
(OIL TYPE) (OIL TYPE) (OIL TYPE) (OIL TYPE)
5770X7320
SLOPE 1:15 600 WIDE
W2
OLTC OLTC OLTC OLTC

PROJECTION
ABOVE TRF-1(WORKING)
6000X6000
TRF-2(WORKING) TRF-3(WORKING)
6000X6000 TRF-4(STAND BY)
6000X6000 6000X6000 R3
D2
revisions
R2
V1 RS2 V1 RS1 V1 RS1 V1 RS1 V1 RS1
R1
no.
date description
status
issue
SHAFT SHAFT
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
700X370 600 WIDE 700X370
SLOPE
SHAFT PROJECTION
700X370
ABOVE E1 S2
owner
urban design
architects
masterplanning
architecture
interior design
engineering
6 M WIDE ROAD A-2/1 , Africa Avenue, Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi-110029.

SLOPE 1:15 Tel:(011)43235235, Fax:: (011)26194481 Web: www.saaindia.net, Email: saa@saaindia.net
V IN ECH
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
GROUND FLOOR PLAN SERVICES CONSULTANTS
consultant-2
Airconditioning
dwg title
SUBSTATION BUILDING
dwg type
CCTV,DATA,TEL
SUBSTATION LAYOUT PLAN
E3 INST/ESS/EL
-01(LV)
A B C D E F G H J K L M N
AD
GROUND FLOOR
S2
E3
S1
9
status
issue
E2 E4 INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE
owner
urban design
S3 masterplanning
architects
architecture
interior design
engineering

4 Tel:(011)43235235, Fax:: (011)26194481 Web: www.saaindia.net, Email: saa@saaindia.net
consultant-1
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
3 SERVICES CONSULTANTS
consultant-2
Electrical
Consultants
2 Services
Consultants
Engineering
Consultants
dwg title
1 STAFF HOUSING
dwg type
S1 E1 (TYPICAL FOR 3RD FLOOR PLAN)
TYPICAL FLOOR PLAN
scale 1:50 @ A1
(1ST & 3RD FLOOR)
INST/SH/EL- date 05.12.2018
S2 01(LV)
dealt UZAIR
AD
SECOND FLOOR
3330 1500 2180 1200 715 2130 2030 715 1200 2180 1500 3330
9
1443
8
918
7
2215
status
issue
GFC DRAWING
1280
owner
1430
urban design
masterplanning
architects
architecture
interior design
engineering

4 Tel:(011)43235235, Fax:: (011)26194481 Web: www.saaindia.net, Email: saa@saaindia.net
consultant-1
985
Mehro Consultants
Tel: 26169333/ 26172156 Fax: 46023052
3 Email: shubham_mehro@rediffmail.com
718
consultant-2
Electrical
2 Services Engineering Consultants
928
dwg title
1 STAFF HOUSING
dwg type
SECOND & TERRACE FLOOR PLAN
TERRACE FLOOR PLAN scale 1:50 @ A1
INST/SH/EL- date 05.12.2018

02(LV)
dealt UZAIR

PDF PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTITUTE OF NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Habitat Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062

Tender document for the

(Two Bid System)

Percentage Rate Tender for Works

Technical / Eligibility Bid

Notice Inviting Tender, Eligibility Criteria, General Conditions of Contract

Approved makes & Tender Drawings

NOTICE INVITING TENDER, ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA,

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR SUB CONTRACTOR

1.0 PRESS NOTICE 4

2.0 PART-A: TECHNICAL NIT/ELIGIBILITY BID 5

2.1 NIT/TENDER DOCUMENT 6-7

ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA 8-9

RECEIPT OF DEPOSITION OF EMD 10-10

NOTICE INVITING TENDER-NIT CPWD-6 11-14

CPWD -7 PERCENTAGE RATE TENDER 15-17

PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES (A TO F) 18-24

FORM OF EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (BANK GUARANTEE BOND) 25

FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE BOND) 26-27

INTEGRITY PACT 28-35

FORM G & FORM H 36-37

MANUFACTURER AUTHORISATION FORM (Annexure A-F) 38-43

3.0 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR SUB CONTRACTOR

FOR CCTV WORK 44-49

FOR DATA NETWORKING SYSTEM 50-55

FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 56-61

FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 62-67

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL 68-68

PART B For Particular Specifications, Approved Makes and

PART C for Financial bid

Habitat Centre, Sector-64, Phase-X, Mohali-160062

1.0. Press Notice

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

NIT NO: 04/INST/2018-19

Estimated cost put to tender : ₹25, 93, 03,739/-

Earnest Money : ₹35, 94,000/-.

Period of Completion : 06 (Six) Months (180 days)

Pre Bid conference on : 05-03-2019 at INST at 11:00 AM

Uploading of clarification on website : 08-03-2019

For NIT/Tender Documents Details/downloads or any other correction /amendments /modification /

Period of Completion 06 (Six ) Months

Earnest Money Deposit: ₹ 35,94,000/-

Performance Guarantee 5% of tendered value of schedule

Security Deposit 2.5% of tendered value

Tender to be uploaded on website On 18-02-2019

Last Date of submission of pre-bid queries On 28-02-2019 Up to 5:00 PM

Uploading Pre bid Clarification/ On 08-03-2019

Last Date and time of submission of Tender 18-03-2019 up to 3:00 PM

INST shall not be responsible for any postal delay

Date and time of opening of 18-03-2019 at 3:30 PM

Date and time of opening of Financial bid To be intimated later

Validity of offer 60 days from the date of opening of Tender

(Tata Consulting Engineers) (Sikka Architect Associates)

Consultant (Engineering) Institute of Nano Science & Technology

Time and date of opening of

Estimated cost put to

Performance report of works referred to in form “G” ----In form “H”

6. List of Documents to be submitted along with the tender: